Heidenhain 426 430 TNC Manual 2001

TNC 426
TNC 430
NC Software
280 476-xx
280 477-xx
User’s Manual
HEIDENHAIN Conversational
Format
10/2001
Controls on the visual display unit Programming path movements
Split screen layout Approach/depart contour
Switch between machining or
programming modes FK free contour programming
Soft keys for selecting functions in screen Straight line
Switching the soft-key rows Circle center/pole for polar coordinates

Changing the screen settings
(only BC 120) Circle with center
Typewriter keyboard for entering letters and symbols Circle with radius
File names
Comments Circular arc with tangential connection
ISO Chamfer
programs
Machine operating modes Corner rounding
MANUAL OPERATION
Tool functions
ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Enter and call tool length and radius
POSITIONING WITH MDI Cycles, subprograms and program section

repeats
PROGRAM RUN, SINGLE BLOCK
Define and call cycles
PROGRAM RUN, FULL SEQUENCE Enter and call labels for subprogramming and
program section repeats
Programming modes
Program stop in a program
PROGRAMMING AND EDITING
Enter touch probe functions in a program
TEST RUN
Coordinate axes and numbers: Entering and editing
Program/file management, TNC functions Select coordinate axes or
Select or delete programs and files ... enter them into the program
External data transfer
... Numbers
Enter program call in a program
Decimal point
MOD functions
Change arithmetic sign
Displaying help texts for NC error messages
Polar coordinates
Pocket calculator
Incremental dimensions
Moving the highlight, going directly to blocks, cycles
and parameter functions Q parameters
Move highlight Capture actual position
Go directly to blocks, cycles and parameter Skip dialog questions, delete words
functions
Override control knobs for feed rate/spindle speed Confirm entry and resume dialog
100 100 End block
Clear numerical entry or TNC error
message
50 150 50 150
Abort dialog, delete program section
F % S %
0 0
TNC Models, Software and Features
This manual describes functions and features provided by the TNCs as
of the following NC software numbers.
TNC Model NC Software No.

TNC 426 CB, TNC 426 PB 280 476-xx
TNC 426 CF, TNC 426 PF 280 477-xx
TNC 426 M 280 476-xx
TNC 426 ME 280 477-xx
TNC 430 CA, TNC 430 PA 280 476-xx
TNC 430 CE, TNC 430 PE 280 477-xx
TNC 430 M 280 476-xx
TNC 430 ME 280 477-xx
The suffixes E and F indicate the export versions of the TNC which
have the following limitations:
n Linear movement is possible in no more than 4 axes simultaneously.
The machine tool builder adapts the useable features of the TNC to his
machine by setting machine parameters. Some of the functions
described in this manual may not be among the features provided by
your machine tool.
TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include:
n Probing function for the 3-D touch probe
n Digitizing option
n Tool measurement with the TT 130
n Rigid tapping
n Returning to the contour after an interruption
Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the
features of your machine.
Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer
programming courses for the TNCs. We recommend these courses as
an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing
information and ideas with other TNC users.
Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual:

All of the touch probe functions are described in a separate
manual. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy
of this User's Manual. ID number: 329 203-xx.
Location of use
The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance
with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for use primarily
in industrially-zoned areas.
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 I

New features of the NC software 280 476-xx
n Thread milling cycles 262 to 267 (see “Fundamentals of thread
milling” on page 235)
n Tapping Cycle 209 with chip breaking (see “TAPPING WITH CHIP
BREAKING (Cycle 209)” on page 233)
n Cycle 247(see “DATUM SETTING (Cycle 247)” on page 324)
n Cycle run by means of point tables (see “Point Tables” on page 206)
n Entering two miscellaneous functions M (see “Entering
Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP” on page 176)
n Program stop with M01 (see “Optional Program Run Interruption”
on page 416)
n Starting NC programs automatically (see “Automatic Program Start”
on page 414)
n Selecting datum tables in the NC program (see “Selecting a datum
table in the part program” on page 322)
n Editing the active datum table in the program run mode of operation
(see “Edit a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode.” on
page 323)
n Selecting the screen layout for pallet tables (see “Screen layout for
executing pallet tables” on page 83)
n New columns in the tool table for managing TS calibration data (see
“Entering tool data in tables” on page 101)
n Management of unlimited calibration data with the TS triggering
touch probes (see User’s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles)
n Cycles for automatic tool measurement with the TT tool touch probe
in ISO (see User's Manual for Touch Probe Cycles)
n New Cycle 440 for measuring the axial displacement of a machine
with the TT tool touch probe (see User's Manual for Touch Probe
Cycles)
n Support of Teleservice functions (see “Teleservice” on page 444)
n Setting the display mode for blocks with more than one line, e.g. for
cycle definitions (see “MP7281.0 Programming and Editing
operating mode” on page 457)
n New SYSREAD function 501 for reading REF values from datum
tables (see “FN18: SYS-DATUM READ Read system data” on page
373)
n M140 (see “Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction:
M140” on page 188)
n M141 (see “Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141” on page
189)
n M142 (see “Delete modal program information: M142” on page
190)
n M143 (see “Delete basic rotation: M143” on page 190)
n M144 (see “Compensating the machine’s kinematic configuration
for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block: M144” on page
197)
II
n External access with the LSV-2 interface (see “Permitting/
Restricting external access” on page 445)
n Tool-oriented machining (see “Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented
Machining” on page 84)
Changed features of the NC software 280 476-xx

n Programming PGM CALL (see “Separate Program as Subprogram”
on page 345)
n Programming CYCLE CALL (see “Calling a cycle” on page 204)
n The feed-rate unit for M136 was changed from µm/rev to mm/rev.
(see “Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution: M136” on
page 184)
n The size of the contour memory for SL cycles was doubled. (see “SL
cycles” on page 285)
n M91 and M92 are now also possible with tilted working plane. (see
“Positioning in a tilted coordinate system” on page 332)
n Display of the NC program during the execution of pallet tables (see
“Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block” on
page 8) and (see “Screen layout for executing pallet tables” on page
83)
New/changed descriptions in this manual.

n TNCremoNT (see “Data transfer between the TNC and
TNCremoNT” on page 425)
n FK Free Contour Programming (see “Path Contours—FK Free
Contour Programming” on page 158)
n Summary of input formats (see “Technical Information” on page
465)
n Mid-program startup of pallet tables (see “Mid-program startup
(block scan)” on page 412)
n Exchanging the buffer battery (see “Exchanging the Buffer Battery”
on page 469)
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 III

IV
Contents Introduction
1
Manual Operation and Setup
2
Positioning with Manual Data Input
(MDI) 3
Programming: Fundamentals of File
Management, Programming Aids 4
Programming: Tools
5
Programming: Programming Contours
6
Programming: Miscellaneous Functions
7
Programming: Cycles
8
Programming: Subprograms and
Program Section Repeats 9
Programming: Q Parameters
10
Test Run and Program Run
11
MOD Functions
12
Tables and Overviews
13
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 V

VI
1 Introduction ..... 1
1.1 The TNC 426, the TNC 430 ..... 2
Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats ..... 2
Compatibility ..... 2
1.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard ..... 3
Visual display unit ..... 3
Screen layout ..... 4
Keyboard ..... 5
1.3 Modes of Operation ..... 6
Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel ..... 6
Positioning with manual data input (MDI) ..... 6
Programming and Editing ..... 7
Test run ..... 7
Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block ..... 8
1.4 Status Displays ..... 9
“General” status display ..... 9
Additional status displays ..... 10
1.5 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels ..... 13
3-D Touch Probes ..... 13
HR electronic handwheels ..... 14
2 Manual Operation and Setup ..... 15

2.1 Switch-on, Switch-off ..... 16
Switch-on ..... 16
Switch-off ..... 17
2.2 Moving the Machine Axes ..... 18
Note ..... 18
To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons: ..... 18
Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel ..... 19
Incremental jog positioning ..... 20
2.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M ..... 21
Function ..... 21
Entering values ..... 21
Changing the spindle speed and feed rate ..... 21
2.4 Datum Setting(Without a 3-D Touch Probe) ..... 22
Note ..... 22
Preparation ..... 22
Datum setting ..... 23
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 VII

2.5 Tilting the working plane ..... 24
Application, function ..... 24
Traversing the reference points in tilted axes ..... 25
Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system ..... 25
Datum setting on machines with rotary tables ..... 26
Position display in a tilted system ..... 26
Limitations on working with the tilting function ..... 26
To activate manual tilting: ..... 27
3 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI) ..... 29

3.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations ..... 30
Positioning with manual data input (MDI) ..... 30
Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI ..... 32
4 Programming:Fundamentals of NC, File Management, Programming Aids,

Pallet Management ..... 33
4.1 Fundamentals ..... 34
Position encoders and reference marks ..... 34
Reference system ..... 34
Reference system on milling machines ..... 35
Polar coordinates ..... 36
Absolute and incremental workpiece positions ..... 37
Setting the datum ..... 38
4.2 File Management: Fundamentals ..... 39
Files ..... 39
Data security ..... 40
4.3 Standard File Management ..... 41
Note ..... 41
Calling the file manager ..... 41
Selecting a file ..... 42
Deleting a file ..... 42
Copying a file ..... 43
Data transfer to or from an external data medium ..... 44
Selecting one of the last 10 files selected ..... 46
Renaming a file ..... 46
Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational format ..... 47
Protect file / Cancel file protection ..... 48
VIII
4.4 Advanced File Management ..... 49
Note ..... 49
Directories ..... 49
Paths ..... 49
Overview: Functions of the expanded file manager ..... 50
Calling the file manager ..... 51
Selecting drives, directories and files ..... 52
Creating a new directory (only possible on the drive TNC:\) ..... 53
Copying a single file ..... 54
Copying a directory ..... 55
Choosing one of the last 10 files selected ..... 55
Deleting a file ..... 56
Deleting a directory ..... 56
Tagging files ..... 57
Renaming a file ..... 58
Additional Functions ..... 58
Data transfer to or from an external data medium ..... 59
Copying files into another directory ..... 60
The TNC in a network (applies only for Ethernet interface option) ..... 61
4.5 Creating and Writing Programs ..... 63
Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversational format. ..... 63
Defining the blank form–BLK FORM ..... 63
Creating a new part program ..... 64
Programming tool movements in conversational format ..... 66
Editing a program ..... 67
4.6 Interactive Programming Graphics ..... 70
To generate/not generate graphics during programming: ..... 70
Generating a graphic for an existing program ..... 70
Block number display ON/OFF ..... 71
To erase the graphic: ..... 71
Magnifying or reducing a detail ..... 71
4.7 Structuring Programs ..... 72
Definition and applications ..... 72
To display the program structure window / change the active window: ..... 72
To insert a structuring block in the (left) program window ..... 72
To insert a structuring block in the (right) structure window ..... 72
Selecting blocks in the program structure window ..... 72
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 IX

4.8 Adding Comments ..... 73
Function ..... 73
Entering comments during programming ..... 73
Inserting comments after program entry ..... 73
Entering a comment in a separate block ..... 73
4.9 Creating Text Files ..... 74
Function ..... 74
Opening and exiting text files ..... 74
Editing texts ..... 75
Erasing and inserting characters, words and lines ..... 76
Editing text blocks ..... 76
Finding text sections ..... 77
4.10 Integrated Pocket Calculator ..... 78
Operation ..... 78
4.11 Immediate Help for NC Error Messages ..... 79
Displaying error messages ..... 79
Display HELP ..... 79
4.12 Pallet Management ..... 80
Application ..... 80
Selecting a pallet table ..... 82
To leave the pallet file: ..... 82
Executing the pallet file ..... 82
4.13 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining ..... 84
Selecting a pallet file ..... 89
Setting up the pallet file with the entry form ..... 89
Sequence of tool-oriented machining ..... 93
To leave the pallet file: ..... 94
Executing the pallet file ..... 94
X
5 Programming: Tools ..... 97
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data ..... 98
Feed rate F ..... 98
Spindle speed S ..... 98
5.2 Tool Data ..... 99
Requirements for tool compensation ..... 99
Tool numbers and tool names ..... 99
Tool length L ..... 99
Tool radius R ..... 100
Delta values for lengths and radii ..... 100
Entering tool data into the program ..... 100
Entering tool data in tables ..... 101
Pocket table for tool changer ..... 106
Calling tool data ..... 107
Tool change ..... 108
5.3 Tool Compensation ..... 110
Introduction ..... 110
Tool length compensation ..... 110
Tool radius compensation ..... 111
5.4 Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation ..... 114
Definition of a normalized vector ..... 115
Permissible tool forms ..... 115
Using other tools: Delta values ..... 116
3-D compensation without tool orientation ..... 116
Face Milling: 3-D compensation with and without tool orientation ..... 116
Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation with workpiece orientation ..... 118
5.5 Working with Cutting Data Tables ..... 120
Note ..... 120
Applications ..... 120
Table for workpiece materials ..... 121
Table for tool cutting materials ..... 122
Table for cutting data ..... 122
Data required for the tool table ..... 123
Working with automatic speed/feed rate calculation ..... 124
Changing the table structure ..... 124
Data transfer from cutting data tables ..... 126
Configuration file TNC.SYS ..... 126
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XI

6 Programming: Programming Contours ..... 127
6.1 Tool movements ..... 128
Path functions ..... 128
FK Free Contour Programming ..... 128
Miscellaneous functions M ..... 128
Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 128
Programming with Q parameters ..... 128
6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions ..... 129
Programming tool movements for workpiece machining ..... 129
6.3 Contour Approach and Departure ..... 133
Overview: Types of paths for contour approach and departure ..... 133
Important positions for approach and departure ..... 133
Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection: APPR LT ..... 135
Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point: APPR LN ..... 135
Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection: APPR CT ..... 136
Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour: APPR LCT ..... 136
Departing on a straight line with tangential connection: DEP LT ..... 137
Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point: DEP LN ..... 137
Departure on a circular path with tangential connection: DEP CT ..... 138
Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line: DEP LCT ..... 138
6.4 Path Contours — Cartesian Coordinates ..... 139
Overview of path functions ..... 139
Straight line L ..... 140
Inserting a chamfer CHF between two straight lines ..... 141
Corner rounding RND ..... 142
Circle center CC ..... 143
Circular path C around circle center CC ..... 144
Circular path CR with defined radius ..... 145
Circular path CT with tangential connection ..... 146
XII
6.5 Path Contours — Polar Coordinates ..... 151
Overview ..... 151
Polar coordinate origin: Pole CC ..... 151
Straight line LP ..... 152
Circular path CP around pole CC ..... 152
Circular path CTP with tangential connection ..... 153
Helical interpolation ..... 153
6.6 Path Contours—FK Free Contour Programming ..... 158
Fundamentals ..... 158
Graphics during FK programming ..... 159
Initiating the FK dialog ..... 160
Free programming of straight lines ..... 160
Free programming of circular arcs ..... 161
Input possibilities ..... 162
Auxiliary points ..... 164
Relative data ..... 165
Converting FK programs ..... 167
6.7 Path Contours — Spline Interpolation ..... 173
Function ..... 173
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XIII

7 Programming: Miscellaneous functions ..... 175
7.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP ..... 176
7.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant ..... 177
Overview ..... 177
7.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data ..... 178
Programming machine-referenced coordinates: M91/M92 ..... 178
Activating the most recently entered datum: M104 ..... 180
Moving to position in an non-tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane: M130 ..... 180
7.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior ..... 181
Smoothing corners: M90 ..... 181
Insert rounding arc between straight lines: M112 ..... 182
Machining small contour steps: M97 ..... 182
Machining open contours: M98 ..... 183
Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103 ..... 183
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution: M136 ..... 184
Feed rate at circular arcs: M109/M110/M111 ..... 185
Calculating the radius-compensated path in advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120 ..... 185
Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run: M118 ..... 187
Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140 ..... 188
Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141 ..... 189
Delete modal program information: M142 ..... 190
Delete basic rotation: M143 ..... 190
7.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes ..... 191
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C: M116 ..... 191
Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126 ..... 191
Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360°: M94 ..... 192
Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes: M114 ..... 193
Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM*): M128 ..... 194
Exact stop at corners with nontangential transitions: M134 ..... 196
Selecting tilting axes: M138 ..... 196
Compensating the machine’s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL
positions at end of block: M144 ..... 197
7.6 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines ..... 198
Principle ..... 198
Output the programmed voltage directly: M200 ..... 198
Output voltage as a function of distance: M201 ..... 198
Output voltage as a function of speed: M202 ..... 199
Output voltage as a function of time (time-dependent ramp): M203 ..... 199
Output voltage as a function of time (time-dependent pulse): M204 ..... 199
XIV
8 Programming: Cycles ..... 201
8.1 Working with Cycles ..... 202
Defining a cycle using soft keys ..... 202
Defining a cycle using the GOTO function ..... 202
Calling a cycle ..... 204
Working with the secondary axes U/V/W ..... 205
8.2 Point Tables ..... 206
Function ..... 206
Creating a point table ..... 206
Selecting a point table in the program. ..... 207
Calling a cycle in connection with point tables ..... 208
8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling ..... 209
Overview ..... 209
PECKING (Cycle 1) ..... 211
DRILLING (Cycle 200) ..... 212
REAMING (Cycle 201) ..... 214
BORING (Cycle 202) ..... 216
UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203) ..... 218
BACK BORING (Cycle 204) ..... 220
UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205) ..... 222
BORE MILLING (Cycle 208) ..... 224
TAPPING with a floating tap holder (Cycle 2) ..... 226
TAPPING NEW with floating tap holder (Cycle 206) ..... 227
RIGID TAPPING (Cycle 17) ..... 229
RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder TAPPING (Cycle 207) ..... 230
THREAD CUTTING (Cycle 18) ..... 232
TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209) ..... 233
Fundamentals of thread milling ..... 235
THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262) ..... 237
THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263) ..... 239
THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264) ..... 243
HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265) ..... 246
OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267) ..... 249
8.4 Cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots ..... 257
Overview ..... 257
POCKET MILLING (Cycle 4) ..... 258
POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 212) ..... 260
STUD FINISHING (Cycle 213) ..... 262
CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING (Cycle 5) ..... 264
CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 214) ..... 266
CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING (Cycle 215) ..... 268
SLOT MILLING (Cycle 3) ..... 270
SLOT (oblong hole) with reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 210) ..... 272
CIRCULAR SLOT (oblong hole) with reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 211) ..... 274
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XV

8.5 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns ..... 278
Overview ..... 278
CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220) ..... 279
LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221) ..... 281
8.6 SL cycles ..... 285
Overview of SL cycles ..... 286
CONTOUR GEOMETRY (Cycle 14) ..... 287
Overlapping contours ..... 287
CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20) ..... 290
REAMING (Cycle 21) ..... 291
ROUGH-OUT (Cycle 22) ..... 292
FLOOR FINISHING (Cycle 23) ..... 293
SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24) ..... 294
CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25) ..... 295
CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27) ..... 297
CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling (Cycle 28) ..... 299
8.7 Cycles for multipass milling ..... 310
Overview ..... 310
RUN DIGITIZED DATA (Cycle 30) ..... 311
MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230) ..... 312
RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231) ..... 314
8.8 Coordinate Transformation Cycles ..... 319
Overview ..... 319
Effect of coordinate transformations ..... 319
DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7) ..... 320
DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7) ..... 321
DATUM SETTING (Cycle 247) ..... 324
MIRROR IMAGE (Cycle 8) ..... 325
ROTATION (Cycle 10) ..... 327
SCALING FACTOR (Cycle 11) ..... 328
AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26) ..... 329
WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19) ..... 330
8.9 Special Cycles ..... 337
DWELL TIME (Cycle 9) ..... 337
PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12) ..... 337
ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP (Cycle 13) ..... 338
TOLERANCE (Cycle 32) ..... 339
XVI
9 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 341
9.1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 342
Labels ..... 342
9.2 Subprograms ..... 343
Operating sequence ..... 343
Programming notes ..... 343
Programming a subprogram ..... 343
Calling a subprogram ..... 343
9.3 Program Section Repeats ..... 344
Label LBL ..... 344
Programming a program section repeat ..... 344
Calling a program section repeat ..... 344
9.4 Separate Program as Subprogram ..... 345
Calling any program as a subprogram ..... 345
9.5 Nesting ..... 346
Types of nesting ..... 346
Nesting depth ..... 346
Subprogram within a subprogram ..... 346
Repeating program section repeats ..... 347
Repeating a subprogram ..... 348
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XVII

10 Programming: Q Parameters ..... 355
10.1 Principle and Overview ..... 356
Calling Q parameter functions ..... 357
10.2 Part Families – Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values ..... 358
Example NC blocks ..... 358
Example ..... 358
10.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations ..... 359
Function ..... 359
Overview ..... 359
Programming fundamental operations ..... 360
10.4 Trigonometric Functions ..... 361
Definitions ..... 361
Programming trigonometric functions ..... 362
10.5 Calculating Circles ..... 363
Function ..... 363
10.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters ..... 364
Function ..... 364
Unconditional jumps ..... 364
Programming If-Then decisions ..... 364
Abbreviations used: ..... 365
10.7 Checking and changing Q parameters ..... 366
Procedure ..... 366
10.8 Additional Functions ..... 367
Overview ..... 367
FN14: ERROR: Displaying error messages ..... 368
FN15: PRINT: Output of texts or Q parameter values ..... 370
FN16: F-PRINT: Formatted output of texts or Q parameter values ..... 371
FN18:SYS-DATUM READ Read system data ..... 373
FN19: PLC: Transferring values to the PLC ..... 379
FN20: WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization ..... 379
FN 25: PRESET: Setting a new datum ..... 380
FN26: TABOPEN: Opening a Freely Definable Table ..... 381
FN27: TABWRITE: writing to a freely definable table ..... 381
FN28: TABREAD: Reading a Freely Definable Table ..... 382
10.9 Entering Formulas Directly ..... 383
Entering formulas ..... 383
Rules for formulas ..... 384
Programming example ..... 385
XVIII
10.10 Preassigned Q Parameters ..... 386
Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107 ..... 386
Active tool radius: Q108 ..... 386
Tool axis: Q109 ..... 386
Spindle status: Q110 ..... 386
Coolant on/off: Q111 ..... 387
Overlap factor: Q112 ..... 387
Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program: Q113 ..... 387
Tool length: Q114 ..... 387
Coordinates after probing during program run ..... 387
Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 ..... 388
Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles: Rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC ..... 388
Results of measurements with touch probe cycles (see also Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual) ..... 389
11 Test run and Program Run ..... 399

11.1 Graphics ..... 400
Function ..... 400
Overview of display modes ..... 400
Plan view ..... 401
Projection in 3 planes ..... 401
3-D view ..... 402
Magnifying details ..... 402
Repeating graphic simulation ..... 404
Measuring the machining time ..... 404
11.2 Functions for Program Display ..... 405
Overview ..... 405
11.3 Test run ..... 406
Function ..... 406
11.4 Program run ..... 408
Running a part program ..... 408
Interrupting machining ..... 409
Moving the machine axes during an interruption ..... 410
Resuming program run after an interruption ..... 411
Mid-program startup (block scan) ..... 412
Returning to the contour ..... 413
11.5 Automatic Program Start ..... 414
Function ..... 414
11.6 Optional Block Skip ..... 415
Function ..... 415
11.7 Optional Program Run Interruption ..... 416
Function ..... 416
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XIX

12 MOD Functions ..... 417
12.1 MOD functions ..... 418
Selecting the MOD functions ..... 418
Changing the settings ..... 418
Exiting the MOD functions ..... 418
Overview of MOD functions ..... 418
12.2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers ..... 420
Function ..... 420
12.3 Code Number ..... 421
Function ..... 421
12.4 Setting the Data Interfaces ..... 422
Function ..... 422
Setting the RS-232 interface ..... 422
Setting the RS-422 interface ..... 422
Setting the OPERATING MODE of the external device ..... 422
Setting the BAUD RATE ..... 422
Assign ..... 423
Software for data transfer ..... 424
12.5 Ethernet Interface ..... 427
Installing an Ethernet card ..... 427
Connection possibilities ..... 427
Configuring the TNC ..... 428
12.6 Configuring PGM MGT ..... 433
Function ..... 433
Changing the setting ..... 433
12.7 Machine-Specific User Parameters ..... 434
Function ..... 434
12.8 Showing the workpiece in the working space ..... 435
Function ..... 435
12.9 Position Display Types ..... 437
Function ..... 437
12.10 Select the unit of measurement ..... 438
Function ..... 438
12.11 Select the programming Language for $MDI ..... 439
Function ..... 439
12.12 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks ..... 440
Function ..... 440
XX
12.13 Enter the axis traverse limits, datum display ..... 441
Function ..... 441
Working without additional traverse limits ..... 441
To find and enter the maximum traverse: ..... 441
Datum display ..... 441
12.14 Displaying HELP Files ..... 442
Function ..... 442
Selecting HELP files ..... 442
12.15 Displaying Operating Time ..... 443
Function ..... 443
12.16 Teleservice ..... 444
Function ..... 444
Calling/Exiting Teleservice ..... 444
12.17 External Access ..... 445
Function ..... 445
13 Tables and Overviews ..... 447

13.1 General User Parameters ..... 448
Input possibilities for machine parameters ..... 448
Selecting general user parameters ..... 448
13.2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces ..... 461
RS-232-C/V.24 Interface
HEIDEHAIN devices ..... 461
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices ..... 462
RS-422/V.11 Interface ..... 463
Ethernet interface RJ45 socket (option) ..... 464
Ethernet interface BNC socket (option) ..... 464
13.3 Technical Information ..... 465
13.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery ..... 469
TNC 426 CB/PB, TNC 430 CA/PA ..... 469
TNC 426 M, TNC 430 M ..... 469
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XXI

1
Introduction
1.1 The TNC 426, the TNC 430
1.1 The TNC 426, the TNC 430
HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop-oriented contouring

controls that enable you to program conventional machining
operations right at the machine in an easy-to-use conversational
programming language. They are designed for milling, drilling and
boring machines, as well as for machining centers. The TNC 426 can
control up to 5 axes; the TNC 430 can control up to 9 axes. You can
also change the angular position of the spindle under program control.
An integrated hard disk provides storage for as many programs as you
like, even if they were created off-line or by digitizing. For quick
calculations you can call up the on-screen pocket calculator at any
time.
Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in a such way that the
functions are fast and easy to use.
Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational and

ISO formats
HEIDENHAIN conversational programming is an especially easy
method of writing programs. Interactive graphics illustrate the
individual machining steps for programming the contour. If a
production drawing is not dimensioned for NC, the HEIDENHAIN FK
free contour programming carries out the necessary calculations
automatically. Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated
either during or before actual machining. It is also possible to program
in ISO format or DNC mode.
You can also enter and test one program while the TNC is running
another.
Compatibility
The TNC can execute all part programs that were written on
HEIDENHAIN controls TNC 150 B and later.
2 1 Introduction
1.2 Visual Display Unit and
1.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard

Keyboard
Visual display unit
The TNC is available with either a color CRT screen (BC 120) or a TFT
flat panel display (BF 120. The figure at top right shows the keys and
controls on the BC 120, and the figure at center right shows those of
the BF 120.
1
1 Header
When the TNC is on, the selected operating modes are shown in
the screen header: the machining mode at the left and the
programming mode at right. The currently active mode is
displayed in the larger box, where the dialog prompts and TNC
messages also appear (unless the TNC is showing only graphics).
2 Soft keys
2
In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft-key
row. You can select these functions by pressing the keys 4 4
immediately below them. The lines immediately above the soft- 31
key row indicate the number of soft-key rows that can be called
with the black arrow keys to the right and left. The line 5 7 8 9 10 6
1
representing the active soft-key row is highlighted.
3 Soft key selector keys
4 Switching the soft-key rows
5 Setting the screen layout
6 Shift key for switchover between machining and programming 1
modes
Keys on BC 120 only

7 Screen demagnetization; Exit main menu for screen settings
8 Select main menu for screen settings:
n In the main menu: Move highlight downward 1
n In the submenu: Reduce value or move picture to the left or
downward
9 n In the main menu: Move highlight upward
n In the submenu: Increase value or move picture to the right or
upward
10 n In the main menu: Select submenu
2
n In the submenu: Exit submenu 4
1 6
5
1 41 3
Main menu dialog Function

BRIGHTNESS Adjust brightness
CONTRAST Adjust contrast
H-POSITION Adjust horizontal position
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 3

Main menu dialog Function
V-POSITION Adjust vertical position
V-SIZE Adjust picture height
SIDE-PIN Correct barrel-shaped distortion
TRAPEZOID Correct trapezoidal distortion
ROTATION Correct tilting
COLOR TEMP Adjust color temperature
R-GAIN Adjust strength of red color
B-GAIN Adjust strength of blue color
RECALL No function
The BC 120 is sensitive to magnetic and electromagnetic noise, which

can distort the position and geometry of the picture. Alternating fields
can cause the picture to shift periodically or to become distorted.
Screen layout
You select the screen layout yourself: In the PROGRAMMING AND
EDITING mode of operation, for example, you can have the TNC show
program blocks in the left window while the right window displays
programming graphics. You could also display the program structure
in the right window instead, or display only program blocks in one large
window. The available screen windows depend on the selected
operating mode.
To change the screen layout:
Press the SPLIT SCREEN key: The soft-key row

shows the available layout options (see “Modes of
Operation,” page 6).
Select the desired screen layout.
4 1 Introduction
Keyboard
The figure at right shows the keys of the keyboard grouped according
to their functions:
1 7
1 Alphanumeric keyboard for entering texts and file names, as well
as for programming in ISO format
2 n File management
n Pocket calculator
n MOD functions 5
n HELP function 2
1
6
3 Programming modes
4 Machine operating modes
5 Initiation of programming dialog 4
1 3 5
6 Arrow keys and GOTO jump command
7 Numerical input and axis selection
The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front
cover. Machine panel buttons, e.g. NC START, are described in the
manual for your machine tool.

1.3 Modes of Operation
Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel

The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine
tool. In this operating mode, you can position the machine axes
manually or by increments, set the datums, and tilt the working plane.
The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the
machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout (select as described
previously)
Screen windows Soft key

Positions
Left: positions. Right: status display.
Positioning with manual data input (MDI)

This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing
movements, such as for face milling or pre-positioning. You can also
define point tables for setting the digitizing range in this mode.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout

Program
Left: program blocks, right: status display
6 1 Introduction
Programming and Editing
In this mode of operation you can write your part programs. The FK
free programming feature, the various cycles and the Q parameter
functions help you with programming and add necessary information.
If desired, you can have the programming graphics show the individual
steps, or you can use a separate screen window to prepare your
program structure.

Program
Left: program blocks, right: program structure
Left: program. Right: programming graphics
Test run
In the Test Run mode of operation, the TNC checks programs and
program sections for errors, such as geometrical incompatibilities,
missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work
space. This simulation is supported graphically in different display
modes.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout: see “Program Run, Full
Sequence and Program Run, Single Block,” page 8.

Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run,
Single Block
In the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC
executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or
programmed stop. You can resume program run after an interruption.
In the Program Run, Single Block mode of operation you execute each
block separately by pressing the machine START button.

Program
Left: program blocks, right: program structure
Left: program. Right: status
Left: program. Right: graphics
Graphics
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables

Pallet table
Left: program. Right: pallet table
Left: pallet table. Right: status
Left: pallet table. Right: graphics
8 1 Introduction
1.4 Status Displays
1.4 Status Displays

“General” status display
The status display 1 informs you of the current state of the machine
tool. It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation:
n Program Run, Single Block and Program Run, Full Sequence, except
if the screen layout is set to display graphics only, and
n Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI).
In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode the status
display appears in the large window.
Information in the status display
Symbol Meaning
ACTL. Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position 11
XYZ Machine axes; the TNC displays auxiliary axes in

lower-case letters. The sequence and quantity of
displayed axes is determined by the machine tool
builder. Refer to your machine manual for more
information
FSM The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one

tenth of the effective value. Spindle speed S, feed
rate F and active M functions
Program run started
Axis locked
Axis can be moved with the handwheel
Axes are moving in a tilted working plane
Axes are moving under a basic rotation

1.4 Status Displays
Additional status displays
The additional status displays contain detailed information on the
program run. They can be called in all operating modes, except in the
Programming and Editing mode of operation.
To switch on the additional status display:
Call the soft-key row for screen layout.
Select the layout option for the additional status

display.
To switch on the additional status display:
Shift the soft-key rows until the STATUS soft keys

appear.
Select the desired additional status display, e.g.

general program information.
You can choose between several additional status displays with the
following soft keys:
General program information
1 Name of main program

1
2 Active programs
3 Active machining cycle
2
4 Circle center CC (pole)
5 Operating time
6 Dwell time counter 3
4 6
10 1 Introduction
1.4 Status Displays
Positions and coordinates
1 Position display 1 2
2 Type of position display, e.g. actual position
3 Tilt angle of the working plane
4 Angle of a basic rotation
Information on tools
1 n T: Tool number and name 1

n RT: Number and name of a replacement tool
2 3
2 Tool axis
3 Tool length and radii
4 Oversizes (delta values) from TOOL CALL (PGM) and the tool 4
table (TAB)
5 Tool life, maximum tool life (TIME 1) and maximum tool life for
TOOL CALL (TIME 2)
5
6 Display of the active tool and the (next) replacement tool
Coordinate transformations
1 Name of main program 1

2 Active datum shift (Cycle 7) 2 3
3 Active rotation angle (Cycle 10)
4 Mirrored axes (Cycle 8)
5 Active scaling factor(s) (Cycles 11 / 26) 4
6 Scaling datum
See “Coordinate Transformation Cycles” on page 319.
6 5

1.4 Status Displays Tool measurement
1 Number of the tool to be measured 1

2 Display whether the tool radius or the tool length is being
measured 2 3
3 MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting edges and the
result of measuring the rotating tool (DYN = dynamic 4
measurement)
4 Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value. If
the measured value is followed by an asterisk, the allowable
tolerance in the tool table was exceeded
Active miscellaneous functions M
1 List of the active M functions with fixed meaning.

2 List of the active M functions with function assigned by machine
manufacturer. 1
12 1 Introduction
1.5 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D
1.5 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels

Touch Probes and Electronic
Handwheels
3-D Touch Probes
With the various HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe systems you can:
n Automatically align workpieces
n Quickly and precisely set datums
n Measure the workpiece during program run
n Digitize 3-D surfaces (option), and
n Measure and inspect tools
All of the touch probe functions are described in a

separate manual. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you
require a copy of this User's Manual. ID number: 329 203-
xx.
TS 220, TS 630 and TS 632 touch trigger probes

These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece
alignment, datum setting, workpiece measurement and for digitizing.
The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is
a cost-effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not
frequently required.
The TS 630 and TS 632 feature infrared transmission of the triggering
signal to the TNC. This makes them highly convenient for use on
machines with automatic tool changers.
Principle of operation: HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes
feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical
signal as soon as the stylus is deflected. This signal is transmitted to
the TNC, which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual
value.
During digitizing the TNC generates a program containing straight line
blocks in HEIDENHAIN format from a series of measured position
data. You can then output the program to a PC for further processing
with the SUSA evaluation software. This evaluation software enables
you to calculate male/female transformations or correct the program
to account for special tool shapes and radii that differ from the shape
of the stylus tip. If the tool has the same radius as the stylus tip you
can run these programs immediately.

1.5 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels TT 130 tool touch probe for tool measurement
The TT 130 is a triggering 3-D touch probe for tool measurement and
inspection. Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with
which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically -
either with the spindle rotating or stopped. The TT 130 features a
particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection, which
make it insensitive to coolants and swarf. The triggering signal is
generated by a wear-resistant and highly reliable optical switch.
HR electronic handwheels
Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by
hand. A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available.
Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels,
HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel (see figure
at center right).
14 1 Introduction
2
Manual Operation and Setup
2.1 Switch-on, Switch-off
Switch-on
Switch-on and traversing the reference points can vary

depending on the individual machine tool. Refer to your
machine manual.
Switch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC
automatically initiates the following dialog
MEMORY TEST
The TNC memory is automatically checked.
POWER INTERRUPTED
TNC message that the power was interrupted —

clear the message.
TRANSLATE PLC PROGRAM
The PLC program of the TNC is automatically compiled.
RELAY EXT. DC VOLTAGE MISSING
Switch on external dc voltage. The TNC checks the

functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit.
MANUAL OPERATION
TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS
Cross the reference points manually in the displayed

sequence: For each axis press the machine START
button, or
Cross the reference points in any sequence: Press

and hold the machine axis direction button for each
axis until the reference point has been traversed.
16 2 Manual Operation and Setup

The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode.
The reference points need only be traversed if the

machine axes are to be moved. If you intend only to write,
edit or test programs, you can select the Programming
and Editing or Test Run modes of operation immediately
after switching on the control voltage.
You can then traverse the reference points later by
pressing the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key in the
Manual Operation mode.
Traversing the reference point in a tilted working plane

The reference point of a tilted coordinate system can be traversed by
pressing the machine axis direction buttons. The “tilting the working
plane” function must be active in the Manual Operation mode, see
“To activate manual tilting:,” page 27. The TNC then interpolates the
corresponding axes.
The NC START button is not effective. Pressing this button may result
in an error message.
Make sure that the angle values entered in the menu for
tilting the working plane match the actual angles of the
tilted axis.
Switch-off
To prevent data being lost at switch-off, you need to run down the
operating system as follows:
U Select the Manual mode.
U Select the function for run-down, confirm again with
the YES soft key.
U When the TNC displays the message Now you can
switch off the TNC in a superimposed window, you
may cut off the power supply to the TNC.
Inappropriate switch-off of the TNC can lead to data loss.

2.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Note
Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons is a

machine-dependent function. The machine tool manual
provides further information.
To traverse with the machine axis direction

buttons:
Select the Manual Operation mode.
Press the machine axis-direction button and hold it as

long as you wish the axis to move, or
Move the axis continuously: Press and hold the

machine axis direction button, then press the
and machine START button
To stop the axis, press the machine STOP button.
You can move several axes at a time with these two methods. You can
change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft
key, see “Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions
M,” page 21.

Traversing with the HR 410 electronic
handwheel
The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive
buttons. The permissive buttons are located below the star grip.
You can only move the machine axes when an permissive button is 1
depressed (machine-dependent function). 2
The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements:
1 EMERGENCY STOP
2 Handwheel 3
4
3 Permissive buttons 4
6 5
4 Axis address keys
5 Actual-position-capture key 7
8
6 Keys for defining the feed rate (slow, medium, fast; the feed rates
are set by the machine tool builder)
7 Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis
8 Machine function (set by the machine tool builder)
The red indicators show the axis and feed rate you have selected.
It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel
during a program run.
To move an axis:
Select the Electronic Handwheel operating mode.
Press and hold the permissive button.
Select the axis.
Select the feed rate.
Move the active axis in the positive or negative

direction.
or

Incremental jog positioning
With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a
preset distance.
Z
Select Manual or Electronic Handwheel mode of
operation.
Select incremental jog positioning: Switch the

INCREMENT soft key to ON 8 8
JOG INCREMENT =
X
8 16
Enter the jog increment in millimeters, i.e. 8 mm.
Press the machine axis direction button as often as

desired.

2.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F
2.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M

and Miscellaneous Functions M
Function
In the operating modes Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel,
you can enter the spindle speed S, feed rate F and the miscellaneous
functions M with soft keys. The miscellaneous functions are
described in Chapter 7 “Programming: Miscellaneous Functions.”
The machine tool builder determines which miscellaneous

functions M are available on your TNC and what effects
they have.
Entering values
Spindle speed S, miscellaneous function M
To enter the spindle speed, press the S soft key.
SPINDLE SPEED S =
1000 Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm your

entry with the machine START button.
The spindle speed S with the entered rpm is started with a

miscellaneous function M. Proceed in the same way to enter a
miscellaneous function M.
Feed rate F
After entering a feed rate F, you must confirm your entry with the ENT
key instead of the machine START button.
The following is valid for feed rate F:
n If you enter F=0, then the lowest feed rate from MP1020 is effective
n F is not lost during a power interruption
Changing the spindle speed and feed rate

With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed
rate F from 0% to 150% of the set value.
The override dial for spindle speed is only functional on

machines with infinitely variable spindle drive.

2.4 Datum Setting(Without a 3-D
2.4 Datum Setting(Without a 3-D Touch Probe)
Touch Probe)
Note
For datum setting with a 3-D touch probe, refer to the

new Touch Probe Cycles Manual.
You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates
of a known position on the workpiece.
Preparation
U Clamp and align the workpiece.
U Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle.
U Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values.

2.4 Datum Setting(Without a 3-D Touch Probe)
Datum setting
Fragile workpiece? Y
If the workpiece surface must not be scratched, you can

lay a metal shim of know thickness d on it. Then enter a
tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum
by the value d. Z
X
Y
Select the Manual Operation mode.
X
Move the tool slowly until it touches the workpiece
surface.
Select an axis (all axes can also be selected via the

ASCII keyboard)
DATUM SET Z=
Zero tool in spindle axis: Set the display to a known

workpiece position (here, 0) or enter the thickness d
of the shim. In the tool axis, offset the tool radius.
Repeat the process for the remaining axes.

If you are using a preset tool, set the display of the tool axis to the
length L of the tool or enter the sum Z=L+d.

2.5 Tilting the working plane
Application, function
The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced

to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool
builder. With some swivel heads and tilting tables, the
machine tool builder determines whether the entered Y
angles are interpreted as coordinates of the tilt axes or as Z
angular components of a tilted plane. Refer to your
machine manual. B
The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel
heads and/or tilting tables. Typical applications are, for example, 10°
oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane. The working plane is
always tilted around the active datum. The program is written as usual
in a main plane, such as the X/Y plane, but is executed in a plane that X
is tilted relative to the main plane.
There are two functions available for tilting the working plane
n 3-D ROT soft key in the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel
mode, see “To activate manual tilting:,” page 27
n Tilting under program control, Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part
program (see “WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19)” on page 330)
The TNC functions for “tilting the working plane” are coordinate
transformations in which the working plane is always perpendicular to
the direction of the tool axis.
When tilting the working plane, the TNC differentiates between two
machine types
n Machines with tilting tables:
n You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for
machining by positioning the tilting table, for example with an L
block
n The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in
relation to the machine-based coordinate system. Thus if you
rotate the table—and therefore the workpiece—by 90° for
example, the coordinate system does not rotate. If you press
the Z+ axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode, the
tool moves in Z+ direction.
n In calculating the transformed coordinate system, the TNC
considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the
particular tilting table (the so-called “translational” components).

n Machines with swivel heads

n You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by
positioning the swivel head, for example with an L block.
n The position of the transformed tool axis changes in relation to the
machine-based coordinate system. Thus if you rotate the swivel
head of your machine—and therefore the tool—in the B axis by
90° for example, the coordinate system rotates also. If you press
the Z+ axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode, the
tool moves in X+ direction of the machine-based coordinate
system
n In calculating the transformed coordinate system, the TNC
considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the
particular swivel head (the so-called “translational” components)
and offsets caused by tilting of the tool (3-D tool length
compensation).
Traversing the reference points in tilted axes

With tilted axes, you use the machine axis direction buttons to cross
over the reference points. The TNC interpolates the corresponding
axes. Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane is active in
the Manual Operation mode and the actual angle of the tilted axis was
entered in the menu field.
Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system

After you have positioned the rotary axes, set the datum in the same
way as for a non-tilted system. The TNC then converts the datum for
the tilted coordinate system. If your machine tool features axis control,
the angular values for this calculation are taken from the actual
position of the rotary axis.
You must not set the datum in the tilted working plane if
in machine parameter 7500 bit 3 is set. If you do, the TNC
will calculate the wrong offset.
If your machine tool is not equipped with axis control, you
must enter the actual position of the rotary axis in the
menu for manual tilting: The actual positions of one or
several rotary axes must match the entry. Otherwise the
TNC will calculate an incorrect datum.

Datum setting on machines with rotary tables
The behavior of the TNC during datum setting depends on

the machine. Refer to your machine manual.
The TNC automatically shifts the datum if you rotate the table and the
tilted working plane function is active:
n MP 7500, bit 3=0
To calculate the datum, the TNC uses the difference between the
REF coordinate during datum setting and the REF coordinate of the
tilting axis after tilting. The method of calculation is to be used when
you have clamped your workpiece in proper alignment when the
rotary table is in the 0° position (REF value).
n MP 7500, bit 3=1
If you rotate the table to align a workpiece that has been clamped in
an unaligned position, the TNC must no longer calculate the offset
of the datum from the difference of the REF coordinates. Instead of
the difference from the 0° position, the TNC uses the REF value of
the tilting table after tilting. In other words, it assumes that you have
properly aligned the workpiece before tilting.
MP 7500 is effective in the machine parameter list, or, if

available, in the descriptive tables for tilted axis geometry.
Refer to your machine manual.
Position display in a tilted system

The positions displayed in the status window (ACTL. and NOML.) are
referenced to the tilted coordinate system.
Limitations on working with the tilting function

n The touch probe function Basic Rotation cannot be used.
n PLC positioning (determined by the machine tool builder) is not
possible.

To activate manual tilting:
To select manual tilting, press the 3-D ROT soft key.

You can now select the desired menu items with the
arrow keys
Enter the tilt angle.
To set the desired operating mode in menu option "Tilt working plane"
to Active, select the menu option and shift with the ENT key.
To conclude entry, press the END key.
To reset the tilting function, set the desired operating modes in menu
"Tilt working plane" to Inactive.
If the Working Plane function is active and the TNC moves the
machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes, the status display
shows the symbol
If you set the function "Tilt working plane" for the operating mode
Program Run to Active, the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes
active in the first block of the part program. If you are using Cycle 19
WORKING PLANE in the part program, the angular values defined in the
cycle (starting at the cycle definition) are effective. Angular values
entered in the menu will be overwritten.

3
Positioning with
Manual Data Input (MDI)
3.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations
3.1 Programming and Executing
Simple Machining Operations
The operating mode Positioning with Manual Data Input is particularly
convenient for simple machining operations or pre-positioning of the
tool. It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN
conversational programming or in ISO format, and execute it
immediately. You can also call TNC cycles. The program is stored in
the file $MDI. In the operating mode Positioning with MDI, the
additional status displays can also be activated.
Positioning with manual data input (MDI)
Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation.

Program the file $MDI as you wish.
To start program run, press the machine START

button.
Limitation
Z
FK free contour programming, programming graphics and
program run graphics cannot be used. The $MDI file must Y
not contain a program call (PGM CALL ).
Example 1
A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece.
X
50
After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum, you
can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines.
First you pre-position the tool in L blocks (straight-line blocks) to the 50
hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the
workpiece surface. Then drill the hole with Cycle 1 PECKING.
0 BEGIN PGM $MDI MM

1 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+5 Define tool: zero tool, radius 5
2 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2000 Call tool: tool axis Z
Spindle speed 2000 rpm
3 L Z+200 R0 F MAX Retract tool (F MAX = rapid traverse)
4 L X+50 Y+50 R0 F MAX M3 Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole.
Spindle on
5 L Z+5 F2000 Position tool to 5 mm above hole.
6 CYCL DEF 1.0 PECKING Define PECKING cycle:
30 3 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)

7 CYCL DEF 1.1 SET UP 5 Setup clearance of the tool above the hole
8 CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH -20 Total hole depth (Algebraic sign=working direction)
9 CYCL DEF 1.3 PECKG 10 Depth of each infeed before retraction
10 CYCL DEF 1.4 DWELL 0.5 Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom
11 CYCL DEF 1.5 F250 Feed rate for pecking
12 CYCL CALL Call PECKING cycle
13 L Z+200 R0 F MAX M2 Retract the tool
14 END PGM $MDI MM End of program
Straight-line function L (see “Straight line L” on page 140), PECKING

cycle (see “PECKING (Cycle 1)” on page 211).
Example 2: Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines

with rotary tables
Use the 3-D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system. See “Touch
Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating
Modes,” section “Compensating workpiece misalignment” in the
new Touch Probes Cycles User’s Manual.
Write down the Rotation Angle and cancel the Basic Rotation.
Select operating mode: Positioning with MDI.
Select the axis of the rotary table, enter the rotation

angle you wrote down previously and set the feed
rate.For example: L C+2.561 F50
Conclude entry.
Press the machine START button: The rotation of the

table corrects the misalignment.

Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI
The $MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only
needed temporarily. Nevertheless, you can store a program, if
necessary, by proceeding as described below:
Select the Programming and Editing mode of

operation
To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key

(program management).
Move the highlight to the $MDI file.
To select the file copying function, press the COPY

soft key.
Target file =
BOREHOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the
current contents of the $MDI file.
Copy the file.
To close the file manager, press the END soft key.
Erasing the contents of the $MDI file is done in a similar way: Instead
of copying the contents, however, you erase them with the DELETE
soft key. The next time you select the operating mode Positioning with
MDI, the TNC will display an empty $MDI file.
If you wish to delete $MDI, then

n you must not have selected the Positioning with MDI
mode (not even in the background).
n you must not have selected the $MDI file in the
Programming and Editing mode.
For further information, see “Copying a single file,” page 54.
32 3 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)

4
Programming:
Fundamentals of NC, File
Management, Programming
Aids, Pallet Management
4.1 Fundamentals
4.1 Fundamentals
Position encoders and reference marks

The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register
the positions of the machine table or tool. When a machine axis XMP
moves, the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical
signal. The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual
position of the machine axis. X (Z,Y)
If there is an interruption of power, the calculated position will no
longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide. The TNC
can re-establish this relationship with the aid of reference marks when
power is returned. The scales of the position encoders contain one or
more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are
crossed over. From the signal the TNC identifies that position as the
machine-axis reference point and can re-establish the assignment of
displayed positions to machine axis positions.
Linear encoders are generally used for linear axes. Rotary tables and
tilt axes have angle encoders. If the position encoders feature
distance-coded reference marks, you only need to move each axis a
maximum of 20 mm (0.8 in.) for linear encoders, and 20° for angle Z
encoders, to re-establish the assignment of the displayed positions to
machine axis positions. Y
X
Reference system
A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in
space. The position data are always referenced to a predetermined
point and are described through coordinates.
The Cartesian coordinate system (a rectangular coordinate system) is
based on the three coordinate axes X, Y and Z. The axes are mutually
perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum. A
coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these
directions. A position in a plane is thus described through two
coordinates, and a position in space through three coordinates.
Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as
absolute coordinates. Relative coordinates are referenced to any other
known position (datum) you define within the coordinate system. Z
Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental
coordinate values.
34 4 Programming: Fundamentals of NC, File Management, Programming Aids, Pallet Management

4.1 Fundamentals
Reference system on milling machines
When using a milling machine, you orient tool movements to the
Cartesian coordinate system. The illustration at right shows how the
Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes. The figure
at center right illustrates the “right-hand rule” for remembering the +Y +Z
three axis directions: the middle finger is pointing in the positive +X
direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool (the Z
axis), the thumb is pointing in the positive X direction, and the index
finger in the positive Y direction.
The TNC 426 can control a machine tool in up to 5 axes; the TNC 430
controls up to 9 axes. The axes U, V and W are secondary linear axes
parallel to the main axes X, Y and Z, respectively. Rotary axes are +Z
+X
designated as A, B and C. The illustration at lower right shows the +Y
assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes.
Y W+
C+
B+
V+ A+ X
U+

4.1 Fundamentals
Polar coordinates
If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates, you
also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates. For parts
containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the Y
dimensions in polar coordinates.
While the Cartesian coordinates X, Y and Z are three-dimensional and PR
can describe points in space, polar coordinates are two-dimensional PA2
and describe points in a plane. Polar coordinates have their datum at a
circle center (CC), or pole. A position in a plane can be clearly defined PA3 PR
by the: PR
PA1
n Polar Radius, the distance from the circle center CC to the position, 10 0°
CC
and the
n Polar Angle, the size of the angle between the reference axis and
the line that connects the circle center CC with the position. X
30
See figure at upper right.
Definition of pole and angle reference axis

The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the
three planes. These coordinates also set the reference axis for the
polar angle PA.
Z Y
Coordinates of the pole (plane) Reference axis of the angle
X/Y +X
Y/Z +Y Z
Y
Z/X +Z X
Z Y

4.1 Fundamentals
Absolute and incremental workpiece positions
Absolute workpiece positions
Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to Y
the datum of the coordinate system (origin). Each position on the
workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates.
13
Example 1: Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates 30
12
Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 20
X = 10 mm X = 30 mm X = 50 mm 1
Y = 10 mm Y = 20 mm Y = 30 mm 10
Incremental workpiece positions

Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed X
nominal position of the tool, which serves as the relative (imaginary) 10 30 50
datum. When you write a part program in incremental coordinates,
you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the
previous and the subsequent nominal positions. Incremental
coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions.
To program a position in incremental coordinates, enter the prefix “I” Y
before the axis.
Example 2: Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates 16
Absolute coordinates of hole 4
10
15
X = 10 mm
Y = 10 mm
10
14
Hole 5, referenced to 4 Hole 5, referenced to 4
X = 20 mm X = 20 mm
Y = 10 mm Y = 10 mm 10
20 20 X
Absolute and incremental polar coordinates 10
Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference
axis.
Incremental coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal
position of the tool.
Y
+IPR
PR
+IPA +IPA PR
PR PA
10 0°
CC
X
30

4.1 Fundamentals
Setting the datum
A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the
workpiece, usually a corner, as the absolute datum. Before setting the Z
datum, you align the workpiece with the machine axes and move the
tool in each axis to a known position relative to the workpiece. You MAX
then set the TNC display to either zero or a predetermined position Y
value. This establishes the reference system for the workpiece, which
will be used for the TNC display and your part program.
If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates, X
simply use the coordinate transformation cycles.(see “Coordinate
Transformation Cycles” on page 319).
If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC, set the datum at
a position or corner on the workpiece, which is the most suitable for MIN
deducing the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions.
The fastest, easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by
using a 3-D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN. See the new Touch Probe
Cycles User’s Manual, chapter “Setting the Datum with a 3-D Touch Y
Probe.”
Example 17 150 13 14
0
The workpiece drawing at right shows holes (1 to 4) whose 750 16
dimensions are shown with respect to an absolute datum with the 15 -150
300±0,1
coordinates X=0, Y=0. The holes (5 to 7) are dimensioned with respect
to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X=450, Y=750. With
0
the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the 320
position X=450, Y=750, to be able to program the holes (5 to 7) 1 12
without further calculations.
X
325 450 900
950

4.2 File Management:
4.2 File Management: Fundamentals

Fundamentals
Using the MOD function PGM MGT (see “Configuring

PGM MGT” on page 433), select between standard and
advanced file management.
If the TNC is connected to a network (optional), then use
file management with additional functions.
Files
Files in the TNC Type

Programs
In HEIDENHAIN format .H
In ISO format .I
Tables for
Tools .T
Tool changers .TCH
Pallets .P
Datums .D
Points (digitizing range of measuring touch .PNT
probe)
Cutting data .CDT
Cutting materials, workpiece materials .TAB
Texts as
ASCII files .A
When you write a part program on the TNC, you must first enter a file
name. The TNC saves the program to the hard disk as a file with the
same name. The TNC can also save texts and tables as files.
The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can
easily find and manage your files. Here you can call, copy, rename and
erase files.
You can manage any number of files on the TNC’s hard disk. Their total
size, however, must not exceed 1,500 MB.
File names
When you store programs, tables and texts as files, the TNC adds an
extension to the file name, separated by a point. This extension
indicates the file type.
PROG20 .H
File name File type
Maximum Length See table “Files in the TNC.”

4.2 File Management: Fundamentals
Data security
We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at
regular intervals.
You can do this with the free backup program TNCBACK.EXE from
HEIDENHAIN. Your machine tool builder can provide you with a copy
of TNCBACK.EXE.
In addition, you need a floppy disk on which all machine-specific data,
such as PLC program, machine parameters, etc., are stored. Please
contact your machine tool builder for more information on both the
backup program and the floppy disk.
Saving the contents of the entire hard disk (up to 1500

MB) can take up to several hours. In this case, it is a good
idea to save the data outside of working hours, (e.g.
overnight), or to use the PARALLEL EXECUTE function to
copy in the background while you work.
Depending on operating conditions (e.g., vibration load),

hard disks generally have a higher failure rate after three to
five years of service. HEIDENHAIN therefore
recommends having the hard disk inspected after three to
five years.

4.3 Standard File Management

Note
The standard file management is best if you wish to save

all files in one directory, or if you are well practiced in the
file management of old TNC controls.
To use the standard file management, set the MOD
function PGM MGT (see “Configuring PGM MGT” on page
433) to Standard.
Calling the file manager
Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file
management window (see figure at right)
The window shows you all of the files that are stored in the TNC. Each
file is shown with additional information:
Display Meaning
FILE NAME Name with up to 16 characters and file type
BYTE File size in bytes
STATUS Properties of the file:
E Program is selected in the Programming and

Editing mode of operation.
S Program is selected in the Test Run mode of

operation.
M Program is selected in a program run

operating mode.
P File is protected against editing and erasure.

Selecting a file
Call the file manager.
Use the arrow keys or the arrow soft keys to move the highlight to the
file you wish to select:
Moves the highlight up or down file by file in the
window.
Moves the highlight up or down page by page in the

window.
To select the file: Press the SELECT soft key or the

ENT key.
or
Deleting a file
file you wish to delete:
window.

window.
To delete the file: Press the DELETE soft key.
Delete ..... file?
Confirm with the YES soft key.
Abort with the NO soft key.

Copying a file
file you wish to copy:
window.

window.
To copy the file: Press the COPY soft key.
Target file =
Enter the new name, and confirm your entry with the AUSFÜHREN
soft key or the ENT key. A status window appears on the TNC,
informing about the copying progress. As long as the TNC is copying,
you can no longer work, or
If you wish to copy very long programs, enter the new file name and
confirm with the PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key. The file will now be
copied in the background, so you can continue to work while the TNC
is copying.

Data transfer to or from an external data
medium
Before you can transfer data to an external data medium,

you must setup the data interface(see “Setting the Data
Interfaces” on page 422). 1 2
Activate data transfer: Press the EXT soft key. In the

left half of the screen (1) the TNC shows all files
saved on its hard disk. In the right half of the screen
(2) it shows all files saved on the external data
medium.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the file(s) that you want to transfer:
Moves the highlight up and down within a window
Moves the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.
If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium, move
the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred.
If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC, move
the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred.
Tagging functions Soft key

Tag a single file
Tag all files
Untag a single file
Untag all files
Copy all tagged files

Transfer a single file: Press the COPY soft key, or
Transfer several files: Press the TAG soft key, or
Transfer all files: Press the TNC => EXT soft key.
Confirm with the EXECUTE or with the ENT key. A status window
appears on the TNC, informing about the copying progress, or
If you wish to transfer more than one file or longer files, press the
PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key. The TNC then copies the file in the
background.
To stop transfer, press the TNC soft key. The

standard file manager window is displayed again.

Selecting one of the last 10 files selected
Display the last 10 files selected: Press the LAST

FILES soft key.
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select:
Move the highlight up or down.
To select the file: Press the SELECT soft key or the

ENT key.
or
Renaming a file
file you wish to rename:
window.

window.
Press the RENAME soft key to select the renaming

function
Target file =
Enter the name of the new file and confirm your entry with the ENT
key or EXECUTE soft key.

Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN
conversational format
file you wish to convert:

window.

window.
Convert the file: Press the CONVERT FK –> H soft

key.
Target file =
Enter the name of the new file and confirm your entry with the ENT
key or EXECUTE soft key.

Protect file / Cancel file protection
Use the arrow keys or arrow soft keys to move the highlight to the file
you wish to protect or whose protection you wish to cancel:

window.

window.
To enable file protection: Press the PROTECT soft

key. The file now has status P, or
Press the UNPROTECT soft key to cancel file

protection. The P status is canceled.

4.4 Advanced File Management

Note
Use the advanced file manager if you wish to keep your

files in individual directories.
To use it, set the MOD function PGM MGT (see
“Configuring PGM MGT” on page 433).
See also “File Management: Fundamentals” on page 39.
Directories
To ensure that you can easily find your files, we recommend that you
organize your hard disk into directories. You can divide a directory up
into further directories, which are called subdirectories.
The TNC can manage up to 6 directory levels!

If you save more than 512 files in one directory, the TNC
no longer sorts them alphabetically!
Directory names
The name of a directory can contain up to 8 characters and does not
have an extension. If you enter more than 8 characters for the
directory name, the TNC will display an error message.
Paths
A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under
which a file is saved. The individual names are separated by the TNC:\
symbol “\”.
AUFTR1
Example
NCPROG
On drive TNC:\ the subdirectory AUFTR1 was created. Then, in the
directory AUFTR1 the directory NCPROG was created and the part WZTAB
program PROG1.H was copied into it. The part program now has the
following path: A35K941
TNC:\AUFTR1\NCPROG\PROG1.H ZYLM
The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with TESTPROG
different paths.
HUBER
KAR25T

Overview: Functions of the expanded file
manager
Function Soft key

Copy (and convert) individual files
Display a specific file type
Display the last 10 files that were selected
Erase a file or directory
Tag a file
Renaming a file
Convert an FK program into HEIDENHAIN

conversational format
Protect a file against editing and erasure
Cancel file protection
Network drive management (Ethernet option

only)
Copy a directory
Display all the directories of a particular drive
Delete directory with all its subdirectories

Calling the file manager
Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file
management window (see figure at top right for
default setting. If the TNC displays a different screen
layout, press the WINDOW soft key.)
The narrow window at left shows three drives (1). If the TNC is
connected to a network, it also displayed the connected network
drives. Drives designate devices with which data are stored or
1 3
transferred. One drive is the hard disk of the TNC. Other drives are the
interfaces (RS232, RS422, Ethernet), which can be used, for example,
to connect a personal computer. The selected (active) drive is shown
in a different color. 2
In the lower part of the narrow window the TNC shows all directories
(2) of the selected drive. A drive is always identified by a file symbol
to the left and the directory name to the right. The TNC displays a
subdirectory to the right of and below its parent directory. The
selected (active) directory is depicted in a different color.
The wide window at right 3 shows you all of the files that are stored
in the selected directory. Each file is shown with additional information
that is illustrated in the table on the next page.
Display Meaning
FILE NAME Name with up to 16 characters and file type
BYTE File size in bytes
STATUS Properties of the file:
E Program is selected in the Programming and

Editing mode of operation.
S Program is selected in the Test Run mode of

operation.
M Program is selected in a program run

operating mode.
P File is protected against editing and erasure.
DATE Date the file was last changed
TIME Time the file was last changed

Selecting drives, directories and files
With the arrow keys or the soft keys, you can move the highlight to
the desired position on the screen:
Move the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.
Moves the highlight one page up or down within a

window
1. step: Select a drive
Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window:
Select a drive: Press the SELECT soft key or the ENT

key.
or
2. step: Select a directory
Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left window — the
right window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted
directory.

3rd step: select a file
Press the SELECT TYPE soft key.
Press the soft key for the desired file type, or
Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files, or
4*.H Use wild card characters, e.g. to show all files of the
file type .H that begin with 4.
Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window

The selected file is opened in the operating mode
from which you have the called file manager: Press
or SELECT soft key or the ENT key.
Creating a new directory (only possible on the

drive TNC:\)
Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you
want to create a subdirectory.
NEW Enter the new file name, and confirm with ENT.
Create \NEW directory?
Press the YES soft key to confirm, or
Abort with the NO soft key.

Copying a single file
U Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy.
U Press the COPY soft key to select the copying
function.
U Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your
entry with the ENT key or EXECUTE soft key: The
TNC copies the file into the active directory. The
original file is retained, or
U Press the PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key to copy the
file in the background. Copying in the background
permits you to continue working while the TNC is
copying. This can be useful if you are copying very
large files that take a long time. While the TNC is
copying in the background you can press the INFO
PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key (under MORE
FUNCTIONS, second soft-key row) to check the
progress of copying.
Copying a table
If you are copying tables, you can overwrite individual lines or columns
in the target table with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key. Prerequisites:
n The target table must exist.
n The file to be copied must only contain the columns or lines you
want to replace.
The REPLACE FIELDS soft key does not appear when you
want to overwrite the table in the TNC with an external
data transfer software, such as TNCremoNT. Copy the
externally created file into a different directory, and then
copy the desired fields with the TNC file management.
Example
With a tool presetter you have measured the length and radius of 10
new tools. The tool presetter then generates the tool table TOOL.T
with 10 lines (for the 10 tools) and the columns
n Tool number (column T)
n Tool length (column L)
n Tool radius (column R)
Copy this file to a directory other than the one containing the previous
TOOL.T. If you wish to copy this file over the existing table using the
TNC file management, the TNC asks if you wish to overwrite the
existing TOOL.T tool table:
U If you press the YES soft key, the TNC will completely overwrite the
current TOOL.T tool table. After this copying process the new
TOOL.T table consists of 10 lines. The only remaining columns in
the table are tool number, tool length and tool radius.
U Or, if you press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key, the TNC merely
overwrites the first 10 lines of the columns number, length and
radius in the TOOL.T file. The TNC does not change the data in the
other lines and columns.

Copying a directory
Move the highlight in the left window onto the directory you want to
copy. Instead of the COPY soft key, press the COPY DIR soft key.
Subdirectories are also copied at the same time.
Choosing one of the last 10 files selected
Display the last 10 files selected: Press the LAST

FILES soft key.
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select:
Select a drive: Press the SELECT soft key or the ENT

key.
or

Deleting a file
U Move the highlight to the file you want to delete.
U To select the erasing function, press the DELETE soft
key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to
erase the file.
U To confirm, press the YES soft key;
U To abort erasure, press the NO soft key.
Deleting a directory
U Delete all files and subdirectories stored in the directory that you
wish to erase.
U Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete.
U To select the erasing function, press the DELETE soft
key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to
erase the directory.
U To confirm, press the YES soft key;
U To abort erasure, press the NO soft key.

Tagging files
Tagging functions Soft key

Tag a single file
Tag all files in the directory
Untag a single file
Untag all files
Copy all tagged files
Some functions, such as copying or erasing files, can not only be used
for individual files, but also for several files at once. To tag several files,
proceed as follows:
Move the highlight to the first file.
To display the tagging functions, press the TAG soft

key.
Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key.
Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag:
You can tag several files in this way, as desired.
To copy the tagged files, press the COPY TAG soft

key, or
Delete the tagged files by pressing END to end the

marking function, and then the DELETE to delete the
tagged files.

Renaming a file
U Move the highlight to the file you want to rename.
U Select the renaming function.
U Enter the new file name; the file type cannot be

changed.
U To execute renaming, press the ENT key.
Additional Functions
Protect file / Cancel file protection
U Move the highlight to the file you want to protect.
U To select the additional functions, press the MORE
FUNCTIONS soft key.
U To enable file protection, press the PROTECT soft
key. The file now has status P.
U To cancel file protection, proceed in the same way
using the UNPROTECT soft key.
Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational

format
U Move the highlight to the file you want to convert.
FUNCTIONS soft key.
U To select the converting function, press the
CONVERT FK->H soft key
U Enter the name of the destination file.
U To convert, press the ENT key.
Erase a directory together with all its subdirectories and files.

U Move the highlight in the left window onto the directory you want
to erase.
FUNCTIONS soft key.
U Press DELETE ALL to erase the directory together
with its subdirectories.
U To confirm, press the YES soft key; To abort erasure,
press the NO soft key.

Data transfer to or from an external data
medium
Before you can transfer data to an external data medium,

you must setup the data interface(see “Setting the Data
Interfaces” on page 422). 1 2
Select the screen layout for data transfer: press the

WINDOW soft key. In the left half of the screen (1)
the TNC shows all files saved on its hard disk. In the
right half of the screen (2) it shows all files saved on
the external data medium.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the file(s) that you want to transfer:
Moves the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.
If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium, move
the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred.
If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC, move
the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred.
Transfer a single file: Press the COPY soft key, or
Transfer several files: Press the TAG soft key (in the
second soft-key row, see “Tagging files,” page 57),
or
Transfer all files: Press the TNC => EXT soft key.

Confirm with the EXECUTE or with the ENT key. A status window
appears on the TNC, informing about the copying progress, or
If you wish to transfer more than one file or longer files, press the
PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key. The TNC then copies the file in the
background.
To end data transfer, move the highlight into left

window and then press the WINDOW soft key. The
standard file manager window is displayed again.
To select another directory, press the PATH soft key and

then select the desired directory using the arrow keys and
the ENTkey!
Copying files into another directory

U Select the screen layout with the two equally sized windows.
U To display directories in both windows, press the PATH soft key.
In the right window
U Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the
files, and display the files in this directory with the ENT key.
In the left window
U Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and press
ENT to display them.
U Display the file tagging functions.
U Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and tag
it. You can tag several files in this way, as desired.
U Copy the tagged files into the target directory.
Additional tagging functions: see “Tagging files,” page 57

If you have marked files in the left and right windows, the TNC copies
from the directory in which the highlight is located.

Overwriting files
If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under
the same name, the TNC will ask whether the files in the target
directory should be overwritten:
U To overwrite all files, press the YES soft key, or
U To overwrite no files, press the NO soft key, or
U To confirm each file separately before overwriting it, press the
CONFIRM soft key.
If you wish to overwrite a protected file, this must also be confirmed
or aborted separately.
The TNC in a network (applies only for Ethernet

interface option)
To connect the Ethernet card to your network, (see

“Ethernet Interface” on page 427).
2
The TNC logs error messages during network 1
operation(see “Ethernet Interface” on page 427).
If the TNC is connected to a network, the directory window 1 displays

up to 7 drives (see figure at right). All the functions described above
(selecting a drive, copying files, etc.) also apply to network drives,
provided that you have been given the corresponding rights.
Connecting and disconnecting a network drive

U To select the program management: Press the PGM
MGT key. If necessary, press the WINDOW soft key
to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right.
U To manage the network drives: Press the NETWORK
soft key (second soft-key row). In the right-hand
window 2 the TNC shows the network drives
available for access. With the following soft keys you
can define the connection for each drive.
Function Soft key

Establish network connection. If the connection
is active, the TNC shows an M in the Mnt column.
You can connect up to 7 additional drives with
the TNC.
Delete network connection
Automatically establish network connection

whenever the TNC is switched on. The TNC
shows an A in the Auto column if the connection
is established automatically.
Do not establish network connection

automatically when the TNC is switched on.

4.4 Advanced File Management It may take some time to mount a network device. At the upper right
of the screen the TNC displays[READ DIR] to indicate that a connection
is being established. The maximum data transmission rate lies
between 200 and 1000 kilobaud, depending on the file type being
transmitted.
Printing file with a network printer

If you have defined a network printer (see “Ethernet Interface” on
page 427), you can print the files directly:
U To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key.
U Move the highlight to the file you wish to print.
U Press the COPY soft key.
U Press the PRINT soft key: If you have define only one printer, the
TNC will print the file immediately. If you have defined more than
one printer, the TNC opens a window listing all defined printers. Use
the arrow keys to select the desired printer, then press ENT

4.5 Creating and Writing Programs

Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN
conversational format.
A part program consists of a series of program blocks. The figure at
right illustrates the elements of a block.
The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence.
Blocks
The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM, the program
name and the active unit of measure. 10 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3
The subsequent blocks contain information on:
n The workpiece blank
n Tool definitions, tool calls Path function Words
n Feed rates and spindle speeds, as well as
Block number
n Path contours, cycles and other functions
The last block of a program is identified by END PGM, the program
name and the active unit of measure.
Defining the blank form–BLK FORM

Immediately after initiating a new program, you define a cuboid
workpiece blank. If you wish to define the blank at a later stage, press
the BLK FORM soft key. This definition is needed for the TNC’s
graphic simulation feature. The sides of the workpiece blank lie parallel
to the X, Y and Z axes and can be up to 100 000 mm long. The blank
form is defined by two of its corner points:
n MIN point: the smallest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank form,
entered as absolute values.
n MAX point: the largest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank form,
entered as absolute or incremental values.
You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run
a graphic test for the program!

Creating a new part program
You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation. Program initiation in an example:
Select the Programming and Editing mode of

operation.
To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key.
Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program
File name = OLD.H
Enter the new program name and confirm your entry

with the ENT key.
To select the unit of measure, press the MM or INCH

soft key. The TNC switches the screen layout and
initiates the dialog for defining the BLK-FORM.
Working spindle axis X/Y/Z ?
Enter the spindle axis.
Def BLK FORM: Min-corner ?
0 Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the

MIN point.
0
-40
Def BLK FORM: MAX-corner ?
100 Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the

MAX point.
100

Example: Display the BLK form in the NC program.
0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM Program begin, name, unit of measure
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 MAX point coordinates
3 END PGM NEW MM Program end, name, unit of measure
The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the

BEGIN and END blocks.
If you do not wish to define a blank form, cancel the dialog

at Working spindle axis X/Y/Z by pressing the DEL key!
The TNC can display the graphic only if the ratio of the
short side to the long sides of the BLK FORM is greater than
1:64!

Programming tool movements in conversational
format
To program a block, initiate the dialog by pressing a function key. In the
screen headline, the TNC then asks you for all the information
necessary to program the desired function.
Example of a dialog
Dialog initiation
Coordinates ?
Enter the target coordinate for the X axis.

10
Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis, and go to

20
the next question with ENT.
Radius comp. RL/RR/no comp. ?
Enter “No radius compensation” and go to the next

question with ENT.
Feed rate F=? / F MAX = ENT
Enter a feed rate of 100 mm/min for this path contour;

100
go to the next question with ENT.
Miscellaneous function M ?
Enter the miscellaneous function M3 “spindle ON”;

3
pressing the ENT key will terminate this dialog.
The program blocks window will display the following line:
3 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3
Functions for setting the feed rate Soft key

Rapid traverse
Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in

TOOL CALL

Function Key
Ignore the dialog question
End the dialog immediately
Abort the dialog and erase the block
Editing a program
While you are creating or editing a part program, you can select any
desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the
arrow keys or the soft keys:
Function Soft keys/keys

Go to the previous page
Go to the next page
Go to beginning of program
Go to end of program
Move from one block to the next
Select individual words in a block
Function Key
Set the selected word to zero
Erase an incorrect number
Clear a (non-blinking) error message
Delete the selected word
Delete the selected block

Function Key
Erase cycles and program sections: First
select the last block of the cycle or program
section to be erased, then erase with the DEL
key.
Inserting blocks at any desired location

U Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and
initiate the dialog.
Editing and inserting words

U Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one. The plain-
language dialog is available while the word is highlighted.
U To accept the change, press the END key.
If you want to insert a word, press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly
until the desired dialog appears. You can then enter the desired value.
Looking for the same words in different blocks

Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF.
To select a word in a block, press the arrow keys

repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word.
Select a block with the arrow keys.
The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one
you selected previously.
Finding any text

U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key. The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Find text:
U Enter the text that you wish to find.
U To find the text, press the EXECUTE soft key.

Marking, copying, deleting and inserting program sections
The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections
within an NC program or into another NC program—see the table at
right.
To copy a program section, proceed as follows:
U Select the soft-key row using the marking function.
U Select the first (last) block of the section you wish to copy.
U To mark the first (last) block: Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key. The
TNC then highlights the first character of the block and
superimposes the soft key CANCEL SELECTION.
U Move the highlight to the last (first) block of the program section you
wish to copy or delete. The TNC shows the marked blocks in a
different color. You can end the marking function at any time by
pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key.
U To copy the selected program section: Press the COPY BLOCK soft
key, and to delete the selected section: Press the DELETE BLOCK
soft key. The TNC stores the selected block.
U Using the arrow keys, select the block after which you wish to insert
the copied (deleted) program section.
To insert the section into another program, select the

corresponding program using the File Manager and then
mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied
block.
U To insert the block: Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key.
Function Soft key

Switch on marking function
Switch off marking function
Delete marked block
Insert block that is stored in the buffer memory
Copy marked block

4.6 Interactive Programming
4.6 Interactive Programming Graphics
Graphics
To generate/not generate graphics during
programming:
While you are writing the part program, you can have the TNC
generate a 2-D pencil-trace graphic of the programmed contour.
U To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left
and graphics to the right, press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PGM +
GRAPHICS soft key.
U Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON. While you are
entering the program lines, the TNC generates each
path contour you program in the graphics window in
the right screen half.
If you do not wish to have graphics generated during programming,
set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF.
Even when AUTO DRAW is switched ON, graphics are not generated
for program section repeats.
Generating a graphic for an existing program

U Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the
graphic to be generated, or press GOTO and enter the desired block
number.
U To generate graphics, press the RESET + START soft
key.
Additional functions:
Function Soft key

Generate a complete graphic
Generate interactive graphic blockwise
Generate a complete graphic or complete it after

RESET + START
Stop the programming graphics. This soft key

only appears while the TNC generates the
interactive graphics

4.6 Interactive Programming Graphics
Block number display ON/OFF
U Shift the soft-key row (see figure at upper right).
U To show block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to SHOW.
U To show block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK
NR. soft key to OMIT.
To erase the graphic:

U Shift the soft-key row (see figure at upper right).
U Delete graphic: Press CLEAR GRAPHIC soft key.
Magnifying or reducing a detail

You can select the graphics display by selecting a detail with the frame
overlay. You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail.
U Select the soft-key row for detail magnification/reduction (second
row, see figure at center right).
The following functions are available:
Function Soft key
Show and move the frame overlay. Press and
hold the desired soft key to move the frame
overlay.
Reduce the frame overlay — press and hold the

soft key to reduce the detail
Enlarge the frame overlay — press and hold the

soft key to magnify the detail
U Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL

soft key.
With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key, you can restore the original
section.

4.7 Structuring Programs
4.7 Structuring Programs
Definition and applications

This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in
structuring blocks. Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 244
characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent
program lines.
With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks, you can organize long
and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible way.
This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the
program later. Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program
at any point. They can also be displayed in a separate window, and
edited or added to, as desired. A second level is provided for subdividing
a structuring block: the TNC indents texts in the second level.
To display the program structure window /

change the active window:
U To display the program structure window, select the
screen display PGM+SECTS.
U Tochange the active window, press the CHANGE
WINDOW soft key.
To insert a structuring block in the (left) program

window
U Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted.
U Press the INSERT SECTION soft key.
U Enterthe structuring text with the alphabetic

keyboard.
U To switch levels: Press the CHANGE LEVEL soft key.
To insert a structuring block in the (right)

structure window
U Select the structuring block after which the new block is to be
inserted.
U Enter the text with the alphabetic keyboard — the TNC
automatically inserts the new block.
Selecting blocks in the program structure

window
If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by
block, the TNC at the same time automatically moves the
corresponding NC blocks in the program window. This way you can
quickly skip large program sections.

4.8 Adding Comments
4.8 Adding Comments

Function
You can add comments to any desired block in the part program to
explain program steps or make general notes. There are three
possibilities to add comments:
Entering comments during programming

U Enter the data for a program block, then press the semicolon key “;”
on the alphabetic keyboard—the TNC displays the dialog prompt
COMMENT?
U Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END
key.
Inserting comments after program entry

U Select the block to which a comment is to be added.
U Select the last word in the block with the right arrow key:
A semicolon appears at the end of the block and the TNC displays
the dialog prompt COMMENT?
key.
Entering a comment in a separate block

U Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted.
U Initiate the programming dialog with the semicolon key “;” on the
alphabetic keyboard.
key.

4.9 Creating Text Files
Function
You can use the TNC’s text editor to write and edit texts. Typical
applications:
n Recording test results
n Documenting working procedures
n Creating formularies
Text files are type .A files (ASCII files). If you want to edit other types
of files, you must first convert them into type .A files.
Opening and exiting text files

U Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation.
U To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key.
U To display type .A files, press the SELECT TYPE and then the SHOW
.A soft keys.
U Select a file and open it with the SELECT soft key or ENT key, or
create a new file by entering the new file name and confirming your
entry with the ENT key.
To leave the text editor, call the file manager and select a file of a
different file type, for example a part program.
Cursor movements Soft key

Move one word to the right
Move one word to the left
Go to the next screen page
Go to the previous screen page
Go to beginning of file
Go to end of file
Editing functions Key

Begin a new line
Erase the character to the left of the cursor

Editing functions Key
Insert a blank space
Switch between upper and lower case letters
Editing texts
The first line of the text editor is an information headline which
displays the file name, and the location and writing mode of the cursor:
File: Name of the text file
Line: Line in which the cursor is presently located
Column: Column in which the cursor is presently located
INSERT: Insert new text, pushing the existing text to the right
OVERWRITE: Write over the existing text, erasing it where it is
replaced with the new text.
The text is inserted or overwritten at the location of the cursor. You

can move the cursor to any desired position in the text file by pressing
the arrow keys.
The line in which the cursor is presently located is depicted in a
different color. A line can have up to 77 characters. To start a new line,
press the RET key or the ENT key.

Erasing and inserting characters, words and
lines
With the text editor, you can erase words and even lines, and insert
them at any desired location in the text.
U Move the cursor to the word or line you wish to erase and insert at
a different place in the text.
U Press the DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft key: The text is put
in the buffer memory
U Move the cursor to the location where you wish insert the text, and
press the RESTORE LINE/WORD soft key.
Function Soft key

Delete and temporarily store a line
Delete and temporarily store a word
Delete and temporarily store a character
Insert a line or word from temporary storage
Editing text blocks

You can copy and erase text blocks of any size, and insert them at
other locations. Before carrying out any of these editing functions, you
must first select the desired text block:
U To select a text block, move the cursor to the first character of the
text you wish to select.
U Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key.
U Move the cursor to the last character of the text you

wish to select. You can select whole lines by moving
the cursor up or down directly with the arrow keys —
the selected text is shown in a different color.
After selecting the desired text block, you can edit the text with the
Function Soft key

Delete the selected text and store temporarily
Store marked block temporarily without erasing

(copy )

If necessary, you can now insert the temporarily stored block at a
different location
U Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the
temporarily stored text block.
U Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key: The text block is
inserted.
You can insert the temporarily stored text block as often as desired.
To transfer the selected text to a different file:

U Select the text block as described previously.
U Press the APPEND TO FILE soft key. The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Destination file =
U Enter the path and name of the target file. The TNC
appends the selected text to the end of the specified
file. If no target file with the specified name is found,
the TNC creates a new file with the selected text.
To insert another file at the cursor position:

U Move the cursor to the location in the text where you wish to insert
another file.
U Press the READ FILE soft key. The TNC displays the
dialog prompt File name =
U Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert.
Finding text sections

With the text editor, you can search for words or character strings in a
text. Two functions are available:
Finding the current text

The search function is to find the next occurrence of the word in which
the cursor is presently located:
U Move the cursor to the desired word.
U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key.
U Press the FIND CURRENT WORD soft key.
U To leave the search function, press the END soft key.
Finding any text

U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key. The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Find text:
U Enter the text that you wish to find.
U To find the text, press the EXECUTE soft key.
U To leave the search function, press the END soft key.

4.10 Integrated Pocket Calculator
4.10 Integrated Pocket Calculator
Operation
The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic
mathematical functions.
With the CALC key you can open and close an additional window for
calculations. You can move the window to any desired location on the
TNC screen with the arrow keys.
The calculator is operated with short commands through the
alphabetic keyboard. The commands are shown in a special color in
the calculator window:
Mathematical function Command (key)

Addition +
Subtraction –
Multiplication *
Division :
Sine S
Cosine C
Tangent T
Arc sine AS
Arc cosine AC
Arc tangent AT
Powers ^
Square root Q
Inversion /
Parenthetic calculations ()
p (3.14159265359) P
Display result =
If you are writing a program and the programming dialog is active, you
can use the actual-position-capture key to transfer the result to the
highlight position in the current block.

4.11 Immediate Help for NC Error
4.11 Immediate Help for NC Error Messages

Messages
Displaying error messages
The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects
problems such as
n Incorrect data input
n Logical errors in the program
n Contour elements that are impossible to machine
n Incorrect use of the touch probe system
An error message that contains a program block number was caused
by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block. The TNC
error messages can be canceled with the CE key, after the cause of
the error has been removed.
If you require more information on a particular error message, press
the HELP key. A window is then superimposed where the cause of
the error is explained and suggestions are made for correcting the
error.
Display HELP
U To display Help, press the HELP key.
U Read the description of the error and the possibilities
for correcting it. Close the Help window with the CE,
thus canceling the error message.
U Remove the cause of the error as described in the
Help window.
The TNC displays the Help text automatically if the error message is
flashing. The TNC needs to be restarted after blinking error messages.
To restart the TNC, press the END key and hold for two seconds.

4.12 Pallet Management
Application
Pallet table management is a machine-dependent

function. The standard functional range will be described
in the following. Refer to your machine manual for more
information.
Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changer: The
pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different
pallets, and activates datum shifts or datum tables.
You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs
that have different datums.
Pallet tables contain the following information:
n PAL/PGM (entry obligatory):
Identification for pallet or NC program (select with ENT or NO ENT)
n NAME (entry obligatory):
Pallet or program name. The machine tool builder determines the
pallet name (see Machine Manual). The program name must be
stored in the same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must
enter the full path name for the program.
n DATUM (entry optional):
Name of the datum table. The datum table must be stored in the
same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must enter the full
path name for the datum table. Datums from the datum table can be
activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT.
n X, Y, Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):
For pallet names, the programmed coordinates are referenced to
the machine datum. For NC programs, the programmed coordinates
are referenced to the pallet datum. These entries overwrite the
datum that you last set in the Manual mode of operation. With the
miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate the datum that was
last set. With the actual-position-capture key, the TNC opens a
window that enables you to have the TNC enter various points as
datums (see table below):
Position Meaning
Actual values Enter the coordinates of the current tool position
relative to the active coordinate system.
Reference Enter the coordinates of the current tool position

values relative to the machine datum.
ACTL measured Enter the coordinates relative to the active

values coordinate system of the datum last probed in
the Manual operating mode.
REF measured Enter the coordinates relative to the machine

values datum of the datum last probed in the Manual
operating mode.

With the arrow keys and ENT, select the position that you wish to
confirm. Then press the ALL VALUES soft key so that the TNC saves
the respective coordinates of all active axes in the pallet table. With
the PRESENT VALUE soft key, the TNC saves the coordinates of the
axis on which the highlight in the pallet table is presently located.
If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program, the

programmed coordinates are then referenced to the
machine datum. If you do not define an entry, the datum
that was set manually remains active.
Editing function Soft key

Select beginning of table
Select end of table
Select previous page in table
Select next page in table
Insert the last line in the table
Delete the last line in the table
Go to the beginning of the next line
Add the entered number of lines to the end of the

table
Copy the highlighted field (2nd soft-key row)
Insert the copied field (2nd soft-key row)

Selecting a pallet table
U Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program
Run mode: Press the PGM MGT key.
U Display all type .P files: Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and
SHOW .P.
U Select a pallet table with the arrow keys, or enter a new file name
to create a new table.
U Confirm your entry with the ENT key.
To leave the pallet file:

U To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT soft key.
U To select a different type of file, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
and the soft key for the desired file type, for example SHOW.H.
U Select the desired file.
Executing the pallet file
In machine parameter 7683, set whether the pallet table

is to be executed blockwise or continuously (see “General
User Parameters” on page 448).
U Select the file manager in the operating mode Program Run, Full
Sequence or Program Run, Single Block: Press the PGM MGT key.
SHOW .P.
U Select pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT.
U To execute pallet table: Press the NC Start button. The TNC
executes the pallets as set in Machine Parameter 7683.

Screen layout for executing pallet tables
You can have the TNC display the program contents and pallet file
contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout PGM
+ PALLET. During execution, the TNC then shows program blocks to
the left and the pallet to the right. To check at the program contents
before execution, proceed as follows:
U Select a pallet table.
U With the arrow keys, choose the program you would like to check.
U Press the OPEN PGM soft key: The TNC displays the selected
program on the screen. You can now page through the program with
the arrow keys.
U To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key.

4.13 Pallet Operation with Tool-
4.13 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Oriented Machining
Application
Pallet management in combination with tool-oriented

machining is a machine-dependent function. The standard
functional range will be described in the following. Refer
to your machine manual for more information.
Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changer: The
pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different
pallets, and activates datum shifts or datum tables.
You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs
that have different datums.
Pallet tables contain the following information:
n PAL/PGM (entry obligatory):
The entry PAL identifies the pallet, FIX marks the fixture plane and
PGM is used to enter the workpiece.
n W-STATE:
Current machining status. The machining status is used to
determine the current stage of machining. Enter BLANK for an
unmachined (raw) workpiece. During machining, the TNC changes
this entry to INCOMPLETE, and after machining has finished, to ENDED.
The entry EMPTY is used to identify a space at which no workpiece is
to be clamped or where no machining is to take place.
n METHOD (entry obligatory):
Entry which determines the method of program optimization.
Machining is workpiece-oriented if WPO is entered. Machining of the
piece is tool-oriented if TO is entered. In order to include subsequent
workpieces in the tool-oriented machining, you must enter CTO
(continued tool oriented). Tool-oriented machining is also possible
with pallet fixtures, but not for multiple pallets.
n NAME (entry obligatory):
Pallet or program name. The machine tool builder determines the
pallet name (see Machine Manual). Programs must be stored in the
path name for the program.

n DATUM (entry optional):

Name of the datum table. The datum table must be stored in the
path name for the datum table. Datums from the datum table can be
activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT.
n X, Y, Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):
For pallets and fixtures, the programmed coordinates are referenced
to the machine datum. For NC programs, the programmed
coordinates are referenced to the pallet or fixture datum. These
entries overwrite the datum that you last set in the Manual mode of
operation. With the miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate
the datum that was last set. With the actual-position-capture key,
the TNC opens a window that enables you to have the TNC enter
various points as datums (see table below):
Position Meaning
Actual values Enter the coordinates of the current tool position
relative to the active coordinate system.
Reference Enter the coordinates of the current tool position

values relative to the machine datum.
ACTL measured Enter the coordinates relative to the active

values coordinate system of the datum last probed in
the Manual operating mode.
REF measured Enter the coordinates relative to the machine

values datum of the datum last probed in the Manual
operating mode.
With the arrow keys and ENT, select the position that you wish to
confirm. Then press the ALL VALUES soft key so that the TNC saves
the respective coordinates of all active axes in the pallet table. With
the PRESENT VALUE soft key, the TNC saves the coordinates of the
axis on which the highlight in the pallet table is presently located.
If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program, the

programmed coordinates are then referenced to the
machine datum. If you do not define an entry, the datum
that was set manually remains active.
n SP-X, SP-Y, SP-Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):

Safety positions can be entered for the axes. These positions can be
read with SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 6 from NC macros. SYSREAD
FN18 ID510 NR 5 can be used to determine if a value was
programmed in the column. The positions entered are only
approached if these values are read and correspondingly
programmed in the NC macros.

n CTID (entered by the TNC):
The context ID number is assigned by the TNC and contains
instructions about the machining progress. Machining cannot be
resumed if the entry is deleted or changed.
Editing function in table mode Soft key

Select end of table
Insert the last line in the table
Delete the last line in the table
Add the entered number of lines to the end of the

table
Editing function in entry-form mode Soft key

Select previous pallet
Select next pallet
Select previous fixture
Select next fixture
Select previous workpiece
Select next workpiece

Switch to pallet plane
Switch to fixture plane
Switch to workpiece plane
Select standard pallet view
Select detailed pallet view
Select standard fixture view
Select detailed fixture view
Select standard workpiece view
Select detailed workpiece view
Insert pallet
Insert fixture
Insert workpiece
Delete pallet
Delete fixture
Delete workpiece
Copy all fields to clipboard
Copy highlighted field to clipboard
Insert the copied field
Delete clipboard contents

Tool-optimized machining
Workpiece-optimized machining
Connecting or separating the types of machining
Mark plane as being empty
Mark plane as being unmachined

Selecting a pallet file
U Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program
Run mode: Press the PGM MGT key.
SHOW .P.
U Select a pallet table with the arrow keys, or enter a new file name
to create a new table.
U Confirm your entry with the ENT key.
Setting up the pallet file with the entry form

Pallet operation with tool- or workpiece-oriented machining is divided
into three planes:
n Pallet plane PAL
n Fixture plane FIX
n Workpiece plane PGM
You can switch to a detail view in each plane. Set the machining
method and the pallet, fixture and workpiece statuses in the standard
view. If you are editing an existing pallet file, the updated entries are
displayed. Use the detail view for setting up the pallet file.
Set up the pallet file according to the machine

configuration. If you only have one fixture with multiple
workpieces, then defining one fixture FIX with the
workpieces PGM is sufficient. However, if one pallet
contains several fixtures, or if a fixture is machined from
more than one side, you must define the pallet PAL with
the corresponding fixture planes FIX.
Use the screen layout button to switch between table
view and form view.
Graphic support for form entry is not yet available.
The various planes of the entry form can be reached with the
appropriate soft keys. The current plane is highlighted in the status line
of the entry form. When you switch to table view with the screen
layout button, the cursor is placed in the same plane as it was in the
form view.

4.13 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining Setting up the pallet plane
n Pallet Id: The pallet name is displayed
n Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. The selected method is
assumed for the workpiece plane and overwrites any existing
entries. In tabular view, WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO,
and TOOL ORIENTED appears as TO.
The TO-/WP-ORIENTED entry cannot be made via soft

key. It only appears when different machining methods
were chosen for the workpieces in the workpiece or
machining plane.
If the machining method was determines in the fixture
plane, the entries are carried over to the workpiece plane,
where they overwrite any existing entries.
n Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the pallet and the
corresponding fixtures and workpieces as not yet having been
machined, and enters BLANK in the Status field. Use the soft key
EMPTY POSITION if you want to skip the pallet during machining.
EMPTY appears in the Status field.
Setting up details in the pallet plane

n Pallet ID: Enter the pallet name
n Datum: Enter the pallet datum
n Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table of the
workpiece. The data is carried over to the fixture and workpiece
planes.
n Safe height: (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the pallet. The positions entered are only approached
if these values were read and correspondingly programmed in the
NC macros.

Setting up the fixture plane
n Fixture: The number of the fixture is displayed. The number of
fixtures within this plane is shown after the slash.
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. The selected method is
assumed for the workpiece plane and overwrites any existing
entries. In tabular view, entry WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as
WPO, and TOOL ORIENTED appears as TO.
Use the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key to mark fixtures that are to be
included for calculating the machining process for tool-oriented
machining. Connected fixtures are marked with a dashed line,
whereas separated fixtures are connected with a solid line.
Connected workpieces are marked in tabular view with the entry
CTO in the METHOD column.
The TO-/WP-ORIENTED entry cannot be made via soft

key. It only appears when different machining methods
were chosen for the workpieces in the workpiece plane.
If the machining method was determines in the fixture
plane, the entries are carried over to the workpiece plane,
where they overwrite any existing entries.
n Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the fixture and the
corresponding workpieces as not yet having been machined, and
enters BLANK in the Status field. Use the soft key EMPTY POSITION
if you want to skip the fixture during machining. EMPTY appears in
the Status field.
Setting up details in the fixture plane

n Fixture: The number of the fixture is displayed. The number of
fixtures within this plane is shown after the slash.
n Datum: Enter the fixture datum
n Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table valid for
machining the workpiece. The data is carried over to the workpiece
plane.
n NC macro: In tool-oriented machining, the macro TCTOOLMODE is
carried out instead of the normal tool-change macro.
referenced to the fixture.
Safety positions can be entered for the axes. These

positions can be read with SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 6
from NC macros. SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 5 can be
used to determine if a value was programmed in the
column. The positions entered are only approached if
these values are read and correspondingly programmed in
the NC macros.

4.13 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining Setting up the workpiece plane
n Workpiece: The number of the workpiece is displayed. The number
of workpieces within this fixture plane is shown after the slash.
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. In tabular view, entry
WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO, and TOOL ORIENTED
appears as TO.
Use the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key to mark workpieces that are to
be included for calculating the machining process for tool-oriented
machining. Connected workpieces are marked with a dashed line,
whereas separated workpieces are connected with a solid line.
Connected workpieces are marked in tabular view with the entry
CTO in the METHOD column.
n Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the workpiece as not yet
having been machined, and enters BLANK in the Status field. Use
the soft key EMPTY POSITION if you want to skip the workpiece during
machining. EMPTY appears in the Status field.
Enter the method and status in the pallet or fixture plane.

Then the entry will be assumed for all corresponding
workpieces.
For several workpiece variants within one plane, the
workpieces of one variant should be entered together.
This way, the workpieces of each variant can be marked
with the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key, and can be
machined in groups.
Setting up details in the workpiece plane

n Workpiece: The number of the workpiece is displayed. The number
of workpieces within this fixture or pallet plane is shown after the
slash.
n Datum: Enter the workpiece datum
n Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table valid for
machining the workpiece. If you use the same datum table for all
workpieces, enter the name and path in the pallet or fixture planes.
The data is automatically carried over to the workpiece plane.
n NC program: Enter the path of the NC program that is necessary for
machining the workpiece
referenced to the workpiece. The positions entered are only
approached if these values were read and correspondingly
programmed in the NC macros.

Sequence of tool-oriented machining
The TNC only carries out tool-oriented machining if the

TOOL ORIENTED method was selected, and TO or CTO is
entered in the table.
n The entry TO or CTO in the Method field tells the TNC that the
oriented machining is valid beyond these lines.
n The pallet management starts the NC program given in the line with
the entry TO.
n The first workpiece is machined until the next tool call is pending.
Departure from the workpiece is coordinated by a special tool-
change macro.
n The entry in the column W-STATE is changed from BLANK to
INCOMPLETE, and the TNC enters a hexadecimal value in the field
CTID.
The value entered in the field CTID is a unique identifier of

the machining progress for the TNC. If these value is
deleted or changed, machining cannot be continued, nor is
mid-program startup or resumption of machining possible.
n All lines in the pallet file that contain the entry CTO in the Method
field are machined in the same manner as the first workpiece.
Workpieces in several fixtures can be machined.
n The TNC uses the next tool for the following machining steps again
from the line with the entry TO if one of the following situations
applies:
n If the entry PAL is in the PAL/PGM field in the next line.
n If the entry TO or WPO is in the Method field in the next line.
n If in the lines already machined there are entries under Method
which do not have the status EMPTY or ENDED.
n The NC program is continued at the stored location based on the
value entered in the CTID field. Usually the tool is changed for the
first piece, but the TNC suppresses the tool change for the following
workpieces.
n The entry in the CTID field is updated after every machining step. If
an END PGM or M02 is executed in an NC program, then an existing
entry is deleted and ENDED is entered in the Machining Status field.

n If the entries TO or CTO for all workpieces within a group contain the
status ENDED, the next lines in the pallet file are run.
In mid-program startup, only one tool-oriented machining

is possible. Following pieces are machined according to
the method entered.
The value entered in the CTID field is stored for a
maximum of one week. Within this time the machining
can be continued at the stored location. After this time the
value is deleted, in order to prevent large amounts of
unnecessary data on the hard disk.
The operating mode can be changed after executing a
group of entries with TO or CTO.
The following functions are not permitted:
n Switching the traverse range
n PLC datum shift
n M118
To leave the pallet file:

U To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT soft key.
U To select a different type of file, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
and the soft key for the desired file type, for example SHOW.H.
U Select the desired file.
Executing the pallet file
In machine parameter 7683, set whether the pallet table

is to be executed blockwise or continuously (see “General
User Parameters” on page 448).
U Select the file manager in the operating mode Program Run, Full
Sequence or Program Run, Single Block: Press the PGM MGT key.
SHOW .P.
U Select pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT.
U To execute pallet table: Press the NC Start button. The TNC
executes the pallets as set in Machine Parameter 7683.

Screen layout for executing pallet tables
You can have the TNC display the program contents and pallet file
contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout PGM
+ PALLET. During execution, the TNC then shows program blocks to
the left and the pallet to the right. To check at the program contents
before execution, proceed as follows:
U Select a pallet table.
U With the arrow keys, choose the program you would like to check.
U Press the OPEN PGM soft key: The TNC displays the selected
program on the screen. You can now page through the program with
the arrow keys.
U To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key.

5
Programming: Tools
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data
Feed rate F
The feed rate F is the speed (in millimeters per minute or inches per
minute) at which the tool center moves. The maximum feed rates can S
be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters. Z
S
Input Y
You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every F
positioning block (see “Creating the program blocks with the path X
function keys” on page 131).
Rapid traverse
If you wish to program rapid traverse, enter F MAX. To enter F MAX,
press the ENT key or the F MAX soft key when the dialog question
FEED RATE F = ? appears on the TNC screen.
Duration of effect
A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block
with a different feed rate is reached. F MAX is only effective in the block
in which it is programmed. After the block with F MAX is executed, the
feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value.
Changing during program run

You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed-rate
override knob.
Spindle speed S
The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute (rpm) in a
TOOL CALL block.
Programmed change
In the part program, you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL
CALL block by entering the spindle speed only:
U To program a tool call, press the TOOL CALL key.
U Ignore
the dialog question for Tool number ? with the
NO ENT key.
U Ignorethe dialog question for Working spindle axis
X/Y/Z ? with the NO ENT key.
U Enterthe new spindle speed for the dialog question
Spindle speed S= ?, and confirm with END.
Changing during program run

You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle-
speed override knob.
98 5 Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
5.2 Tool Data

Requirements for tool compensation
You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are
dimensioned in the workpiece drawing. To allow the TNC to calculate
the tool center path - i.e. the tool compensation - you must also enter
the length and radius of each tool you are using.
Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL
DEF or separately in a tool table. In a tool table, you can also enter
additional data on the specific tool. The TNC will consider all the data
entered for the tool when executing the part program.
Tool numbers and tool names

Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 254. If you are
working with tool tables, you can use higher numbers and you can also
enter a tool name for each tool.
The tool number 0 is automatically defined as the zero tool with the
length L=0 and the radius R=0. In tool tables, tool 0 should also be
defined with L=0 and R=0.
Tool length L
There are two ways to determine the tool length L:
Determining the difference between the length of the tool and Z

that of a zero tool L0
For the algebraic sign:
L>L0: The tool is longer than the zero tool L0
L<L0: The tool is shorter than the zero tool
To determine the length:

U Move the zero tool to the reference position in the tool axis (e.g.
workpiece surface with Z=0).
U Set the datum in the tool axis to 0 (datum setting). X
U Insert the desired tool.
U Move the tool to the same reference position as the zero tool.
U The TNC displays the difference between the current tool and the
zero tool.
U Enter the value in the TOOL DEF block or in the tool table by
pressing the actual-position-capture key.
Determining the length L with a tool presetter

Enter the determined value directly in the TOOL DEF tool definition
block or in the tool table without further calculations.
Tool radius R
You can enter the tool radius R directly.

5.2 Tool Data
Delta values for lengths and radii
Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool.
A positive delta value describes a tool oversize (DL, DR, DR2>0). If you R R
are programming the machining data with an allowance, enter the
oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program.
A negative delta value describes a tool undersize (DL, DR, DR2<0). An
undersize is entered in the tool table for wear. L DR<0
Delta values are usually entered as numerical values. In a TOOL CALL
block, you can also assign the values to Q parameters. DR>0
Input range: You can enter a delta value with up to ± 99.999 mm.
DL<0
DL>0
Entering tool data into the program
The number, length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL
DEF block of the part program.
U To select tool definition, press the TOOL DEF key.
U Tool number :Each tool is uniquely identified by its
tool number.
U Tool length : Compensation value for the tool length
U Tool radius : Compensation value for the tool radius
In the programming dialog, you can transfer the value for

tool length directly into the input line with the actual-
position-capture key. You only need to make sure that the
highlight in the status display is placed on the tool axis.
Example
4 TOOL DEF 5 L+10 R+5

5.2 Tool Data
Entering tool data in tables
You can define and store up to 32767 tools and their tool data in a tool
table. In Machine Parameter 7260, you can define how many tools are
to be stored by the TNC when a new table is set up. See also the
Editing Functions at a later stage in this Chapter. In order to be able to
assign various compensation data to a tool (indexing tool number),
machine parameter 7262 must not be equal to 0.
You must use tool tables if
n you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than
one length compensation value (see page 104)
n your machine tool has an automatic tool changer,
n you want to measure tools automatically with the TT 130 touch
probe (see the new Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual, Chapter 4),
n you want to rough-mill the contour with Cycle 22 (see “ROUGH-
OUT (Cycle 22)” on page 292)
n you want to work with automatic cutting data calculations.
Tool table: Standard tool data

Abbr. Input Dialog
T Number by which the tool is called in the program (e.g. 5, indexed: –
5.2)
NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program Tool name?
L Value for tool length compensation L Tool length?
R Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R?
R2 Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters (only for 3-D radius compensation Tool radius R2?
or graphical representation of a machining operation with
spherical or toroid cutters)
DL Delta value for tool radius R2 Tool length oversize?
DR Delta value for tool radius R Tool radius oversize?
DR2 Delta value for tool radius R2 Tool radius oversize R2?
LCUTS Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Tool length in the tool axis?
ANGLE Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge-cut in Maximum plunge angle?
Cycles 22 and 208
TL Set tool lock (TL: Tool Locked) Tool locked?

Yes = ENT / No = NO ENT
RT Number of a replacement tool (RT), if available (see also TIME2) Replacement tool?
TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes. This function can vary depending Maximum tool age?
on the individual machine tool. Your machine manual provides
more information on TIME1.

5.2 Tool Data
Abbr. Input Dialog
TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL: If the current Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL?
tool age exceeds this value, the TNC changes the tool during the
next TOOL CALL (see also CUR.TIME).
CUR.TIME Time in minutes the tool has been in use: The TNC automatically Current tool life?
counts the current tool age. A starting value can be entered for
used tools.
DOC Comment on tool (up to 16 characters) Tool description?
PLC Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC PLC status?
PLC VAL Value of this tool that is to be sent to the PLC PLC value?
Tool table: Tool data required for automatic tool measurement
For a description of the cycles governing automatic tool

measurement, see the new Touch Probe Cycles Manual,
Chapter 4.
Abbr. Input Dialog

CUT Number of teeth (20 teeth maximum) Number of teeth ?
LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection. If the Wear tolerance: length ?
entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L). Input
range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection. If the Wear tolerance: radius ?
entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L). Input
range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
DIRECT. Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Cutting direction (M3 = –) ?
TT:R-OFFS For tool length measurement: tool offset between stylus center Tool offset: radius ?
and tool center. Preset value: Tool radius R (NO ENT means R).
TT:L-OFFS Tool radius measurement: tool offset in addition to MP6530 Tool offset: length ?
between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool. Preset
value: 0
LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection. If Breakage tolerance: length ?
the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection. If Breakage tolerance: radius ?
the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

5.2 Tool Data
Tool table: Tool data for automatic speed/feed rate calculations.
Abbr. Input Dialog
TYPE Tool type (MILL=for milling, DRILL for drilling or boring, TAP for Tool type?
tapping): Press the SELECT TYPE soft key (3rd soft-key row): The
TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of
tool you want.
TMAT Tool material: Press the SELECT MATERIAL soft key (3rd soft-key Tool material ?
row): The TNC superimposes a window where you can select the
type of material you want.
CDT Cutting data table: Press the SELECT CDT soft key (3rd soft-key Name of cutting data table ?
row): The TNC superimposes a window where you can select a
cutting data table.
Tool table: Tool data for 3-D touch trigger probe (only when bit 1
is set in MP7411 = 1, see also the Touch Probe Cycles Manual)
Abbr. Input Dialog
CAL-OF1 During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the center Center misalignmt. in ref. axis?
misalignment in the reference axis of the 3-D probe, if a tool
number is indicated in the calibration menu
CAL-OF2 During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the center Center misalignment minor axis?
misalignment in the minor axis of the 3-D probe, if a tool number
is indicated in the calibration menu
CAL-ANG During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the spindle angle Spindle angle for calibration?
at which the 3-D probe was calibrated, if a tool number is
indicated in the calibration menu
Editing tool tables

The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is
designated as TOOL.T. You can only edit TOOL.T in one of the
machine operating modes. Other tool tables that are used for archiving
or test runs are given different file names with the extension .T .
To open the tool table TOOL.T:
U Select any machine operating mode.
U To select the tool table, press the TOOL TABLE soft
key.
U Set the EDIT soft key to ON.

5.2 Tool Data To open any other tool table:
U Call the file manager.
U Toselect the file type, press the SELECT TYPE soft

key.
U To show type .T files, press the SHOW .T soft key.
U Selecta file or enter a new file name. Conclude your
entry with the ENT key SELECT soft key.
When you have opened the tool table, you can edit the tool data by
moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow
keys or the soft keys. You can overwrite the stored values, or enter
new values at any position. The available editing functions are
illustrated in the table below.
If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen
page, the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the symbol
“>>” or “<<”.
Leaving the tool table

U Call the file manager and select a file of a different type, e.g. a part
program.
Editing functions for tool tables Soft key

Select end of table
Look for the tool name in the table
Show tool information in columns or show all

information on one tool on one screen page
Move to beginning of line
Move to end of line
Copy the highlighted field
Insert the copied field

5.2 Tool Data
Editing functions for tool tables Soft key
Add the entered number of lines (tools) to the
end of the table.
Insert a line for the indexed tool number after the

active line. The function is only active if you are
permitted to store various compensation data for
a tool (machine parameter 7262 not equal to 0).
The TNC inserts a copy of the tool data after the
last available index and increases the index by 1.
Application: e.g. stepped drill with more than one
length compensation value.
Delete current line (tool)
Display / Do not display pocket numbers
Display all tools / only those tools that are stored

in the pocket table
Additional notes on tool tables

Machine parameter 7266.x defines which data can be entered in the
tool table and in what sequence the data is displayed.
You can overwrite individual columns or lines of a tool

table with the contents of another file. Prerequisites:
n The target file must exist.
n The file to be copied must contain only the columns (or
lines) you want to replace.
To copy individual columns or lines, press the REPLACE
FIELDS soft key(see “Copying a single file” on page 54).

5.2 Tool Data
Pocket table for tool changer
For automatic tool changing you need the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH.
The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any file names. To
activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it in
the file management of a Program Run mode of operation (status M).
In order to be able to manage various magazines in a tool-pocket table
(indexing pocket number), machine parameters 7261.0 to 7261.3
must not be equal to 0.
Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode

U To select the tool table, press the TOOL TABLE soft
key.
U To select the pocket table, press the POCKET TABLE
soft key.
U Set the EDIT soft key to ON.
Selecting a pocket table in the Programming and Editing

Editing operating mode
U Call the file manager.
U Toselect the file type, press the SELECT TYPE soft

key.
U To show files of the type .TCH, press the soft key TCH
FILES (second soft-key row).
U Selecta file or enter a new file name. Conclude your
entry with the ENT key SELECT soft key.
Abbr. Input Dialog

P Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine –
T Tool number Tool number ?
ST Special tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine. If Special tool ?
your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket, these
additional pockets need to be locked in column L (status L).
F Fixed tool number. The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool Fixed pocket? Yes = ENT /
magazine No = NO ENT
L Locked pocket (see also column ST) Pocket locked Yes = ENT /
No = NO ENT
PLC Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC PLC status?
TNAME Display of the tool name from TOOL.T –
DOC Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL.T –

5.2 Tool Data
Editing functions for pocket tables Soft key
Select end of table
Reset pocket table
Reset tool number column T
Move to end of line
Calling tool data

A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following
data:
U Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key.
U Tool number: Enter the number or name of the tool.
The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block
or in the tool table. To call a tool by the tool name,
enter the name in quotation marks. The tool name
always refers to the entry in the active tool table
TOOL .T. If you wish to call a tool with other
compensation values, enter also the index you
defined in the tool table after the decimal point.
U Working spindle axis X/Y/Z: Enter the tool axis.
U Spindle speed S: Enter the spindle speed directly or
allow the TNC to calculate the spindle speed if you are
working with cutting data tables. Press the S
CALCULATE AUTOMAT. soft key. The TNC limits the
spindle speed to the maximum value set in MP 3515.

5.2 Tool Data U Feed rate F: Enter the feed rate directly or allow the
TNC to calculate the feed rate if you are working with
cutting data tables. Press the F CALCULATE
AUTOMAT. soft key. The TNC limits the feed rate to
the maximum feed rate of the longest axis (set in MP
1010). F is effective until you program a new feed rate
in a positioning block or a TOOL CALL block.
U Tool length oversize DL: Enter the delta value for
the tool length.
U Tool radius oversize DR: Enter the delta value for
the tool radius.
U Tool radius oversize 2: Enter the delta value for the
tool radius 2.
Example: Tool call

Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed 2500 rpm and
a feed rate of 350 mm/min. The tool length is to be programmed with
an oversize of 0.2 mm, the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0.05 mm,
and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm.
20 TOOL CALL 5.2 Z S2500 F350 DL+0.2 DR-1 DR2+0.05
The character D preceding L and R designates delta values.
Tool preselection with tool tables

If you are working with tool tables, use TOOL DEF to preselect the next
tool. Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter, or
type the tool name in quotation marks.
Tool change
The tool change function can vary depending on the
individual machine tool. The machine tool manual
provides further information.
Tool change position

A tool change position must be approachable without collision. With
the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92, you can enter machine-
referenced (rather than workpiece-referenced) coordinates for the tool
change position. If TOOL CALL 0 is programmed before the first tool
call, the TNC moves the tool spindle in the tool axis to a position that
is independent of the tool length.

5.2 Tool Data
Manual tool change
To change the tool manually, stop the spindle and move the tool to the
tool change position:
U Move to the tool change position under program control.
U Interrupt program run, see “Interrupting machining,” page 409
U Change the tool.
U Resume the program run, see “Resuming program run after an
interruption,” page 411
Automatic tool change

If your machine tool has automatic tool changing capability, the
program run is not interrupted. When the TNC reaches a TOOL CALL, it
replaces the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine.
Automatic tool change if the tool life expires: M101
The function of M101 can vary depending on the individual

machine tool. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME2 expires
during program run. To use this miscellaneous function, activate M101
at the beginning of the program. M101 is reset with M102.
The tool is not always changed immediately, but, depending on the
workload of the control, a few NC blocks later.
Prerequisites for standard NC blocks with radius compensation

R0, RR, RL
The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the
original tool. If the radii are not equal, the TNC displays an error
message and does not replace the tool.
Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface-normal vectors and 3-D

compensation
See “Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation,” page 114The radius of
the replacement tool can differ from the radius of the original tool. The
tool radius is not included in program blocks transmitted from CAD
systems. You can enter the delta value (DR) either in the tool table or
in the TOOL CALL block.
If DR is positive, the TNC displays an error message and does not
replace the tool. You can suppress this message with the M function
M107, and reactivate it with M108.

5.3 Tool Compensation
Introduction
The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the tool axis by the compensation
value for the tool length. In the working plane, it compensates the tool
radius.
If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC, the tool radius
compensation is effective only in the working plane. The TNC
accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the
rotary axes.
If a part program generated by a CAD system contains

surface-normal vectors, the TNC can perform three-
dimensional tool compensation, see “Three-Dimensional
Tool Compensation,” page 114.
Tool length compensation

Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a
tool is called and the tool axis moves. To cancel length compensation
call a tool with the length L=0.
If you cancel a positive length compensation with TOOL

CALL 0, the distance between tool and workpiece will be
reduced.
After TOOL CALL, the path of the tool in the tool axis, as
entered in the part program, is adjusted by the difference
between the length of the previous tool and that of the
new one.
For tool length compensation, the TNC takes the delta values from
both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account:
Compensation value = L + DLTOOL CALL + DLTAB where
L is the tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool

table.
DL TOOL CALL: is the oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block
(not taken into account by the position display).
DL TAB is the oversize for length DL in the tool table

Tool radius compensation
The NC block for programming a tool movement contains: RL
n RL or RR for radius compensation. R0
n R+ or R–, for radius compensation in single-axis movements.
n R0, if there is no radius compensation.
Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called
and is moved in the working plane with RL or RR. R
The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation if

you: R
n program a positioning block with R0

n depart the contour with the DEP function
n program a PGM CALL
n select a new program with PGM MGT
For tool radius compensation, the TNC takes the delta values from
both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account:
Compensation value = R + DRTOOL CALL + DRTAB where
R is the tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool
table.
DR TOOL CALL: is the oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block
(not taken into account by the position display).
DR TAB is the oversize for radius DR in the tool table
Contouring without radius compensation: R0

The tool center moves in the working plane to the programmed path
or coordinates.
Applications: Drilling and boring, pre-positioning. Z
Y
X
Y

5.3 Tool Compensation Tool movements with radius compensation: RR and RL
RR The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour
RL The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour
Y
The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the
radius. “Right” or “left” are to be understood as based on the
direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour See figures
at right.
Between two program blocks with different radius

compensations (RR and RL) you must program at least one RL
traversing block in the working plane without radius
compensation (that is, with R0).
Radius compensation does not take effect until the end of
the block in which it is first programmed.
X
You can also activate the radius compensation for
secondary axes in the working plane. Program the
secondary axes too in each following block, since
otherwise the TNC will execute the radius compensation
in the principal axis again.
Y
Whenever radius compensation is activated with RR/RL or
canceled with R0, the TNC positions the tool
perpendicular to the programmed starting or end position.
Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the first or
last contour point to prevent the possibility of damaging
the contour.
RR
Entering radius compensation
Program any desired path function, enter the coordinates of the target
point and confirm your entry with ENT.
X
To select tool movement to the left of the contour,

press the RL soft key, or
To select tool movement to the right of the contour,

press the RR soft key, or
To select tool movement without radius

compensation or to cancel radius compensation,
press the ENT key.
To terminate the block, press the END key.

Radius compensation: Machining corners
n Outside corners
If you program radius compensation, the TNC moves the tool
around outside corners either on a transitional arc or on a spline
(selectable via MP7680). If necessary, the TNC reduces the feed
rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress, for example at
very great changes of direction.
n Inside corners
The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside
RL
corners under radius compensation. From this point it then starts
the next contour element. This prevents damage to the workpiece.
The permissible tool radius, therefore, is limited by the geometry of
the programmed contour.
To prevent the tool from damaging the contour, be careful

not to program the starting or end position for machining
inside corners at a corner of the contour.
Machining corners without radius compensation

If you program the tool movement without radius compensation, you
can change the tool path and feed rate at workpiece corners with the
miscellaneous function M90, See “Smoothing corners: M90,” page
181.
RL RL

5.4 Three-Dimensional Tool
5.4 Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation
Compensation
Introduction
The TNC can carry out a three-dimensional tool compensation (3-D
compensation) for straight-line blocks. Apart from the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the straight-line end point, these blocks must also Z
contain the components NX, NY and NZ of the surface-normal vector
(see figure above right and explanation further down on this page). Y
If, in addition, you want to carry out a tool orientation or a three-
dimensional radius compensation, these blocks need also a X
normalized vector with the components TX, TY and TZ, which
determines the tool orientation (see figure at center right).
The straight-line end point, the components for the surface-normal
vector as well as those for the tool orientation must be calculated by PT
a CAD system. P NZ
NX
NY
Application possibilities
n Use of tools with dimensions that do not correspond with the
dimensions calculated by the CAD system (3-D compensation
without definition of the tool orientation)
n Face milling: compensation of the milling machine geometry in the
direction of the surface-normal vector (3-D compensation with and
without definition of the tool orientation). Cutting is usually with the
end face of the tool
n Peripheral milling: compensation of the mill radius perpendicular to
the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction (3-
D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation).
Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool

Definition of a normalized vector
A normalized vector is a mathematical quantity with a value of 1 and a
direction. The TNC requires up to two normalized vectors for LN
blocks, one to determine the direction of the surface-normal vector,
and another (optional) to determine the tool orientation direction. The
direction of a surface-normal vector is determined by the components
NX, NY and NZ. With an end mill and a radius mill, this direction is R R R
perpendicular from the workpiece surface to be machined to the tool
datum PT, and with a toroid cutter through PT‘ or PT (see figure at
upper right). The direction of the tool orientation is determined by the
components TX, TY and TZ.
The coordinates for the X, Y, Z positions and the surface-

normal components NX, NY, NZ, as well as TX, TY, TZ PT PT'
PT
must be in the same sequence in the NC block. R
2 2
PT R
Always indicate all of the coordinates and all of the
surface-normal vectors in an LN block, even if the values
have not changed from the previous block.
3-D compensation with surface-normal vectors is only
effective for coordinates in the main axes X, Y, Z.
If you insert a tool with oversize (positive delta value), the
TNC outputs an error message. You can suppress the
error message with the M function M107 (see
“Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface-normal vectors
and 3-D compensation,” page 109).
The TNC will not display an error message if an entered
tool oversize would cause damage to the contour.
Machine parameter 7680 defines whether the CAD
system has calculated the tool length compensation from PT
the center of sphere PT or the south pole of the sphere
PSP (see figure at right). PSP
Permissible tool forms

You can describe the permissible tool shapes in the tool table via tool
radius R and R2 (see figure at upper right):
n Tool radius R: Distance from the tool center to the tool
circumference.
n Tool radius 2: R2: Radius of the curvature between tool tip and tool
circumference.
The ratio of R to R2 determines the shape of the tool:
n R2 = 0: End mill
n R2 = R: ball-nose cutter.
n 0 < R2 < R: Toroid cutter
These data also specify the coordinates of the tool datum PT.

Using other tools: Delta values
If you want to use tools that have different dimensions than the ones
you originally programmed, you can enter the difference between the
tool lengths and radii as delta values in the tool table or TOOL CALL:
n Positive delta value DL, DR, DR2: The tool is larger than the original
tool (oversize). R
n Negative delta value DL, DR, DR2: The tool is smaller than the
original tool (undersize).
L
The TNC then compensates the tool position by the sum of the delta
values from the tool table and the tool call.
R2
3-D compensation without tool orientation DR2>0
DL>0
The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface-normal
vectors by the sum of the delta values (tool table and TOOL CALL).
Example: Block format with surface-normal vectors

1 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165
NX+0.2637581 NY+0.0078922 NZ-0.8764339 F1000 M3
LN: Straight line with 3-D compensation

X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point
NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector
F: Feed rate
M: Miscellaneous function
The feed rate F and miscellaneous function M can be entered and
changed in the Programming and Editing mode of operation.
The coordinates of the straight-line end point and the components of
the surface-normal vectors are to be defined by the CAD system.
Face Milling: 3-D compensation with and

without tool orientation
The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface-normal
vectors by the sum of the delta values (tool table and TOOL CALL).
If M128 (see “Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning
with tilted axes (TCPM*): M128,” page 194) is active, the TNC
maintains the tool perpendicular to the workpiece contour if no tool
orientation is programmed in the LN block.
If there is a tool orientation defined in the LN block, then the TNC will
position the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the
defined orientation.
The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary

axes on all machines. Refer to your machine manual.

Danger of collision
On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited
traverse, sometimes automatic positioning can require
the table to be rotated by 180°. In this case, make sure
that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or
the clamps.
Example: Block format with surface-normal vectors without tool

orientation
LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165
NX+0.2637581 NY+0.0078922 NZ–0.8764339 F1000 M128
Example: Block format with surface-normal vectors and tool

orientation
LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165
NX+0.2637581 NY+0.0078922 NZ0.8764339
TX+0.0078922 TY–0.8764339 TZ+0.2590319 F1000 M128

NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector
TX, TY, TZ: Components of the normalized vector for workpiece
orientation
F: Feed rate
The feed rate F and miscellaneous function M can be entered and
changed in the Programming and Editing mode of operation.
The coordinates of the straight-line end point and the components of
the surface-normal vectors are to be defined by the CAD system.

Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation
with workpiece orientation
The TNC displaces the tool perpendicular to the direction of
movement and perpendicular to the tool direction by the sum of the
delta values DR (tool table and TOOL CALL). Determine the
compensation direction with radius compensation RL/RR (see figure at
upper right, traverse direction Y+). For the TNC to be able to reach the
set tool orientation, you need to activate the function M128 (see
“Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted
axes (TCPM*): M128” on page 194). The TNC then positions the
rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined
orientation with the active compensation.
The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary

axes on all machines. Refer to your machine manual.
Danger of collision
On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited
traverse, sometimes automatic positioning can require
the table to be rotated by 180°. In this case, make sure
that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or
the clamps.
There are two ways to define the tool orientation:

n In an LN block with the components TX, TY and TZ
n In an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes
Example: Block format with tool orientation

1 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165
TX+0.0078922 TY0.8764339 TZ+0.2590319 F1000 M128

TX, TY, TZ: Components of the normalized vector for workpiece
orientation
F: Feed rate

Example: Block format with rotary axes
1 L X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165
B+12.357 C+5.896 F1000 M128
L Straight line
B, C: Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orientation
F: Feed rate

5.5 Working with Cutting Data
5.5 Working with Cutting Data Tables
Tables
Note
The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool

builder for the use of cutting data tables.
Some functions or additional functions described here
may not be provided on your machine tool. Refer to your
machine manual.
DATEI: TOOL.T MM
T R CUT. TYP TMAT CDT
Applications 0
1
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
2 +5 4 MILL HSS PRO1
3 ... ... ... ... ...
In cutting data tables containing various workpiece and cutting 4 ... ... ... ... ...
material combinations, the TNC can use the cutting speed VC and the
tooth feed fZ to calculate the spindle speed S and the feed rate F. This
DATEI: PRO1.CDT
calculation is only possible if you defined the workpiece material in the NR WMAT TMAT Vc1 F1
program and various tool-specific features in the tool table. 0 ... ... ... ...
1 ... ... ... ...
2 ST65 HSS 40 0.06
3 ... ... ... ...
Before you let the TNC automatically calculate the cutting 4 ... ... ... ...
data, the tool table from which the TNC is to take the tool-
specific data must be first be activated in the Test Run
mode (status S). 0 BEGIN PGM xxx.H MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 Z X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 WMAT "ST65"
4 ...
Editing function for cutting data tables Soft key 5 TOOL CALL 2 Z S1273 F305
Insert line
Z
Delete line
Y
Go to the beginning of the next line X
Sort the table
Edit the table format (2nd soft-key row)

Table for workpiece materials
Workpiece materials are defined in the table WMAT.TAB (see figure
at upper right). WMAT.TAB is stored in the TNC:\ directory and can
contain as many materials as you want. The name of the material type
can have a max. of 32 characters (including spaces). The TNC displays
the contents of the NAME column when you are defining the
workpiece material in the program (see the following section).
If you change the standard workpiece material table, you

must copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your
changes will be overwritten during a software update by
the HEIDENHAIN standard data. Define the path in the
TNC.SYS file with the code word WMAT= (see
“Configuration file TNC.SYS,” page 126).
To avoid losing data, save the WMAT.TAB file at regular
intervals.
Defining the workpiece material in the NC program

In the NC program select the workpiece material from the WMAT.TAB
table using the WMAT soft key:
U Program the workpiece material: In the Programming
and Editing operating mode, press the WMAT soft
key.
U The WMAT.TAB table is superimposed: Press the
SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL soft key and the
TNC displays in a second window the list of materials
that are stored in the WMAT.TAB table.
U Select your workpiece material by using the arrow
keys to move the highlight onto the material you wish
to select and confirming with the ENT key. The TNC
transfers the selected material to the WMAT block.
To scroll through the table more quickly, press and
hold SHIFT and then the arrow keys. The TNC then
moves page by page.
U To terminate the dialog, press the END key.
If you change the WMAT block in a program, the TNC

outputs a warning. Check whether the cutting data stored
in the TOOL CALL block are still valid.

Table for tool cutting materials
Tool cutting materials are defined in the TMAT.TAB table. TMAT.TAB
is stored in the TNC:\ directory and can contain as many material
names as you want (see figure at upper right). The name of the cutting
material type can have a max. of 16 characters (including spaces). The
TNC displays the NAME column when you are defining the tool cutting
material in the TOOL.T tool table.
If you change the standard tool cutting material table, you

must copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your
changes will be overwritten during a software update by
the HEIDENHAIN standard data. Define the path in the
TNC.SYS file with the code word TMAT= (see
“Configuration file TNC.SYS,” page 126).
To avoid losing data, save the TMAT.TAB file at regular
intervals.
Table for cutting data

Define the workpiece material/cutting material combinations with the
corresponding cutting data in a file table with the file name extension
.CDT; see figure at center right. You can freely configure that entries
in the cutting data table. Besides the obligatory columns NR, WMAT
and TMAT, the TNC can also manage up to four cutting speed (VC)/
feed rate (F)combinations.
The standard cutting data table
FRAES_2 .CDT is stored in the directory TNC:\. You can edit
FRAES_2.CDT, or add as many new cutting-data tables as you wish.
If you change the standard cutting data table, you must

copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your changes will
be overwritten during a software update by the
HEIDENHAIN standard data (see “Configuration file
TNC.SYS,” page 126).
All of the cutting data tables must be stored in the same
directory. If the directory is not the standard directory
TNC:\, then behind the code word PCDT= you must enter
the path in which your cutting data is stored.
To avoid losing data, save your cutting data tables at
regular intervals.

Creating a new cutting data table.
U To select the file manager, press the Taste PGM MGT key.
U Select the directory where the cutting data table is to be stored.
U Enter any file name with file name extension .CDT, and confirm with
ENT.
U On the right half of the screen, the TNC displays various table
formats (machine-dependent, see example in figure at right). These
tables differ from each other in the number of cutting speed/feed
rate combinations they allow. Use the arrow keys to move the
highlight onto the table format you wish to select and confirm with
ENT. The TNC generates a new, empty cutting data table.
Data required for the tool table

n Tool radius – under R (DR)
n Number of teeth (only with tools for milling) – under CUT
n Tool type – under TYPE
n The tool type influences the calculation of the feed rate:
Milling tool: F = S · fZ · z
All other tools: F = S · fU
S: Spindle speed
fZ: Feed per tooth
fU: Feed per revolution
z: Number of teeth
n Tool cutting material – under TMAT
n Name of the cutting data table for which this tool will be used –
under CDT
n In the tool table, select the tool type, tool cutting material and the
name of the cutting data table via soft key (see “Tool table: Tool data
for automatic speed/feed rate calculations.,” page 103).

Working with automatic speed/feed rate
calculation
1 If it has not already been entered, enter the type of workpiece
material in the file WMAT.TAB
2 If it has not already been entered, enter the type of cutting material
in the file TMAT.TAB.
3 If not already entered, enter all of the required tool-specific data in
the tool table:
n Tool radius
n Number of teeth
n Tool type
n Tool material
n The cutting data table for each tool
4 If not already entered, enter the cutting data in any cutting data
table (CDT file).
5 Test Run operating mode: Activate the tool table from which the
TNC is to take the tool-specific data (status S).
6 In the NC program, set the workpiece material by pressing the
WMAT soft key.
7 In the NC program, let the TOOL CALL block automatically
calculate spindle speed and feed rate via soft key.
Changing the table structure

Cutting data tables constitute so-called “freely-definable tables” for
the TNC. You can change the format of freely definable tables by using
the structure editor.
The TNC can process up to 200 characters per line and up

to 30 column.
If you insert an additional column into an existing table,
the TNC does not automatically shift the values that have
been entered.
Calling the structure editor

Press the EDIT FORMAT soft key (2nd soft-key level). The TNC opens
the editing window (see figure at right), in which the table structure is
shown “rotated by 90°.” In other words, a line in the editing window
defines a column in the associated table. The meanings of the
structure commands (header entries) are shown in the table at right.

Exiting the structure editor
Press the END key. The TNC changes data that was already in the
table into the new format. Elements that the TNC could not convert
into the new structure are indicated with a hash mark # (e.g., if you
have narrowed the column width).
Structure
Meaning
command
NR Column number
NAME Overview of columns
TYPE N: Numerical input

C: Alphanumeric input
WIDTH Width of column For type Nincluding algebraic

sign, comma, and decimalplaces
DEC Number of decimal places (max. 4, effective

only for type N)
ENGLISH Language-dependent dialogs (max. 32

to characters)
HUNGARIAN

Data transfer from cutting data tables
If you output a file type .TAB or .CDT via an external data interface, the
TNC also transfers the structural definition of the table. The structural
definition begins with the line #STRUCTBEGIN and ends with the line
#STRUCTEND. The meanings of the individual code words are shown
in the table “Structure Command” (see “Changing the table
structure,” page 124). Behind #STRUCTEND the TNC saves the actual
content of the table.
Configuration file TNC.SYS

You must use the configuration file TNC.SYS if your cutting data tables
are not stored in the standard directory TNC:\. In TNC.SYS you must
then define the paths in which you have stored your cutting data
tables.
The TNC.SYS file must be stored in the root directory

TNC:\.
Entries in TNC.SYS Meaning

WMAT= Path for workpiece material table
TMAT= Path for cutting material table
PCDT= Path for cutting data tables
Example of TNC.SYS
WMAT=TNC:\CUTTAB\WMAT_GB.TAB
TMAT=TNC:\CUTTAB\TMAT_GB.TAB
PCDT=TNC:\CUTTAB\

6
Programming:
Programming Contours
6.1 Tool movements
6.1 Tool movements
Path functions
A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements L
such as straight lines and circular arcs. With the path functions, you L CC
can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs.
L
FK Free Contour Programming C
If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions
given are not sufficient for creating a part program, you can program
the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming and
have the TNC calculate the missing data.
With FK programming, you also program tool movements for straight
lines and circular arcs.
Miscellaneous functions M
With the TNC’s miscellaneous functions you can affect
n Program run, e.g., a program interruption
Y
n Machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and coolant
supply on and off
80
n Contouring behavior of the tool
CC
60
Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
0
R4
40
If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program, you can
save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering
the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program
section repeat. If you wish to execute a specific program section only
under certain conditions, you also define this machining sequence as X
10 115
a subprogram. In addition, you can have a part program call a separate
program for execution.
Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is
described in Chapter 9.
Programming with Q parameters

Instead of programming numerical values in a part program, you enter
markers called Q parameters. You assign the values to the Q
parameters separately with the Q parameter functions. You can use
the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that
control program execution or describe a contour.
In addition, parametric programming enables you to measure with the
3-D touch probe during program run.
Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 10.
128 6 Programming: Programming Contours

6.2 Fundamentals of Path
6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions

Functions
Programming tool movements for workpiece
machining Z
You create a part program by programming the path functions for the
individual contour elements in sequence. You usually do this by
entering the coordinates if the end points of the contour elements
Y
given in the production drawing. The TNC calculates the actual path of
X
the tool from these coordinates, and from the tool data and radius
compensation.
The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously.
100
Movement parallel to the machine axes
The program block contains only one coordinate. The TNC thus moves
the tool parallel to the programmed axis.
Depending on the individual machine tool, the part program is
executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on
which the workpiece is clamped. Nevertheless, you always program
path contours as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains
stationary. Z
Example:
L X+100 Y
X
L Path function for “straight line” 50
X+100 Coordinate of the end point
The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position
X=100 (see figure at upper right). 70
Movement in the main planes
The program block contains two coordinates. The TNC thus moves the
tool in the programmed plane.
Example:
L X+70 Y+50
Z
The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the
position X=70, Y=50 (see figure at center right). Y
Three-dimensional movement X
The program block contains three coordinates. The TNC thus moves
the tool in space to the programmed position.
Example:
L X+80 Y+0 Z-10 80

-10

6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions Entering more than three coordinates
The TNC can control up to 5 axes simultaneously. Machining with 5
axes, for example, moves 3 linear and 2 rotary axes simultaneously.
Such programs are too complex to program at the machine, however,
and are usually created with a CAD system.
Example:
L X+20 Y+10 Z+2 A+15 C+6 R0 F100 M3
The TNC graphics cannot simulate movements in more

than three axes.
Circles and circular arcs

The TNC moves two axes simultaneously in a circular path relative to
the workpiece. You can define a circular movement by entering the
circle center CC.
Y Y
When you program a circle, the TNC assigns it to one of the main
planes. This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle
axis during a TOOL CALL:
Tool axis Main plane
CC
YCC
Z XY, also
UV, XV, UY
Y ZX, also
WU, ZU, WX X X
XCC
X YZ, also
VW, YW, VZ
You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main

plane by using the function for tilting the working plane
(see “WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19),” page 330) or Q
parameters (see “Principle and Overview,” page 356). Z
DR+
Direction of rotation DR for circular movements
Y DR– CC
When a circular path has no tangential transition to another CC
contour element, enter the direction of rotation DR: X
Clockwise direction of rotation: DR–
Counterclockwise direction of rotation: DR+

Radius compensation
The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to
the first contour element. You cannot begin radius compensation in a
circle block. It must be activated beforehand an a straight-line block
(see “Path Contours — Cartesian Coordinates,” page 139) or
approach block (APPR block, see “Contour Approach and Departure,”
page 133).
Pre-positioning
Before running a part program, always pre-position the tool to prevent
the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece.
Creating the program blocks with the path function keys

The gray path function keys initiate the plain language dialog. The TNC
asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the
program block into the part program.
Example — programming a straight line:
Initiate the programming dialog, e.g. for a straight

line.
Coordinates ?
Enter the coordinates of the straight-line end point.

10
Select the radius compensation (here, press the RL

soft key - the tool moves to the left of the
programmed contour).
Feed rate F=? / F MAX = ENT
Enter the feed rate (here, 100 mm/min), and confirm

100 your entry with ENT. For programming in inches,
enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 ipm.
Move at rapid traverse: press the FMAX soft key, or
Move at automatically calculated speed (cutting data

table): press the FAUTO soft key.

3 Enter a miscellaneous function (here, M3), and

terminate the dialog with ENT.
The part program now contains the following line:
L X+10 Y+5 RL F100 M3

6.3 Contour Approach and
6.3 Contour Approach and Departure

Departure
Overview: Types of paths for contour approach
and departure
The functions for contour approach APPR and departure DEP are
activated with the APPR/DEP key. You can then select the desired
path function with the corresponding soft key:
Function Soft key Approach Departure

Straight line with tangential connection
Straight line perpendicular to a contour

point
Circular arc with tangential connection

to the contour. Approach and departure
to an auxiliary point outside of the
contour on a tangentially connecting
line.
Approaching and departing a helix

The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in
a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour. You program
helix approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions.
Important positions for approach and departure

n Starting point PS
You program this position in the block before the APPR block. Ps lies
outside the contour and is approached without radius compensation
(R0).
n Auxiliary point PH RL
Some of the paths for approach and departure go through an
auxiliary point PH that the TNC calculates from your input in the
APPR or DEP block. RL
n First contour point PA and last contour point PE
You program the first contour point PA in the APPR block. The last PN R0
contour point PE can be programmed with any path function. If the
APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate, the TNC will first move PA RL PE RL
the tool to PH in the working plane, and then move it to the entered
depth in the tool axis. PH RL
PS R0

n End point PN
The position PN lies outside of the contour and results from your
input in the DEP block. If the DEP block also contains a Z axis
coordinate, the TNC will first move the tool to PH in the working
plane, and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis.
Abbreviation Meaning
APPR Approach
DEP Departure
L Line
C Circle
T Tangential (smooth connection)
N Normal (perpendicular)
You can enter the position data in absolute or incremental coordinates

and in Cartesian or polar coordinates.
The TNC does not check whether the programmed contour will be
damaged when moving from the actual position to the auxiliary point
PH. Use the test graphics to simulate approach and departure before
executing the part program.
When approaching the contour, allow sufficient distance between the
starting point PS and the first contour point PA to assure that the TNC
will reach the programmed feed rate for machining.
The TNC moves the tool from the actual position to the auxiliary point
PH at the feed rate that was last programmed.
Radius compensation
The tool radius compensation is programmed together with the first
contour point PA in the APPR block. The DEP blocks automatically
remove the tool radius compensation.
Contour approach without radius compensation: If you program the
APPR block with R0, the TNC will calculate the tool path for a tool
radius of 0 mm and a radius compensation RR! The radius
compensation is necessary to set the direction of contour approach
and departure in the APPR/DEP LN and APPR/DEP CT functions.

Approaching on a straight line with tangential
connection: APPR LT Y
35
The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point PS to an
auxiliary point PH. It then moves to the first contour point P A on a
R
straight line that connects tangentially to the contour. The auxiliary
R
15
PA
point PH is separated from the first contour point PA by the distance 20 RR
LEN.
U Use any path function to approach the starting point PS. 10
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR LT soft key: PH PS
U Coordinates of the first contour point PA RR R0
U LEN: Distance from the auxiliary point PH to the first

contour point PA X
20 35 40
U Radius compensation RR/RL for machining
Example NC blocks
7 L X+40 Y+10 RO FMAX M3 Approach PS without radius compensation
8 APPR LT X+20 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR, distance PH to PA:
LEN=15
9 L Y+35 Y+35 End point of the first contour element
10 L ... Next contour element
Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to

the first contour point: APPR LN Y
35
auxiliary point PH. It then to the first contour point PA on a straight line
R
perpendicular to the first contour element. The auxiliary point PH is
R
separated by the distance LEN plus the tool radius from the first PA
contour point PA. 20 RR
15
U Use any path function to approach the starting point PS.
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR LCT soft key: 10
PH PS
U Coordinates of the first contour point PA
RR R0
U Length: Distance to the auxiliary point PH. Always
enter LEN
as a positive value! X
10 20 40
Example NC blocks
8 APPR LN X+10 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100 PA with radius comp. RR
9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element

Approaching on a circular path with tangential
connection: APPR CT Y
35
auxiliary point PH. It then moves to the first contour point PA following
R
R
a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element. PA
20 RR
The arc from PH to PA is determined through the radius R and the CCA=
center angle CCA. The direction of rotation of the circular arc is 180°
automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element. 0
10 R1
U Use any path function to approach the starting point PS. PS
PH R0
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR CT soft key:
RR
U Coordinates of the first contour point PA
X
U Radius R of the circular arc 10 20 40
n If the tool should approach the workpiece in the
direction defined by the radius compensation: Enter
R as a positive value.
n If the tool should approach the workpiece opposite
to the radius compensation:
Enter R as a negative value.
U Center angle CCA of the arc
n CCA can be entered only as a positive value.

n Maximum input value 360°
Example NC blocks
8 APPR CT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 CCA180 R+10 RR F100 PA with radius comp. RR, radius R=10
Approaching on a circular arc with tangential

connection from a straight line to the contour: Y
35
APPR LCT R

R
auxiliary point PH. It then moves to the first contour point PA on a PA

20 RR
circular arc.
The arc is connected tangentially both to the line PS – PH as well as to
0
the first contour element. Once these lines are known, the radius then 10 R1
suffices to completely define the tool path. PS
R0
U Use any path function to approach the starting point PS. PH
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR LCT soft key: RR
X
U Coordinates of the first contour point PA 10 20 40
U Radius R of the circular arc. Enter R as a positive value.

Example NC blocks
8 APPR LCT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 R10 RR F100 PA with radius comp. RR, radius R=10
Departing on a straight line with tangential Y

connection: DEP LT 35
Y
RR
The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point PE to the
R
R
end point PN. The line lies in the extension of the last contour element.
PA
PN is separated from PE by the distance LEN. 20
20 RR PE
U Program the last contour element with the end point PE and radius
compensation. RR
12.5
0
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP LT soft key: 10 R1
PS
U LEN: Enter the distance from the last contour element PN R0
PE to the end point PN. PH R0
RR
X
X
10 20 40
Example NC blocks
23 L Y+20 RR F100 Last contour element: PE with radius compensation
24 DEP LT LEN12.5 F100 Depart contour by LEN=12.5 mm
25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program
Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the

Y
last contour point: DEP LN
RR
The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point PE to the PN
end point PN. The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last
contour point PE. PN is separated from PE by the distance LEN. plus the R0
20 PE
tool radius.
RR
U Program the last contour element with the end point PE and radius 20
compensation.
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP LN soft key:
U LEN: Enter the distance from the last contour element
PN.
Always enterLEN as a positive value! X
Example NC blocks
24 DEP LN LEN+20 F100 Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN=20 mm

Departure on a circular path with tangential
connection: DEP CT Y
The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point PE to the RR
end point PN. The arc is tangentially connected to the last contour PN
element.
R0
PE
compensation.
R8
180° RR
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP CT soft key:
U Center angle CCA of the arc
U Radius R of the circular arc

n If the tool should depart the workpiece in the
direction of the radius compensation (i.e. to the X
right with RR or to the left with RL): Enter R as a
positive value.
n If the tool should depart the workpiece on the
direction opposite to the radius compensation:
Enter R as a negative value.
Example NC blocks
24 DEP CT CCA 180 R+8 F100 Center angle=180°,
arc radius=8 mm
Departing on a circular arc

tangentially connecting the contour
and a straight line: DEP LCT Y
RR
The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point PS to an
auxiliary point PH. It then moves on a straight line to the end point PN.
The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and
to the line from PH to PN. Once these lines are known, the radius R 20
PE
R8
then suffices to completely define the tool path.
RR
compensation. PH
PN
U Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP LCT soft key: R0
R0
U Enter the coordinates of the end point PN.
U Radius R of the circular arc. Enter R as a positive value. X

10
Example NC blocks
24 DEP LCT X+10 Y+12 R+8 F100 Coordinates PN, arc radius=8 mm

6.4 Path Contours — Cartesian
6.4 Path Contours — Cartesian Coordinates

Coordinates
Overview of path functions
Function Path function key Tool movement Required input
Line L Straight line Coordinates of the end points of
the straight line
Chamfer: CHF Chamfer between two straight Chamfer side length

lines
Circle Center CC No tool movement Coordinates of the circle center or

pole
Circle C Circular arc around a circle center Coordinates of the arc end point,
CC to an arc end point direction of rotation
Circular Arc CR Circular arc with a certain radius Coordinates of the arc end point,
arc radius, direction of rotation
Circular Arc CT Circular arc with tangential Coordinates of the arc end point
connection to the preceding and
subsequent contour elements
Corner Rounding RND Circular arc with tangential Rounding-off radius R

connection to the preceding and
subsequent contour elements
FK Free Contour Straight line or circular path with see “Path Contours—FK Free
Programming any connection to the preceding Contour Programming,” page
contour element 158

Straight line L
The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to
the straight-line end point. The starting point is the end point of the Y
preceding block.
40
U Coordinates of the end point of the straight line
15
Further entries, if necessary:
U Radius compensation RL/RR/R0
10
U Feed rate F
U Miscellaneous function M
Example NC blocks
7 L X+10 Y+40 RL F200 M3 20 X
10
8 L IX+20 IY-15
9 L X+60 IY-10 60
Actual position capture

You can also generate a straight-line block (L block) by using the
ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE key:
U In the Manual Operation mode, move the tool to the position you
wish to capture.
U Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing.
U Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block.
U Press the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE key: The
TNC generates an L block with the actual position
coordinates.
In the MOD function, you define the number of axes that

the TNC saves in an L block (see “MOD functions,” page
418).

Inserting a chamfer CHF between two straight
lines
The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two
straight lines.
n The blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same Y
working plane.
n The radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must
be the same.
n An inside chamfer must be large enough to accommodate the
current tool.
U Chamfer side length: Length of the chamfer

U Feed rate F (only effective in CHF block)
Example NC blocks X
7 L X+0 Y+30 RL F300 M3
8 L X+40 IY+5
9 CHF 12 F250
Y 12
10 L IX+5 Y+0
You cannot start a contour with a CHF block.
12
5
30
A chamfer is possible only in the working plane.
The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part
of the contour.
A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only
in that block. After the CHF block, the previous feed rate
becomes effective again. 5 X
40

Corner rounding RND
The RND function is used for rounding off corners.
The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the Y
preceding and subsequent contour elements.
The rounding arc must be large enough to accommodate the tool.
40
U Rounding-off radius: Enter the radius
Further entries, if necessary: R5 25
U Feed rate F (only effective in RND block)
Example NC blocks
5
5 L X+10 Y+40 RL F300 M3
6 L X+40 Y+25 X
10 40
7 RND R5 F100
8 L X+10 Y+5
In the preceding and subsequent contour elements, both

coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc. If
you machine the contour without tool-radius
compensation, you must program both coordinates in the
working plane.
The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not
part of the contour.
A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only
in that block. After the RND block, the previous feed rate
becomes effective again.
You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour
approach if you do not want to use an APPR function.

Circle center CC
You can define a circle center CC for circles that are programmed with
the C key (circular path C). This is done in the following ways:
n Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center, or
Z
n Using the circle center defined in an earlier block, or Y
n Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE
key. CC
U Coordinates CC: Enter the circle center coordinates,

or YCC X
If you want to use the last programmed position, do
not enter any coordinates.
Example NC blocks
X CC
5 CC X+25 Y+25
or
10 L X+25 Y+25
11 CC
The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration.
Duration of effect
The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center
is programmed. You can also define a circle center for the secondary
axes U, V and W.
Entering the circle center CC incrementally.

If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates, you have
programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool.
The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle

center: The tool does not move to this position.
The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates.

Circular path C around circle center CC
Before programming a circular path C, you must first enter the circle
center CC. The last programmed tool position before the C block is
used as the circle starting point. Y
U Move the tool to the circle starting point.
U Coordinates of the circle center
U Coordinates of the arc end point

E S
U Direction of rotation DR CC
U Feed rate F
X
Example NC blocks
5 CC X+25 Y+25
6 L X+45 Y+25 RR F200 M3
7 C X+45 Y+25 DR+
Y
Full circle
Enter the same point you used as the starting point for the end point
in a C block.
The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the CC
circle. 25
Input tolerance: up to 0.016 mm (selected with MP7431).
X
25 45

Circular path CR with defined radius
The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R.
U Coordinates of the arc end point Y
U Radius R
Note: The algebraic sign determines the size of the
arc!
U Direction of rotation DR R
Note: The algebraic sign determines whether the arc E1=S2
is concave or convex! S1=E2
CC
U Feed rate F
X
Full circle
For a full circle, program two CR blocks in succession:
The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second.
The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first.
Y
Central angle CCA and arc radius R
The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four
arcs of the same radius: 1
Smaller arc: CCA<180°
Enter the radius with a positive sign R>0 DR+
40
ZW
Larger arc: CCA>180° R R
Enter the radius with a negative sign R<0
2
The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving
outward (convex) or curving inward (concave):
Convex: Direction of rotation DR– (with radius compensation RL)
X
Concave: Direction of rotation DR+ (with radius compensation RL) 40 70
Example NC blocks
3
10 L X+40 Y+40 RL F200 M3 Y
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR- (arc 1)
ZW
or
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR+ (arc 2) R R

40
or
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR- (arc 3) 4

DR+
or
X
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR+ (arc 4) 40 70

The distance from the starting and end points of the arc
diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc.
The maximum radius is 99.9999 m.
You can also enter rotary axes A, B and C.
Circular path CT with tangential connection

The tool moves on an arc that starts at a tangent with the previously
programmed contour element. Y
A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when
there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two
contours—the transition is smooth.
The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be
programmed immediately before the CT block. This requires at least
two positioning blocks. 30
25
U Coordinates of the arc end point 20

U Feed rate F
X
25 45
Example NC blocks
7 L X+0 Y+25 RL F300 M3
8 L X+25 Y+30
9 CT X+45 Y+20
10 L Y+0
A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the

coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element
preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc.

Example: Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates
Y 10
31
95
4
10
20
1
5
21
20 X
5 95
0 BEGIN PGM LINEAR MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+10 Define tool in the program
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S4000 Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S
5 L Z+250 R0 F MAX Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX
6 L X-10 Y-10 R0 F MAX Pre-position the tool
7 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3 Move to working depth at feed rate F = 1000 mm/min
8 APPR LT X+5 Y+5 LEN10 RL F300 Approach the contour at point 1 on a straight line with
tangential connection
9 L Y+95 Move to point 2
10 L X+95 Point 3: first straight line for corner 3
11 CHF 10 Program chamfer with length 10 mm
12 L Y+5 Point 4: 2nd straight line for corner 3, 1st straight line for corner 4
13 CHF 20 Program chamfer with length 20 mm
14 L X+5 Move to last contour point 1, second straight line for corner 4
15 DEP LT LEN10 F1000 Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection
16 L Z+250 R0 F MAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
17 END PGM LINEAR MM

Example: Circular movements with Cartesian coordinates
95
R3
85
R10
0
40
X
5 30 40 70 95
0 BEGIN PGM CIRCULAR MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+10 Define tool in the program
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S4000 Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S
5 L Z+250 R0 F MAX Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX
6 L X-10 Y-10 R0 F MAX Pre-position the tool
7 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3 Move to working depth at feed rate F = 1000 mm/min
8 APPR LCT X+5 Y+5 R5 RL F300 Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with
9 L X+5 Y+85 Point 2: first straight line for corner 2
10 RND R10 F150 Insert radius with R = 10 mm, feed rate: 150 mm/min
11 L X+30 Y+85 Move to point 3: Starting point of the arc with CR
12 CR X+70 Y+95 R+30 DR- Move to point 4: End point of the arc with CR, radius 30 mm
13 L X+95 Move to point 5
14 L X+95 Y+40 Move to point 6
15 CT X+40 Y+5 Move to point 7: End point of the arc, radius with tangential
connection to point 6, TNC automatically calculates the radius

16 L X+5 Move to last contour point 1
17 DEP LCT X-20 Y-20 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
19 END PGM CIRCULAR MM

Example: Full circle with Cartesian coordinates
CC
50
X
50
0 BEGIN PGM C-CC MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Define the workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+12.5 Define the tool
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3150 Tool call
5 CC X+50 Y+50 Define the circle center
6 L Z+250 R0 F MAX Retract the tool
7 L X-40 Y+50 R0 F MAX Pre-position the tool
8 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3 Move to working depth
9 APPR LCT X+0 Y+50 R5 RL F300 Approach the starting point of the circle on a circular arc with
connection
10 C X+0 DR- Move to the circle end point (= circle starting point)
11 DEP LCT X-40 Y+50 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential
connection
13 END PGM CCC MM

6.5 Path Contours — Polar
6.5 Path Contours — Polar Coordinates

Coordinates
Overview
With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle
PA and its distance PR relative to a previously defined pole CC (see
“Fundamentals,” page 158).
Polar coordinates are useful with:
n Positions on circular arcs
n Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees, e.g. bolt hole circles
Overview of path functions with polar coordinates

Function Path function key Tool movement Required input
Line LP + Straight line Polar radius, polar angle of the
straight-line end point
Circular arc CP + Circular path around circle center/ Polar angle of the arc end point,
pole CC to arc end point direction of rotation
Circular arc CTP + Circular arc with tangential Polar radius, polar angle of the arc
connection to the preceding end point
contour element
Helical interpolation + Combination of a circular and a Polar radius, polar angle of the arc
linear movement end point, coordinate of the end
point in the tool axis
Polar coordinate origin: Pole CC

You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before
blocks containing polar coordinates. Enter the pole in Cartesian Y
coordinates as a circle center in a CC block.
U Coordinates CC: Enter Cartesian coordinates for the
pole, or
If you want to use the last programmed position, do
not enter any coordinates. Before programming polar CC
coordinates, define the pole CC. You can only define YCC
the pole CC in Cartesian coordinates. The pole CC
remains in effect until you define a new pole CC.
Example NC blocks
12 CC X+45 Y+25 X
XCC

Straight line LP
The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the
straight-line end point. The starting point is the end point of the
preceding block. Y
U Polar coordinates radius PR: Enter the distance
from the pole CC to the straight-line end point.
30
U Polar coordinates angle PA: Angular position of the 60°
straight-line end point between –360° and +360°. 60°
The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis: 25

CC
n Angle from angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise: PA>0
n Angle from angle reference axis to PR is clockwise: PA<0
Example NC blocks X
45
12 CC X+45 Y+25
13 LP PR+30 PA+0 RR F300 M3
14 LP PA+60
15 LP IPA+60
16 LP PA+180
Circular path CP around pole CC

The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc. It is defined
by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC. The last
programmed tool position before the CP block is the starting point of Y
the arc.
U Polar-coordinates angle PA: Angular position of the
arc end point between –5400° and +5400°
0
U Direction of rotation DR R2
25
Example NC blocks CC
18 CC X+25 Y+25
19 LP PR+20 PA+0 RR F250 M3
20 CP PA+180 DR+ X
25
For incremental coordinates, enter the same sign for DR

and PA.

Circular path CTP with tangential connection
The tool moves on a circular path, starting tangentially from a
preceding contour element. Y
U Polarcoordinates radius PR: Distance from the arc
end point to the pole CC
U Polar coordinates angle PA: Angular position of the 120°
arc end point
5
0
R2
R3
Example NC blocks 30°
35
12 CC X+40 Y+35 CC
13 L X+0 Y+35 RL F250 M3

14 LP PR+25 PA+120
15 CTP PR+30 PA+30 X
16 L Y+0 40
The pole CC is not the center of the contour arc!
Helical interpolation
A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a
liner movement perpendicular to this plane.
Z
A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates.
Y CC
Application
n Large-diameter internal and external threads
X
n Lubrication grooves
Calculating the helix

To program a helix, you must enter the total angle through which the
tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions, and the total
height of the helix.
For calculating a helix that is to be cut in a upward direction, you need
the following data:
Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions + thread overrun at
the start and end of the thread
Total height h Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n
Incremental total Number of revolutions times 360° + angle for
angle IPA beginning of thread + angle for thread
overrun
Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times (thread revolutions + thread
overrun at start of thread)

6.5 Path Contours — Polar Coordinates Shape of the helix
The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is
determined by the work direction, direction of rotation and radius
compensation.
Work Radius
Internal thread Direction
direction comp.
Right-handed Z+ DR+ RL
Left-handed Z+ DR– RR
Right-handed Z– DR RR
Left-handed Z– DR+ RL
External thread
Right-handed Z+ DR+ RR
Left-handed Z+ DR– RL
Right-handed Z– DR RL
Left-handed Z– DR+ RR
Programming a helix
Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of

rotation DR and the incremental total angle IPA. The tool
may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the Z
contour.
Y
For the total angle IPA, you can enter a value from CC
R3
–5400° to +5400°. If the thread has more than 15
5
270°
revolutions, program the helix in a program section repeat
(see “Program Section Repeats,” page 344) 25 X
U Polar coordinates angle: Enter the total angle of 40

tool traverse along the helix in incremental
dimensions. After entering the angle, identify the
tool axis with an axis selection key.
U Coordinate: Enter the coordinate for the height of the
helix in incremental dimensions.
U Direction of rotation DR
Clockwise helix: DR–
Counterclockwise helix: DR+
U Radius compensation RL/RR/R0
Enter the radius compensation according to the table
above.
Example NC blocks: Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions
12 CC X+40 Y+25
13 L Z+0 F100 M3
14 LP PR+3 PA+270 RL F50
15 CP IPA-1800 IZ+5 DR-

Example: Linear movement with polar coordinates
Y
100
31
21
60°
5
R4
CC
50 1 41
61 51
5
X
5 50 100
0 BEGIN PGM LINEARPO MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
5 CC X+50 Y+50 Define the datum for polar coordinates
7 LP PR+60 PA+180 R0 F MAX Pre-position the tool
9 APPR PLCT PR+45 PA+180 R5 RL F250 Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with
10 LP PA+120 Move to point 2
13 LP PA-60 Move to point 5
14 LP PA-120 Move to point 6
16 DEP PLCT PR+60 PA+180 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
18 END PGM LINEARPO MM

Example: Helix
Y
100
M64 x 1,5
CC
50
X
50 100
0 BEGIN PGM HELIX MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+5 Define the tool
6 L X+50 Y+50 R0 F MAX Pre-position the tool
7 CC Transfer the last programmed position as the pole
8 L Z-12.75 R0 F1000 M3 Move to working depth
9 APPR PCT PR+32 PA-180 CCA180 R+2 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential
RL F100 connection
10 CP IPA+3240 IZ+13.5 DR+ F200 Helical interpolation
11 DEP CT CCA180 R+2 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
13 END PGM HELIX MM
To cut a thread with more than 16 revolutions
...
8 L Z-12.75 R0 F1000
9 APPR PCT PR+32 PA-180 CCA180 R+2 RL F100

10 LBL 1 Identify beginning of program section repeat
11 CP IPA+360 IZ+1.5 DR+ F200 Enter the thread pitch as an incremental IZ dimension
12 CALL LBL 1 REP 24 Program the number of repeats (thread revolutions)
13 DEP CT CCA180 R+2

6.6 Path Contours—FK Free
6.6 Path Contours—FK Free Contour Programming
Contour Programming
Fundamentals
Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often contain
unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray
path function keys. You may, for example, have only the following data
on a specific contour element:
n Known coordinates on the contour element or in its proximity
n Coordinate data that are referenced to another contour element
n Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour
You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free
contour programming function. The TNC derives the contour from the
known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the
interactive programming graphics. The figure to the upper right shows
a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most
convenient programming method.
If you wish to run FK programs on old TNC models, use the conversion
function (see “Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN
conversational format,” page 47).
The following prerequisites for FK programming

FK programming
The FK free contour programming feature can only be
used for programming contour elements that lie in the
working plane. The working plane is defined in the first
BLK FORM block of the part program.
You must enter all available data for every contour
element. Even the data that does not change must be
entered in every block - otherwise it will not be recognized.
Q parameters are permissible in all FK elements, except in
elements with relative references (e.g. RX or RAN), or in
elements that are referenced to other NC blocks.
If both FK blocks and conventional blocks are entered in a
program, the FK contour must be fully defined before you
can return to conventional programming.
The TNC needs a fixed point from which it can calculate
the contour elements. Use the gray path function keys to
program a position that contains both coordinates of the
working plane immediately before programming the FK
contour. Do not enter any Q parameters in this block.
If the first block of an FK contour is an FCT or FLT block,
you must program at least two NC block with the gray path
function keys to fully define the direction of contour
approach.
Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL
label.

Graphics during FK programming
If you wish to use graphic support during FK

programming, select the PGM + GRAPHICS screen layout
(see “Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run,
Single Block,” page 8).
Incomplete coordinate data often are not sufficient to fully define a

workpiece contour. In this case, the TNC indicates the possible
solutions in the FK graphic. You can then select the contour that
matches the drawing. The FK graphic displays the elements of the
workpiece contour in different colors:
White The contour element is fully defined.
Green The entered data describe a limited number of possible
solutions: select the correct one.
Red The entered data are not sufficient to determine the
contour element: enter further data.
If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and

the contour element is displayed in green, select the correct contour
element as follows:
U Pressthe SHOW soft key repeatedly until the correct
contour element is displayed.
U Ifthe displayed contour element matches the
drawing, select the contour element with FSELECT.
Select the green contour elements as soon as possible with the
FSELECT soft key. In this way, you can reduce the ambiguity of
subsequent elements.
If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element, press the
EDIT soft key to continue the FK dialog.
The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK
graphics.
NC blocks from a program that you called with PGM CALL
are displayed in another color.

Initiating the FK dialog
If you press the gray FK button, the TNC displays the soft keys you can
use to initiate an FK dialog: See the following table. Press the FK
button a second time to deselect the soft keys.
If you initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys, the TNC shows
additional soft-key rows that you can use for entering known
coordinates, directional data and data regarding the course of the
contour.
Contour element Soft key

Straight line without tangential connection
Circular arc without tangential connection
Pole for FK programming
Free programming of straight lines

Straight line without tangential connection
U To display the soft keys for free contour programming,
press the FK key.
U To initiate the dialog for free programming of straight
lines, press the FL soft key. The TNC displays
additional soft keys.
U Enter all known data in the block by using these soft
keys. The FK graphic displays the programmed
contour element in red until sufficient data are
entered. If the entered data describe several
solutions, the graphic will display the contour element
in green (see “Graphics during FK programming,”
page 159).

If the straight line connects tangentially to another contour element,
initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key:
press the FK key.
U To initiate the dialog, press the FLT soft key.
U Enter all known data in the block by using the soft
keys.

Free programming of circular arcs
Circular arc without tangential connection
press the FK key.
U To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular
arcs, press the FC soft key. The TNC displays soft
keys with which you can enter direct data on the
circular arc or data on the circle center.
U Enter all known data in the block by using these soft
keys. The FK graphic displays the programmed
contour element in red until sufficient data are
entered. If the entered data describe several
solutions, the graphic will display the contour element
in green (see “Graphics during FK programming,”
page 159).

If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element,
initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key:
press the FK key.
U To initiate the dialog, press the FCT soft key.
U Enter all known data in the block by using the soft
keys.

Input possibilities
End point coordinates
Y
Known data Soft keys
Cartesian coordinates X and Y
R15
30
30°
Polar coordinates referenced to FPOL
20
Example NC blocks
7 FPOL X+20 Y+30
8 FL IX+10 Y+20 RR F100
9 FCT PR+15 IPA+30 DR+ R15 10 X
20
Direction and length of contour elements

Length of a straight line Y
Gradient angle of a straight line
AN
Chord length LEN of the arc LEN
Gradient angle AN of the entry tangent
Angle of the leading axis to the arc end point

X
Example NC blocks
27 FLT X+25 LEN 12.5 AN+35 RL F200
28 FC DR+ R6 LEN 10 A-45
29 FCT DR- R15 LEN 15

Circle center CC, radius and direction of rotation in the FC/FCT
block
The TNC calculates a circle center for free-programmed arcs from the
data you enter. This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK
program block.
If you wish to define the circle center in polar coordinates you must
use FPOL, not CC, to define the pole. FPOL is entered in Cartesian
coordinates and remains in effect until the TNC encounters a block in
which another FPOL is defined.
A circle center that was calculated or programmed

conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or circle
center for the new FK contour: If you enter conventional
polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you
have defined previously, then you must enter the pole
again in a CC block after the FK contour.

Circle center in Cartesian coordinates
Circle center in polar coordinates
Rotational direction of the arc
Radius of the arc
Example NC blocks
10 FC CCX+20 CCY+15 DR+ R15

11 FPOL X+20 Y+15
12 FL AN+40
13 FC DR+ R15 CCPR+35 CCPA+40

6.6 Path Contours—FK Free Contour Programming Closed contours
You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the
CLSD soft key. This reduces the number of possible solutions for the
last contour element.
Y
Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and
last blocks of an FK section.
Beginning of contour: CLSD+ CLSD+

End of contour: CLSD-
Example NC blocks
12 L X+5 Y+35 RL F500 M3

13 FC DR- R15 CLSD CCX+20 CCY+35 CLSD–
... X
17 FCT DR- R+15 CLSD-
Auxiliary points
You can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located on
the contour or in its proximity for both free-programmed straight lines
and free-programmed circular arcs. Y
Auxiliary points on a contour
The auxiliary points are located on a straight line or on the extension 60.071 R10
of a straight line, or on a circular arc. 53
Known data Soft keys 70°
X coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1 or P2 of a straight line
Y coordinate of an auxiliary
point X
P1 or P2 of a straight line 50
42.929
X coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1, P2 or P3 of a circular arc
Y coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1, P2 or P3 of a circular arc
Auxiliary points near a contour

X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near
a straight line
Distance auxiliary point/straight line

X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary pointnear
a circular arc
Distance auxiliary point/circular arc
Example NC blocks
13 FC DR- R10 P1X+42.929 P1Y+60.071

14 FLT AN-70 PDX+50 PDY+53 D10
Relative data
Data whose values are based on another contour element are called
relative data. The soft keys and program words for entries begin with
the letter “R” for Relative. The figure at right shows the entries that Y
should be programmed as relative data.
20
The coordinates and angles for relative data are always
programmed in incremental dimensions. You must also
enter the block number of the contour element on which 20 45°
the data are based. 90°
R20
20°
The block number of the contour element on which the 10
relative data are based can only be located up to 64 FPOL
positioning blocks before the block in which you program
the reference. 35 X
10
If you delete a block on which relative data are based, the
TNC will display an error message. Change the program
first before you delete the block.
Data relative to block N: End point coordinates

Cartesian coordinates
relative to block N
Polar coordinates relative to block N
Example NC blocks
12 FPOL X+10 Y+10
13 FL PR+20 PA+20
14 FL AN+45
15 FCT IX+20 DR– R20 CCA+90 RX 13
16 FL IPR+35 PA+0 RPR 13

6.6 Path Contours—FK Free Contour Programming Data relative to block N: Direction and distance of the contour
element
Known data Soft key

Angle between a straight line and another element Y
or between the entry tangent of the arc and another
element
Straight line parallel to another contour element

220°
20
Distance from a straight line to a parallel contour 95°
12.5
element
105° 15°
Example NC blocks
12.5 X
17 FL LEN 20 AN+15
18 FL AN+105 LEN 12.5 20
19 FL PAR 17 DP 12.5
20 FSELECT 2
21 FL LEN 20 IAN+95
22 FL IAN+220 RAN 18
Data relative to block N: Circle center CC
Known data Soft key

Cartesian coordinates of the circle Y
center relative to block N
20
Polar coordinates of the circle center 35
relative to block N
15
R10
Example NC blocks
CC
12 FL X+10 Y+10 RL
10
13 FL ...
14 FL X+18 Y+35
15 FL ... X
10 18
16 FL ...
17 FC DR– R10 CCA+0 ICCX+20 ICCY-15 RCCX12 RCCY14

Converting FK programs
You can convert an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational
format by using the file manager:
U Call the file manager and display the files.
U Move the highlight to the file you wish to convert.
U Press the soft keys MORE FUNCTIONS and then
CONVERT FK->H. The TNC converts all
FK blocks into HEIDENHAIN dialog blocks.
Circle centers that you have entered before programming

an FK contour may need to be redefined in the converted
program. We recommend that you test the converted part
program before executing it.
FK programs with Q parameters cannot be converted.

Example: FK programming 1
Y
100
R1
5
75
R18
30
R15
20
X
20 50 75 100
0 BEGIN PGM FK1 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
8 APPR CT X+2 Y+30 CCA90 R+5 RL F250 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
9 FC DR- R18 CLSD+ CCX+20 CCY+30 FK contour:
10 FLT Program all known data for each contour element
11 FCT DR- R15 CCX+50 CCY+75
12 FLT
14 FLT
15 FCT DR- R18 CLSD- CCX+20 CCY+30
16 DEP CT CCA90 R+5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
17 L X-30 Y+0 R0 F MAX
19 END PGM FK1 MM

10
Y 10
R20
55
R30 60°
30
X
30
0 BEGIN PGM FK2 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
6 L X+30 Y+30 R0 F MAX Pre-position the tool
7 L Z+5 R0 F MAX M3 Pre-position the tool in the tool axis
8 L Z-5 R0 F100 Move to working depth

9 APPR LCT X+0 Y+30 R5 RR F350 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
10 FPOL X+30 Y+30 FK contour:
11 FC DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30 Program all known data for each contour element
12 FL AN+60 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
13 FSELECT 3
14 FC DR- R20 CCPR+55 CCPA+60
15 FSELECT 2
16 FL AN-120 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
17 FSELECT 3
18 FC X+0 DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
19 FSELECT 2
20 DEP LCT X+30 Y+30 R5 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
22 END PGM FK2 MM

Y
R1
0
50
R36
R24
R1,5
R5
30
R
R6 6 R5 X
-10
0
R4
R6
-25
R5
0
12 44 65 110
0 BEGIN PGM FK3 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X-45 Y-45 Z-20 Define the workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+120 Y+70 Z+0

8 APPR CT X-40 Y+0 CCA90 R+5 RL F250 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
9 FC DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0 FK contour:
10 FLT Program all known data for each contour element
12 FLT
13 FCT DR+ R6 CCX+0 CCY+0
14 FCT DR+ R24
15 FCT DR+ R6 CCX+12 CCY+0
16 FSELECT 2
17 FCT DR- R1.5
18 FCT DR- R36 CCX+44 CCY-10
19 FSELECT 2
20 FCT DR+ R5
21 FLT X+110 Y+15 AN+0
22 FL AN-90
23 FL X+65 AN+180 PAR21 DP30
24 RND R5
25 FL X+65 Y-25 AN-90
26 FC DR+ R50 CCX+65 CCY-75
27 FCT DR- R65
28 FSELECT
29 FCT Y+0 DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0
30 FSELECT 4
31 DEP CT CCA90 R+5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
32 L X-70 R0 F MAX
34 END PGM FK3 MM

6.7 Path Contours — Spline
6.7 Path Contours — Spline Interpolation

Interpolation
Function
If you wish to machine contours that are described in a CAD system
as splines, you can transfer them directly to the TNC and execute
them. The TNC features a spline interpolator for executing third-
degree polynomials in two, three, four, or five axes.
You cannot edit spline blocks in the TNC. Exception: Feed

rate F and miscellaneous function M in the spline block.
Example: Block format for two axes

7 L X+33.909 Z+75.107 F MAX Spline starting point
8 SPL X+39.824 Z+77.425 Spline end point
K3X+0.0983 K2X-0.441 K1X-5.5724 Spline parameters for X axis
K3Z+0.0015 K2Z-0.9549 K1Z+3.0875 F10000 Spline parameters for Z axis
9 SPL X+44.862 Z+73.44 Spline end point
K3Z-0.0576 K2Z-0.7822 K1Z+4.8246 Spline parameters for Z axis
10 ...
The TNC executes the spline block according to the following third-
degree polynomials:
X(t) = K3X · t3 + K2X · t2+ K1X · t + X
Z(t) = K3Z · t3 + K2Z · t2 + K1Z · t + Z
whereby the variable t runs from 1 to 0. The incrementation of t
depends on the feed rate and the length of the spline.
Example: Block format for five axes

7 L X+33.909 Y-25.838 Z+75.107 A+17 B-10.103 F MAX Spline starting point
8 SPL X+39.824 Y-28.378 Z+77.425 A+17.32 B-12.75 Spline end point
K3Y-0.0422 K2Y+0.1893 K1Y+2.3929 Spline parameters for Y axis
K3Z+0.0015 K2Z-0.9549 K1Z+3.0875 Spline parameters for Z axis
K3A+0.1283 K2A-0.141 K1A-0.5724 Spline parameters for A axis
K3B+0.0083 K2B-0.413 E+2 K1B-1.5724 E+1 F10000 Spline parameters for B axis with
exponential notation
9 ...

6.7 Path Contours — Spline Interpolation The TNC executes the spline block according to the following third-
degree polynomials:
X(t) = K3X · t3 + K2X · t2 + K1X · t + X
Y(t) = K3Y · t3 + K2Y · t2 + K1Y · t + Y
Z(t) = K3Z · t3 + K2Z · t2 + K1Z · t + Z
A(t) = K3A · t3 + K2A · t2 + K1A · t + A
B(t) = K3B · t3 + K2B · t2 + K1B · t + B
whereby the variable t runs from 1 to 0. The incrementation of t
depends on the feed rate and the length of the spline.
For every end-point coordinate in the spline block, the

spline parameters K3 to K1 must be programmed. The
end-point coordinates can be programmed any sequence
within the spline block.
The TNC always expects the spline parameters K for each
axis in the sequence K3, K2, K1.
Besides the principal axes X, Y and Z the TNC can also
process the secondary axes U, V and W, and the rotary
axes A, B and C. The respective corresponding axis must
then be programmed in the spline parameter K
(e.g. K3A+0.0953 K2A-0.441 K1A+0.5724).
If the absolute value of a spline parameter K becomes
greater than 9.999 999 99, then the post processor must
output K in exponential notation (e.g. K3X+1.2750 E2).
The TNC can execute a program with spline blocks even
when the working plane is tilted.
Ensure that the transitions from one spline to the next are
as tangential as possible (directional changes of less than
0.1°). The TNC otherwise performs an exact stop if the
filter functions are disabled, resulting in a jolting of the
machine tool. If the filter functions are active, the TNC
decreases the feed rate accordingly at these positions.
Input ranges
n Spline end point: –99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
n Spline parameter K: –9.999 999 99 to +9.999 999 99
n Exponent for spline parameter K: -255 to +255 (whole number).

7
Programming:
Miscellaneous functions
7.1 Entering Miscellaneous
7.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP
Functions M and STOP
Fundamentals
With the TNC’s miscellaneous functions – also called M functions –
you can affect:
n Program run, e.g., a program interruption
n Machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and coolant
supply on and off
n Contouring behavior of the tool
The machine tool builder may add some M functions that

are not described in this User's Manual. Refer to your
machine manual.
You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block.

The TNC then displays the following dialog question:
You usually enter only the number of the M function in the
programming dialog. Some M functions can be programmed with
additional parameters. In this case, the dialog is continued for the
parameter input.
In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of
operation, the M functions are entered with the M soft key.
Please note that some F functions become effective at the start of a
positioning block, and others at the end.
M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called.
Unless the M function is only effective blockwise, it is canceled in a
subsequent block or at the end of the program. Some M functions are
effective only in the block in which they are called.
Entering an M function in a STOP block

If you program a STOP block, the program run or test run is interrupted
at the block, for example for tool inspection. You can also enter an M
function in a STOP block:
U To program an interruption of program run,
press the STOP key
U Enter miscellaneous function M
Example NC blocks
87 STOP M6
176 7 Programming: Miscellaneous functions

7.2 Miscellaneous Functions for
7.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant
Program Run Control, Spindle
and Coolant
Overview
M Effect Effective at block - start end

M00 Stop program run n
Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF
M01 Optional program STOP n
M02 Stop program run n

Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF
Go to block 1
Clear the status display (dependent
on machine parameter 7300)
M03 Spindle ON clockwise n
M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise n
M05 Spindle STOP n
M06 Tool change n

Spindle STOP
Program run stop (dependent on
machine parameter 7440)
M08 Coolant ON n
M09 Coolant OFF n
M13 Spindle ON clockwise n

Coolant ON

Coolant ON
M30 Same as M02 n

7.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data
Coordinate Data
Programming machine-referenced coordinates:
M91/M92
Scale reference point
On the scale, a reference mark indicates the position of the scale
reference point.
XMP
Machine datum
The machine datum is required for the following tasks: X (Z,Y)
n Defining the limits of traverse (software limit switches)
n Moving to machine-referenced positions (such as tool change
positions)
n Setting the workpiece datum
The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the
machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine
parameter.
Standard behavior
The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum, see “Datum
Setting(Without a 3-D Touch Probe),” page 22.
Behavior with M91 – Machine datum

If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to
the machine datum, end the block with M91.
The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the
machine datum. Switch the display of coordinates in the status display
to REF, see “Status Displays,” page 9.
Behavior with M92 – Additional machine datum
In addition to the machine datum, the machine tool builder

can also define an additional machine-based position as a
reference point.
For each axis, the machine tool builder defines the
distance between the machine datum and this additional
machine datum. Refer to the machine manual for more
information.
If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the

additional machine datum, end the block with M92.
Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are

programmed with M91 or M92. The tool length, however,
is not compensated.

Effect
M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are
programmed.
Z
M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block.

Z
Workpiece datum Y
If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine Y
datum, you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes. X
If datum setting is inhibited for all axes, the TNC no longer displays the
soft key DATUM SET in the Manual Operation mode.
X
The figure at right shows coordinate systems with the machine datum
and workpiece datum. M
M91/M92 in the test run mode

In order to be able to graphically simulate M91/M92 movements, you
need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece
blank referenced to the set datum see “Showing the workpiece in the
working space,” page 435.

Activating the most recently entered datum:
M104
Function
When processing pallet tables, the TNC may overwrite your most
recently entered datum with values from the pallet table. With M104
you can reactivate the original datum.
Effect
M104 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
M104 becomes effective at the end of block.
Moving to position in an non-tilted coordinate

system with a tilted working plane: M130
Standard behavior with a tilted working plane
The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted
coordinate system.
Behavior with M130

The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted
coordinate system.
The TNC then positions the (tilted) tool to the programmed
coordinates of the untilted system.
Following positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried out

in a tilted coordinate system. This can lead to problems in
fixed cycles with absolute pre-positioning.
Effect
M130 functions blockwise in straight-line blocks without tool radius
compensation.

7.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior

Contouring Behavior
Smoothing corners: M90
Standard behavior
The TNC stops the tool briefly in positioning blocks without tool radius Y
compensation. This is called an accurate stop.
In program blocks with radius compensation (RR/RL), the TNC
automatically inserts a transition arc at outside corners.
Behavior with M90

The tool moves at corners with constant speed: This provides a
smoother, more continuous surface. Machining time is also reduced.
See figure at center right.
Example application: Surface consisting of a series of straight line
segments.
Effect X
M90 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed with
M90.
M90 becomes effective at the start of block. Operation with servo lag
must be active.
Y

Insert rounding arc between straight lines: M112
Compatibility Y
For reasons of compatibility, the M112 function is still available.
However, to define the tolerance for fast contour milling,
HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of the TOLERANCE cycle, see
“Special Cycles,” page 337.
Machining small contour steps: M97

Standard behavior
The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners. If the contour steps
are very small, however, the tool would damage the contour.
X
In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error
message “Tool radius too large.”
Behavior with M97 Y

The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements—as at
inside corners—and moves the tool over this point.
Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner. S S
13 16
Effect 17
14 15
A corner machined with M97 will not be completely
finished. You may wish to rework the contour with a
smaller tool.
X
Example NC blocks
5 TOOL DEF L ... R+20 Large tool radius
...
13 L X ... Y ... R.. F .. M97 Move to contour point 13
14 L IY–0.5 .... R .. F.. Machine small contour step 13 to 14
15 L IX+100 ... Move to contour point 15
16 L IY+0.5 ... R .. F.. M97 Machine small contour step 15 to 16
17 L X .. Y ... Move to contour point 17

Machining open contours: M98
Standard behavior
The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside
corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points. Y
If the contour is open at the corners, however, this will result in
incomplete machining.
Behavior with M98

With the miscellaneous function M98, the TNC temporarily suspends
radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely
machined.
Effect S S
M98 takes effect at the end of block. X
Example NC blocks
Move to the contour points 10, 11 and 12 in succession:
10 L X ... Y... RL F
11 L X... IY... M98 Y
12 L IX+ ...
Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103

10
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate, regardless
of the direction of traverse.
Behavior with M103

The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative 11 12
X
direction of the tool axis. The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is
calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor
F%:
FZMAX = FPROG x F%
Programming M103
If you enter M103 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
by asking you the factor F.
Effect
M103 becomes effective at the start of block.
To cancel M103, program M103 once again without a factor.

7.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Example NC blocks
The feed rate for plunging is to be 20% of the feed rate in the plane.
... Actual contouring feed rate (mm/min):

17 L X+20 Y+20 RL F500 M103 F20 500
18 L Y+50 500
19 L IZ–2.5 100
20 L IY+5 IZ–5 141
21 L IX+50 500
22 L Z+5 500
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution:

M136
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate F in mm/min.
Behavior with M136

With M136, the TNC does not move the tool in mm/min, but rather at
the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution. If
you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override, the TNC
changes the feed rate accordingly.
With the introduction of software 280 476-xx, the unit of

measure used for miscellaneous function M136 has
changed from µm/rev. to mm/rev. If you are using
programs in which you have programmed M136 and
which you have written on a previous TNC software, you
need to reduce the value entered for the feed rate by the
factor 1000.
Effect
You can cancel M136 by programming M137.

Feed rate at circular arcs: M109/M110/M111
Standard behavior
The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool
center.
Behavior at circular arcs with M109

The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside
contours such that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains
constant.
Behavior at circular arcs with M110

The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside
contours only. At outside contours, the feed rate is not adjusted.
M110 is also effective for the inside machining of circular

arcs using contour cycles. If you define M109 or M110
before calling a machining cycle, the adjusted feed rate is
also effective for circular arcs within machining cycles. The
initial state is restored after finishing or aborting a
machining cycle.
Effect
M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block.
To cancel M109 and M110, enter M111.
Calculating the radius-compensated path in

advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120
Standard behavior
If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined
with radius compensation, the TNC interrupts program run and
generates an error message. M97(see “Machining small contour
Y
steps: M97” on page 182): Although you can use M97 to inhibit the
error message, this will result in dwell marks and will also move the
corner.
If the programmed contour contains undercut features, the tool may
damage the contour.
Behavior with M120

The TNC checks radius-compensated paths for contour undercuts and
tool path intersections, and calculates the tool path in advance from
the current block. Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the
tool, are not machined (dark areas in figure at right). You can also use
M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data
X
created on an external programming system. This means that
deviations from the theoretical tool radius can be compensated.
Use LA (Look Ahead) behind M120 to define the number of blocks
(maximum: 99) that you want the TNC to calculate in advance. Note
that the larger the number of blocks you choose, the higher the block
processing time will be.

7.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Input
for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be
calculated in advance.
Effect
M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius
compensation RL or RR. M120 is then effective from this block until
n radius compensation is canceled, or
n M120 LA0 is programmed, or
n M120 is programmed without LA.
n another program is called with PGM CALL
Limitations
n After an external or internal stop, you can only re-enter the contour
with the function RESTORE POS. AT N.
n If you are using the path functions RND and CHF, the blocks before
and after RND or CHF must contain only coordinates of the working
plane.
n If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path, you must
use the function APPR LCT. The block with APPR LCT must contain
only coordinates of the working plane.
n If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path, use the
function DEP LCT. The block with DEP LCT must contain only
coordinates of the working plane.

Superimposing handwheel positioning during
program run: M118
Standard behavior
In the program run modes, the TNC moves the tool as defined in the
part program.
Behavior with M118

M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run.
You can use this miscellaneous function by entering axis-specific
values X, Y and Z (in mm) behind M118.
Input
for this block by asking you the axis-specific values. The coordinates
are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII
keyboard.
Effect
Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again
without X, Y and Z.
Example NC blocks
You wish to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move
the tool in the working plane X/Y by ±1 mm of the programmed value:
L X+0 Y+38.5 RL F125 M118 X1 Y1
M118 is always effective in the original coordinate system,

even if the working plane is tilted!
M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation!
If M118 is active, the MANUAL OPERATION function is
not available after a program interruption!

Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis
direction: M140
Standard behavior
In the program run modes, the TNC moves the tool as defined in the
part program.
Behavior with M104

With M140 MB (move back) you can enter a path in the direction of
the tool axis for departure from the contour.
Input
and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour. Enter
the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the
contour, or press the MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse
range.
Effect
M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M140 becomes effective at the start of the block.
Example NC blocks
Block 250: Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour.
Block 251: Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range.
250 L X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M140 MB 50

251 L X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M140 MB MAX
M140 is also effective if the tilted-working-plane function,

M114 or M128 is active. On machines with tilting heads,
the TNC then moves the tool in the tilted coordinate
system.
With the FN18: SYSREAD ID230 NR6 function you can find
the distance from the current position to the limit of the
traverse range in the positive tool axis.
With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in positive direction.

Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141
Standard behavior
When the stylus is deflected, the TNC outputs an error message as
soon as you attempt to move a machine axis.
Behavior with M141

The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is
deflected. This function is required if you wish to write your own
measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to
retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been
deflected.
If you use M141, make sure that you retract the touch
probe in the correct direction.
M141 functions only for movements with straight-line
blocks.
Effect

Delete modal program information: M142
Standard behavior
The TNC resets modal program information in the following situations:
n Select a new program
n Execute a miscellaneous function M02, M30, or an END PGM block
(depending on machine parameter 7300)
n Defining cycles for basic behavior with a new value
Behavior with M142

All modal program information except for basic rotation, 3-D rotation
and Q parameters are reset.
Effect
Delete basic rotation: M143

Standard behavior
The basic rotation remains in effect until it is reset or is overwritten
with a new value.
Behavior with M143

The TNC erases a programmed basic rotation from the NC program.
Effect

7.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Rotary Axes
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C:
M116
Standard behavior
The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in
degrees per minute. The contouring feed rate therefore depends on
the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis.
The larger this distance becomes, the greater the contouring feed
rate.
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes with M116
The machine geometry must be entered in machine

parameters 7510 ff. by the machine tool builder.
The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in mm/
min. With this miscellaneous function, the TNC calculates the feed
rate for each block at the start of the individual block. With a rotary
axis, the feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even
if the tool moves toward the center of the rotary axis.
Effect
M116 is effective in the working plane.
With M117 you can reset M116. M116 is also canceled at the end of
the program.
Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126

Standard behavior
The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose
display has been reduced to values less than 360° is dependent on
machine parameter 7682. In machine parameter 7682 is set whether
the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual
position, or whether the TNC should always (even without M126)
choose the shortest path traverse to the programmed position.
Examples:
Actual position Nominal position Traverse

350° 10° –340°
10° 340° +330°

7.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Behavior with M126
With M126, the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse
if you reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360°.
Examples:
Actual position Nominal position Traverse
350° 10° +20°
10° 340° –30°
Effect
To cancel M126, enter M127. At the end of program, M126 is
automatically canceled.
Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less

than 360°: M94
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the
programmed angular value.
Example:
Current angular value: 538°

Programmed angular value: 180°
Actual distance of traverse: –358°
Behavior with M94

At the start of block, the TNC first reduces the current angular value to
a value less than 360° and then moves the tool to the programmed
value. If several rotary axes are active, M94 will reduce the display of
all rotary axes. As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94.
The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis.
Example NC blocks
To reduce display of all active rotary axes:
L M94
To reduce display of the C axis only
L M94 C
To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in
the C axis to the programmed value:
L C+180 FMAX M94
Effect

Automatic compensation of machine geometry
when working with tilted axes: M114
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If B
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset B
Z dx
in the linear axes must be calculated by a postprocessor and traversed dz
in a positioning block. As the machine geometry is also relevant, the
NC program must be calculated separately for each machine tool.
Behavior with M114

If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program, the
TNC automatically compensates the tool offset by a 3-D length
compensation. As the geometry of the individual machine tools is set
in machine parameters, the TNC also compensates machine-specific dB
offsets automatically. Programs only need to be calculated by the
postprocessor once, even if they are being run on different machines
with TNC control. X
If your machine tool does not have controlled tilted axes (head tilted
manually or positioned by the PLC), you can enter the current valid
swivel head position after M114 (e.g. M114 B+45, Q parameters
permitted).
The radius compensation must be calculated by a CAD system or by a
postprocessor. A programmed radius compensation RL/RR will result
in an error message.
If the tool length compensation is calculated by the TNC, the
programmed feed rate refers to the point of the tool. Otherwise it
refers to the tool datum.
If you machine tool is equipped with a swivel head that can

be tilted under program control, you can interrupt program
run and change the position of the tilted axis, for example
with the handwheel.
With the RESTORE POS. AT N function, you can then
resume program run at the block at which the part
program was interrupted. If M114 is active, the TNC
automatically calculates the new position of the tilted axis.
If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position
of the tilted axis during program run, use M118 in
conjunction with M128.
Effect
M114 becomes effective at the start of block, M115 at the end of
block. M114 is not effective when tool radius compensation is active.
To cancel M114, enter M115. At the end of program, M114 is
automatically canceled.


Maintaining the position of the tool tip when
positioning with tilted axes (TCPM*): M128
Standard behavior B
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset
in the linear axes must be calculated and traversed in a positioning Z
block (see figure with M114).
X
Behavior with M128
If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program, the Z
position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same.
If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position of the tilted
axis during program run, use M118 in conjunction with M128.
Handwheel positioning in a machine-based coordinate is possible
when M128 is active.
For tilted axes with Hirth coupling: Do not change the X

position of the tilted axis after retracting the tool.
Otherwise you might damage the contour.
After M128 you can program another feed rate, at which the TNC will
carry out the compensation movements in the linear axes. If you
program no feed rate here, or if you program a larger feed rate than is
defined in machine parameters 7471, the feed rate from machine
parameter 7471 will be effective.
Reset M128 before positioning with M91 or M92 and

before a TOOL CALL.
To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical
cutters with M128.
The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the
tool tip.
The TNC does not adjust the active radius compensation
in accordance with the new position of the tilted axis. The
result is an error which is dependent on the angular
position of the rotary axis.
If M128 is active, the TNC shows in the status display the
following symbol: .
M128 on tilting tables

If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active, the TNC
rotates the coordinate system accordingly. If for example you rotate
the C axis by 90° (through a positioning command or datum shift) and
then program a movement in the X axis, the TNC executes the
movement in the machine axis Y.
The TNC also transforms the defined datum, which has been shifted
by the movement of the rotary table.

M128 with 3-D tool compensation
If you carry out a 3-D tool compensation with active M128 and active
radius compensation RL/RR, the TNC will automatically position the
rotary axes for certain machine geometrical configurations (Peripheral
milling, see “Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation,” page 114).
Effect
block. M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and
remains active even after a change of mode. The feed rate for the
compensation movement will be effective until you program a new
feed rate or until you reset M128 with M129.
To cancel M128, enter M129. The TNC also resets M128 if you select
a new program in a program run operating mode.

Example NC blocks
Moving at 1000 mm/min to compensate a radius.
L X+0 Y+38.5 RL F125 M128 F1000

Exact stop at corners with nontangential
transitions: M134
Standard behavior
The standard behavior of the TNC during positioning with rotary axes
is to insert a transitional element in nontangential contour transitions.
The contour of the transitional element depends on the acceleration,
the rate of acceleration (jerk), and the defined tolerance for contour
deviation.
With the machine parameters 7440 you can change the

standard behavior of the TNC so that M134 becomes
active automatically whenever a program is selected, see
“General User Parameters,” page 448.
Behavior with M134

The moves the tool during positioning with rotary axes so as to
perform an exact stop at nontangential contour transitions.
Effect
block.
You can reset M134 with M135. The TNC also resets M134 if you
select a new program in a program run operating mode.
Selecting tilting axes: M138

Standard behavior
The TNC performs M114 and M128, and tilts the working plane, only
in those axes for which the machine tool builder has set the
appropriate machine parameters.
Behavior with M138

The TNC performs the above functions only in those tilting axes that
you have defined using M138.
Effect
You can reset M138 by reprogramming it without entering any axes.
Example NC blocks
Perform the above-mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C:
L Z+100 R0 FMAX M138 C

Compensating the machine’s kinematic
configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions
at end of block: M144
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset
in the linear axes must be calculated, and traversed in a positioning
block.
Behavior with M144

The TNC calculates into the position value any changes in the
machine’s kinematic configuration which result, for example, from
adding a spindle attachment. If the position of a controlled tilted axis
changes, the position of the tool tip to the workpiece is also changed.
The resulting offset is calculated in the position display.
Positioning blocks with M91/M92 are permitted if M144 is

active.
The position display in the operating modes FULL
SEQUENCE and SINGLE BLOCK does not change until the
tilting axes have reached their final position.
Effect
M144 becomes effective at the start of the block. M144 does not
function in connection with M114, M128 or a tilted working plane.
You can cancel M144 by programming M145.

parameters 7502 and following by the machine tool
builder. The machine tool builder determines the behavior
in the automatic and manual operating modes. Refer to
your machine manual.

7.6 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines
Laser Cutting Machines
Principle
The TNC can control the cutting efficiency of a laser by transferring
voltage values through the S-analog output. You can influence laser
efficiency during program run through the miscellaneous functions
M200 to M204.
Entering miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines

If you enter an M function for laser cutting machines in a positioning
block, the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the required
parameters for the programmed function.
All miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines become
effective at the start of the block.
Output the programmed voltage directly: M200

Behavior with M200
The TNC outputs the value programmed after M200 as the voltage V.
Input range: 0 to 9 999 V
Effect
M200 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
Output voltage as a function of distance: M201

Behavior with M201
M201 outputs the voltage in dependence on the distance to be
covered. The TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly
to the value programmed for V.
Input range: 0 to 9 999 V
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

7.6 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines
Output voltage as a function of speed: M202
Behavior with M202
The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of speed. In the machine
parameters, the machine tool builder defines up to three characteristic
curves FNR in which specific feed rates are assigned to specific
voltages. Use miscellaneous function M202 to select the curve FNR
from which the TNC is to determine the output voltage.
Input range: 1 to 3
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
Output voltage as a function of time (time-

dependent ramp): M203
Behavior with M203
The TNC outputs the voltage V as a function of the time TIME. The
TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly to the value
programmed for V within the time programmed for TIME.
Input range
Voltage V: 0 to 9.999 Volt
TIME: 0 to 1.999 seconds
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
Output voltage as a function of time (time-

dependent pulse): M204
Behavior with M204
The TNC outputs a programmed voltage as a pulse with a
programmed duration TIME.
Input range
Voltage V: 0 to 9.999 Volt
TIME: 0 to 1.999 seconds
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

8
Programming: Cycles
8.1 Working with Cycles
Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working

steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles. Coordinate
transformations and other special cycles are also provided as standard
cycles (see table on next page).
Fixed cycles with numbers 200 and over use Q parameters as transfer
parameters. Parameters with specific functions that are required in
several cycles always have the same number: For example, Q200 is
always assigned the set-up clearance, Q202 the plunging depth, etc.
Defining a cycle using soft keys

U The soft-key row shows the available groups of cycles
U Press
the soft key for the desired group of cycles, for
example DRILLING for the drilling cycles
U Select the desired cycle, for example THREAD
MILLING. The TNC initiates the programming dialog
and asks all required input values. At the same time a
graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the
right screen window. The parameter that is asked for
in the dialog prompt is highlighted
U Enterall parameters asked by the TNC and conclude
each entry with the ENT key
U TheTNC terminates the dialog when all required data
have been entered
Defining a cycle using the GOTO function

U The soft-key row shows the available groups of cycles
U The TNC shows an overview of cycles in a window.

Use the arrow keys to select the desired cycle, or
enter the cycle number. Confirm with ENT. The TNC
then initiates the cycle dialog as described above.
202 8 Programming: Cycles

Example NC blocks
7 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
Group of cycles Soft key

Cycles for pecking, reaming, boring, counterboring,
tapping and thread cutting
Cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots
Cycles for producing hole patterns, such as circular or

linear patterns
SL (Subcontour List) cycles which allow the contour-

parallel machining of relatively complex contours
consisting of several overlapping subcontours,
cylinder surface interpolation
Cycles for face milling of flat or twisted surfaces
Coordinate transformation cycles which enable datum

shift, rotation mirror image, enlarging and reducing for
various contours
Special cycles such as dwell time, program call,

oriented spindle stop and tolerance
If you use indirect parameter assignments in fixed cycles

with numbers greater than 200 (e.g. Q210 = Q1), any
change in the assigned parameter (e.g. Q1) will have no
effect after the cycle definition. Define the cycle
parameter (e.g. Q210) directly in such cases.
In order to be able to run cycles 1 to 17 on older TNC
models, you must program an additional negative sign
before the values for safety clearance and plunging depth.

Calling a cycle
Prerequisites
The following data must always be programmed before a
cycle call
n BLK FORM for graphic display (needed only for test
graphics)
n Tool call
n Direction of spindle rotation (M functions M3/M4)
n Cycle definition (CYCL DEF).
For some cycles, additional prerequisites must be
observed. They are described with the individual cycle.
The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they

are defined in the part program. These cycles cannot and must not be
called:
n Cycle 220 for circular and Cycle 221 for linear hole patterns
n SL Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY
n SL Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA
n Cycle 32 TOLERANCE
n Coordinate transformation cycles
n Cycle 9 DWELL TIME
All other cycles are called as described below:
1 If the TNC is to execute the cycle once after the last programmed
block, program the cycle call with the miscellaneous function M99
or with CYCL CALL:
U To program the cycle call, press the CYCL CALL key.
U Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to enter a cycle call.
U Enter a miscellaneous function M or press END to end
the dialog.
2 If the TNC is to execute the cycle automatically after every
positioning block, program the cycle call with M89 (depending on
machine parameter 7440).
3 If the TNC is to execute the cycle at every position that is defined
in a point table, use the function CYCL CALL. (see “Point Tables”
on page 206)
To cancel M89, enter
n M99 or
n CYCL CALL or
n CYCL DEF

Working with the secondary axes U/V/W
The TNC performs infeed movements in the axis that was defined in
the TOOL CALL block as the spindle axis. It performs movements in
the working plane only in the principle axes X, Y or Z. Exceptions:
n You program secondary axes for the side lengths in cycles 3 SLOT
MILLING and 4 POCKET MILLING.
n You program secondary axes in the contour geometry subprogram
of an SL cycle.

8.2 Point Tables
8.2 Point Tables
Function
You should create a point table whenever you want to run a cycle, or
several cycles in sequence, on an irregular point pattern.
If you are using drilling cycles, the coordinates of the working plane in
the point table represent the hole centers. If you are using milling
cycles, the coordinates of the working plane in the point table
represent the starting-point coordinates of the respective cycle (e.g.
center-point coordinates of a circular pocket). Coordinates in the
spindle axis correspond to the coordinate of the workpiece surface.
Creating a point table

Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation.
To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key.
File name ?
Enter the name and file type of the point table and
NEW.PNT confirm your entry with the ENT key.
To select the unit of measure, press the MM or INCH

soft key. The TNC changes to the program blocks
window and displays an empty point table.
With the soft key INSERT LINE, insert new lines and
enter the coordinates of the desired machining
position.
Repeat the process until all desired coordinates have been entered.
With the soft keys X OFF/ON, Y OFF/ON, Z OFF/ON

(second soft-key row), you can specify which coordinates
you want to enter in the point table.

8.2 Point Tables
Selecting a point table in the program.
In the Programming and Editing mode of operation, select the
program for which you want to activate the point table:
Press the PGM CALL key to call the function for

selecting the point table.
Press the POINT TABLE soft key.
Enter the name of the point table and confirm your entry with the ENT
key. If the point table is not stored in the same directory as the NC
program, you must enter the complete path.
Example NC block
7 SEL PATTERN “TNC:\DIRKT5\MUST35.PNT”

8.2 Point Tables
Calling a cycle in connection with point tables
With CYCL CALL PAT the TNC runs the points table that you
last defined (even if you have defined the point table in a
program that was nested with CALL PGM.
The TNC uses the coordinate in the spindle axis as the
clearance height, where the tool is located during cycle
call. A clearance height or 2nd setup clearance that is
defined separately in a cycle must not be greater than the
clearance height defined in the global pattern..
If you want the TNC to call the last defined fixed cycle at the points
defined in a point table, then program the cycle call with CYCLE CALL
PAT:
U To program the cycle call, press the CYCL CALL key.
U Press the CYCL CALL PAT soft key to call a point
table.
U Enter the feed rate at which the TNC is to move from
point to point (if you make no entry the TNC will move
at the last programmed feed rate, FMAX not valid).
U If
required, enter miscellaneous function M, then
confirm with the END key.
The TNC moves the tool back to the safe height over each successive
starting point (safe height = the spindle axis coordinate for cycle call).
To use this procedure also for the cycles number 200 and greater, you
must define the 2nd set-up clearance (Q204) as 0.
If you want to move at reduced feed rate when pre-positioning in the
spindle axis, use the miscellaneous function M103 (see “Feed rate
factor for plunging movements: M103” on page 183).
Effect of the point tables with Cycles 1 to 5, 17 and 18

The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of
the hole centers. The coordinate of the spindle axis defines the upper
surface of the workpiece, so the TNC can pre-position automatically
(first in the working plane, then in the spindle axis).
Effect of the point tables with SL cycles and Cycle 12

The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift.
Effect of the point tables with Cycles 200 to 208 and 262 to 267
The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of
the hole centers. If you want to use the coordinate defined in the point
table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate, you must
define the workpiece surface coordinate (Q203) as 0.
Effect of the point tables with Cycles 210 to 215

The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift. If you want
to use the points defined in the point table as starting-point
coordinates, you must define the starting points and the workpiece
surface coordinate (Q203) in the respective milling cycle as 0.

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and
8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling

Thread Milling
Overview
The TNC offers 19 cycles for all types of drilling operations:
Cycle Soft key

1 PECKING
Without automatic pre-positioning
200 DRILLING
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd set-up clearance
201 REAMING
202 BORING
203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING

With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd set-up clearance,
chip breaking, and decrement
204 BACK BORING

205 UNIVERSAL PECKING

With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd set-up clearance,
chip breaking, and advanced stop distance
208 BORE MILLING


Cycle Soft key
2 TAPPING
With a floating tap holder
17 RIGID TAPPING
Without a floating tap holder
18 THREAD CUTTING
206 TAPPING NEW

With a floating tap holder, with automatic pre-
positioning, 2nd set-up clearance
207 RIGID TAPPING NEW

Without a floating tap holder, with automatic pre-
positioning, 2nd set-up clearance
209 TAPPING W/ CHIP BRKG

Without a floating tap holder, with automatic pre-
positioning, 2nd set-up clearance, chip breaking
262 THREAD MILLING

Cycle for milling a thread in pre-drilled material
263 THREAD MLLNG/CNTSNKG

Cycle for milling a thread in pre-drilled material and
machining a countersunk chamfer
264 THREAD DRILLING/MLLNG

Cycle for drilling into the solid material with
subsequent milling of the thread with a tool
265 HEL.THREAD DRLG/MLG

Cycle for milling the thread into the solid material
267 OUTSIDE THREAD MLLNG

Cycle for milling an external thread and machining a
countersunk chamfer

PECKING (Cycle 1)
1 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging depth
at the programmed feed rate F.
2 When it reaches the first plunging depth, the tool retracts in rapid Z
traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again to the
first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t.
3 The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the
control:
n At a total hole depth of up to 30 mm: t = 0.6 mm 1
n At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm: t = hole depth / 50 3 X
n Maximum advanced stop distance: 7 mm 2
4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed
feed rate F.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the programmed depth
is reached.
6 After a dwell time at the hole bottom, the tool is returned to the
starting position in rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking.
Before programming, note the following:

Program a positioning block for the starting point (hole
center) in the working plane with radius compensation R0.
Program a positioning block for the starting point in the
tool axis (set-up clearance above the workpiece surface).
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program DEPTH
= 0, the cycle will not be executed.
U Set-up clearance 1 (incremental value): Distance

between tool tip (at starting position) and workpiece
surface
U Depth 2 (incremental value): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill Example: NC blocks
taper)
5 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
U Plunging depth 3 (incremental value): Infeed per cut
The total hole depth does not have to be a multiple of 6 CYCL DEF 1.0 PECKING
the plunging depth. The tool will drill to the total hole 7 CYCL DEF 1.1 SET UP 2
depth in one movement if:
8 CYCL DEF 1.2 DEPTH -15
n the plunging depth is equal to the depth
9 CYCL DEF 1.3 PECKG 7.5
n the plunging depth is greater than the total hole
depth 10 CYCL DEF 1.4 DWELL 1
U Dwell time in seconds: Amount of time the tool 11 CYCL DEF 1.5 F80
remains at the total hole depth for chip breaking 12 L X+30 Y+20 FMAX M3
U Feed rate F: Traversing speed of the tool during 13 L Z+2 FMAX M99
drilling in mm/min
14 L X+80 Y+50 FMAX M99
15 L Z+100 FMAX M2

DRILLING (Cycle 200)
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX
to the set-up clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed Z Q206
rate F.
3 The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the setup clearance, dwells
there (if a dwell time was entered), and then moves at FMAX to Q210
the setup clearance above the first plunging depth. Q200 Q204
4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed Q203
feed rate F. Q202
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the programmed depth Q201
is reached.
6 At the hole bottom, the tool path is retraced to setup clearance or
— if programmed — to the 2nd setup clearance in rapid traverse
FMAX.
X

Example: NC blocks

U Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a
positive value. 10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
U Depth Q201 (incremental value): Distance between 11 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill Q200 = 2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
taper)
Q201 = -15 ;DEPTH
U Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during drilling in mm/min Q206 = 250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
Q202 = 5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
U Plunging depth Q202 (incremental value): Infeed per
cut. The depth does not have to be a multiple of the Q210 = 0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
plunging depth. The TNC will go to depth in one
Q203 = +20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
movement if:
Q204 = 100 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
n the plunging depth is greater than the depth Q211 = 0.1 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
12 L X+30 Y+20 FMAX M3
U Dwell time at top Q210: Time in seconds that the
tool remains at set-up clearance after having been 13 CYCL CALL
retracted from the hole for chip release.
14 L X+80 Y+50 FMAX M99
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute 15 L Z+100 FMAX M2
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value):
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can
occur.
U Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that the
tool remains at the hole bottom

REAMING (Cycle 201)
to the programmed setup clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F. Z Q206
3 If programmed, the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered
dwell time.
4 The tool then retracts to set-up clearance at the feed rate F, and
from there — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance in Q200 Q204
FMAX. Q203
Before programming, note the following: Q201
Program a positioning block for the starting point (hole Q208

Q211
determines the working direction. If you program DEPTH X

Example: NC blocks

U Set-upclearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface.
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
U DepthQ201 (incremental value): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole 11 CYCL DEF 201 REAMING
U Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of Q200 = 2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the tool during reaming in mm/min Q201 = -15 ;DEPTH
U Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that the Q206 = 100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
Q211 = 0.5 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
U Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of the Q208 = 250 ;RETRACTION FEED TIME
tool in mm/min when retracting from the hole. If you
enter Q208 = 0, the tool retracts at the reaming feed Q203 = +20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
rate. Q204 = 100 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute 12 L X+30 Y+20 FMAX M3
13 CYCL CALL
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision 14 L X+80 Y+50 FMAX M9
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can 15 L Z+100 FMAX M2
occur.

BORING (Cycle 202)
Machine and control must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.
Z Q206
2 The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for
plunging. Q200 Q204
Q203
3 If programmed, the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered
dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free.
Q201 Q208
4 The TNC then orients the spindle to the
0° position with an oriented spindle stop. Q211
5 If retraction is selected, the tool retracts in the programmed
direction by 0.2 mm (fixed value).
6 The TNC moves the tool at the retraction feed rate to the set-up X
clearance and then, if entered, to the 2nd set-up clearance with
FMAX. If Q214=0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole.

After the cycle is completed, the TNC restores the coolant
and spindle conditions that were active before the cycle
call.

Example:

10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
workpiece surface and bottom of hole 11 CYCL DEF 202 BORING
U Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of Q200 = 2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the tool during boring in mm/min Q201 = -15 ;DEPTH
U Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that the Q206 = 100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
Q211 = 0.5 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
U Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of the Q208 = 250 ;RETRACTION FEED TIME
enter Q208 = 0, the tool retracts at feed rate for Q203 = +20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
plunging. Q204 = 100 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute Q214 = 1 ;DISENGAGING DIRECTN
Q336 = 0 ;ANGLE OF SPINDLE
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision 12 L X+30 Y+20 FMAX M3
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can 13 CYCL CALL
occur.
14 L X+80 Y+50 FMAX M99
U Disengaging direction (0/1/2/3/4) Q214: Determine
the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the
hole bottom (after spindle orientation).
0 Do not retract tool

1 Retract tool in the negative reference axis
direction
2 Retract tool in the negative secondary axis
direction
3 Retract tool in the positive reference axis
direction
4 Retract tool in the positive secondary axis
direction
Danger of collision
Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves
away from the edge of the hole.
Check the position of the tool tip when you program a
spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 (for
example, in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode
of operation). Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to
a coordinate axis.
U Angle for spindle orientation Q336 (absolute

value): Angle at which the TNC positions the tool
before retracting it.

UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203)
2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed Z Q206 Q208
rate F.
3 If you have programmed chip breaking, the tool then retracts by
the entered retraction value. If you are working without chip Q210
breaking, the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to setup Q200 Q204
clearance, remains there — if programmed — for the entered Q203
dwell time, and advances again in FMAX to the setup clearance Q202
above the first PLUNGING DEPTH. Q201
feed rate. If programmed, the plunging depth is decreased after
each infeed by the decrement. Q211
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the programmed total
hole depth is reached. X
6 The tool remains at the hole bottom — if programmed — for the
entered dwell time to cut free, and then retracts to set-up Example: NC blocks
clearance at the retraction feed rate. and — if programmed — to
the 2nd set-up clearance with FMAX. 11 CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING
Before programming, note the following: Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Program a positioning block for the starting point (hole Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
center) in the working plane with radius compensation R0. Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
U Set-upclearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Q212=0.2 ;DECREMENT
U Depth Q201 (incremental value): Distance between Q213=3 ;BREAKS
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill
taper) Q205=3 ;MIN. PLUNGING DEPTH
U Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
the tool during drilling in mm/min Q208=500 ;RETRACTION FEED RATE
U Plunging depth Q202 (incremental value): Infeed per Q256=0.2 ;DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG
cut. The depth does not have to be a multiple of the
movement if:
n the plunging depth is greater than the depth
U Dwell time at top Q210: Time in seconds that the
tool remains at set-up clearance after having been
retracted from the hole for chip release.
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute

occur.
U Decrement Q212 (incremental value): Value by which
the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after
each infeed.
U No. of breaks before retracting Q213: Number of
chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw the
tool from the hole for chip release. For chip breaking,
the TNC retracts the tool each time by the value
Q256.
U Minimum plunging depth Q205 (incremental value): If
you have entered a decrement, the TNC limits the
plunging depth to the value entered with Q205.
U Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of the
enter Q208 = 0, the tool retracts at the feed rate in
Q206.
U Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256
(incremental value): Value by which the TNC retracts
the tool during chip breaking

BACK BORING (Cycle 204)

machine tool builder for use of this cycle. Z
Special boring bars for upward cutting are required for this
cycle.
This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the

workpiece.
2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0° position with an
oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off-center
distance. X
3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the feed rate
for pre-positioning until the tooth has reached setup clearance on
the underside of the workpiece.
4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole, switches
on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed rate for Z
boring to the depth of bore.
5 If a dwell time is entered, the tool will pause at the top of the bore
hole and will then be retracted from the hole again. The TNC
carries out another oriented spindle stop and the tool is once again
displaced by the off-center distance. Q204
6 The TNC moves the tool at the pre-positioning feed rate to the Q200
setup clearance and then, if entered, to the 2nd setup clearance
with FMAX.
Q250 Q203
Q249
Program a positioning block for the starting point (hole Q200
X
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter depth

determines the working direction. Note: A positive sign
bores in the direction of the positive spindle axis.
Z Q253
The entered tool length is the total length to the underside
of the boring bar and not just to the tooth.
When calculating the starting point for boring, the TNC Q251
considers the tooth length of the boring bar and the
thickness of the material. Q252
Q255
Q254
X
Q214

Example: NC blocks

11 CYCL DEF 204 BACK BORING
U Depth of counterbore Q249 (incremental value):
Distance between underside of workpiece and the Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
top of the hole. A positive sign means the hole will be Q249=+5 ;DEPTH OF COUNTERBORE
bored in the positive spindle axis direction.
Q250=20 ;MATERIAL THICKNESS
U Material thickness Q250 (incremental value):
Thickness of the workpiece Q251=3.5 ;OFF-CENTER DISTANCE
Q252=15 ;TOOL EDGE HEIGHT
U Off-center distance Q251 (incremental value): Off-
center distance for the boring bar; value from tool Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
data sheet
Q254=200 ;F COUNTERBORING
U Tool edge height Q252 (incremental value): Distance Q255=0 ;DWELL TIME
between the underside of the boring bar and the main
cutting tooth; value from tool data sheet Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
U Feedrate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
speed of the tool when moving in and out of the Q214=1 ;DISENGAGING DIRECTN
workpiece, in mm/min
Q336=0 ;ANGLE OF SPINDLE
U Feedrate for counterboring Q254: Traversing
speed of the tool during counterboring in mm/min
U Dwell time Q255: Dwell time in seconds at the top of
the bore hole
occur.
U Disengaging direction (0/1/2/3/4) Q214:
Determine the direction in which the TNC displaces
the tool by the off-center distance (after spindle
orientation).
1 Retract tool in the negative reference axis

direction
2 Retract tool in the negative secondary axis
direction
3 Retract tool in the positive reference axis
direction
4 Retract tool in the positive secondary axis
direction
Danger of collision
Check the position of the tool tip when you program a
spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 (for
example, in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode
of operation). Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to
a coordinate axis. Select a disengaging direction in which
the tool moves away from the edge of the hole.

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Angle for spindle orientation Q336 (absolute
value): Angle at which the TNC positions the tool
before it is plunged into or retracted from the bore
hole.
UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205)

2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed
rate F.
the entered retraction value. If you are working without chip
breaking, the tool is moved at rapid traverse to setup clearance and
then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first
plunging depth.
feed rate. If programmed, the plunging depth is decreased after
each infeed by the decrement.
hole depth is reached.
6 The tool remains at the hole bottom — if programmed — for the
entered dwell time to cut free, and then retracts to set-up
clearance at the retraction feed rate. and — if programmed — to
the 2nd set-up clearance with FMAX.


U Depth Q201 (incremental value): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill
taper)
the tool during drilling in mm/min
movement if:
Example: NC blocks
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision 11 CYCL DEF 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
occur.
Q201=-80 ;DEPTH
U DecrementQ212 (incremental value): Value by which
the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202. Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
U Minimum plunging depth Q205 (incremental value): If Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH

you have entered a decrement, the TNC limits the Q203=+100 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
plunging depth to the value entered with Q205.
U Upper advanced stop distance Q258 (incremental
value): Set-up clearance for rapid traverse positioning Q212=0.5 ;DECREMENT
when the TNC moves the tool again to the current Q205=3 ;MIN. PLUNGING DEPTH
plunging depth after retraction from the hole; value
for the first plunging depth Q258=0.5 ;UPPER ADV STOP DIST
Q259=1 ;LOWER ADV STOP DIST
U Lower advanced stop distance Q259 (incremental
value): Set-up clearance for rapid traverse positioning Q257=5 ;DEPTH FOR CHIP BRKNG
when the TNC moves the tool again to the current
Q256=0.2 ;DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG
plunging depth after retraction from the hole; value
for the last plunging depth Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
If you enter Q258 not equal to Q259, the TNC will change
the advance stop distances between the first and last
plunging depths at the same rate.
U Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 (incremental

value): Depth at which the TNC carries out chip
breaking. There is no chip breaking if 0 is entered.

BORE MILLING (Cycle 208)
to the programmed set-up clearance above the workpiece surface
and then moves the tool to the bore hole circumference on a
rounded arc (if enough space is available).
2 The tool mills in a helix from the current position to the first
plunging depth at the programmed feed rate.
3 When the drilling depth is reached, the TNC once again traverses
a full circle to remove the material remaining after the initial
plunge.
4 The TNC then positions the tool at the center of the hole again.
5 Finally the TNC returns to the setup clearance at FMAX. and — if
programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance with FMAX.

If you have entered the bore hole diameter to be the same
as the tool diameter, the TNC will bore directly to the
entered depth without any helical interpolation.

between tool lower edge and workpiece surface.
workpiece surface and bottom of hole
the tool during helical drilling in mm/min
U Infeed per helix Q334 (incremental value): Depth of
the tool plunge with each helix (=360°)
Note that if the infeed distance is too large, the tool or the
workpiece may be damaged.
To prevent the infeeds being too large, enter the max.
plunge angle of the tool in the tool table, column ANGLE,
see “Tool Data,” page 99. The TNC then calculates
automatically the max. infeed permitted and changes your
entered value accordingly.

occur.
U Nominal diameter Q335 (absolute value): Bore-hole
diameter. If you have entered the nominal diameter to
be the same as the tool diameter, the TNC will bore
directly to the entered depth without any helical
interpolation.
U Roughing diameter Q342 (absolute value): As soon as
you enter a value greater than 0 in Q342, the TNC no
longer checks the ratio between the nominal
diameter and the tool diameter. This allows you to Example: NC blocks
rough-mill holes whose diameter is more than twice
as large as the tool diameter. 12 CYCL DEF 208 BORE MILLING
Q201=-80 ;DEPTH
Q334=1.5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q335=25 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Q342=0 ;ROUGHING DIAMETER

TAPPING with a floating tap holder (Cycle 2)
1 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement.
2 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth, the direction of
spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the starting Z
position at the end of the dwell time.
3 At the starting position, the direction of spindle rotation reverses
once again.
Before programming, note the following: 1

center) in the working plane with radius compensation R0. X
2
A floating tap holder is required for tapping. It must
compensate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle
speed during the tapping process.
When a cycle is being run, the spindle speed override knob
is disabled. The feed rate override knob is active only
within a limited range, which is defined by the machine
tool builder (refer to your machine manual).
For tapping right-hand threads activate the spindle with
M3, for left-hand threads use M4.

surface. Standard value: approx. 4 times the thread
pitch
U Total hole depth 2 (thread length, incremental value):
Distance between workpiece surface and end of Example: NC blocks
thread
U Dwell time in seconds: Enter a value between 0 and 24 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
0.5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during 25 CYCL DEF 2.0 TAPPING
retraction.
26 CYCL DEF 2.1 SET UP 3
U Feed rate F: Traversing speed of the tool during
tapping 27 CYCL DEF 2.2 DEPTH -20
28 CYCL DEF 2.3 DWELL 0.4
The feed rate is calculated as follows: F = S x p
29 CYCL DEF 2.4 F100
F Feed rate (mm/min)
30 L X+50 Y+20 FMAX M3
S: Spindle speed (rpm)
p: Thread pitch (mm) 31 L Z+3 FMAX M99
Retracting after a program interruption

If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop
button, the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract the
tool.

TAPPING NEW with floating tap holder
(Cycle 206)
spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set-up
clearance at the end of the dwell time. and — if programmed — to
4 At the set-up clearance, the direction of spindle rotation reverses
once again.

A floating tap holder is required for tapping. It must
compensate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle
speed during the tapping process.
When a cycle is being run, the spindle speed override knob
is disabled. The feed rate override knob is active only
within a limited range, which is defined by the machine
tool builder (refer to your machine manual).
For tapping right-hand threads activate the spindle with
M3, for left-hand threads use M4.

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance
surface. Standard value: approx. 4 times the thread
pitch
U Total hole depth Q201 (thread length, incremental
value): Distance between workpiece surface and end
of thread
U Feed rate F Q206: Traversing speed of the tool during
tapping
U Dwell time at bottom Q211: Enter a value between 0
and 0.5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during
retraction
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Example: NC blocks
occur. 25 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW
The feed rate is calculated as follows: F = S x p
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
F Feed rate (mm/min)
S: Spindle speed (rpm) Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
p: Thread pitch (mm) Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
Retracting after a program interruption Q203=+25 ;SURFACE COORDINATE

If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
button, the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract the
tool.

RIGID TAPPING (Cycle 17)

The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more 13
passes. Z
Rigid tapping offers the following advantages over tapping with a
floating tap holder
1
n Higher machining speeds possible
n Repeated tapping of the same thread is possible; repetitions are X
enabled via spindle orientation to the 0° position during cycle call 12
(depending on machine parameter 7160).
n Increased traverse range of the spindle axis due to absence of a
floating tap holder.
Program a positioning block for the starting point (hole Example: NC blocks
18 CYCL DEF 17.0 RIGID TAPPING GS
tool axis (set-up clearance above the workpiece surface). 19 CYCL DEF 17.1 SET UP 2
The algebraic sign for the parameter total hole depth 20 CYCL DEF 17.2 DEPTH -20
determines the working direction. 21 CYCL DEF 17.3 PITCH +1
The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed.
If the spindle speed override is used during tapping, the
feed rate is automatically adjusted.
The feed-rate override knob is disabled.
At the end of the cycle the spindle comes to a stop. Before
the next operation, restart the spindle with M3 (or M4).

surface
U Total hole depth 2 (incremental value): Distance
between workpiece surface (beginning of thread) and
end of thread
U Pitch 3:
Pitch of the thread. The algebraic sign differentiates
between right-hand and left-hand threads:
+= right-hand thread
–= left-hand thread

If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop
button, the TNC will display the soft key MANUAL OPERATION. If you
press the MANUAL OPERATION key, you can retract the tool under
program control. Simply press the positive axis direction button of the
active tool axis.

RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder
TAPPING (Cycle 207)

The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more
passes.
Rigid tapping offers the following advantages over tapping with a
floating tap holder:See “RIGID TAPPING (Cycle 17),” page 229.
spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set-up
clearance at the end of the dwell time. and — if programmed — to
4 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set-up clearance.

The algebraic sign for the parameter total hole depth
determines the working direction.

surface
U Totalhole depth Q201 (incremental value): Distance
between workpiece surface and end of thread
U Pitch Q239
occur.
Example: NC blocks
26 CYCL DEF 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW
If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine
stop button, the TNC will display the soft key MANUAL OPERATION. Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key, you can retract the tool Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
under program control. Simply press the positive axis direction button
of the active tool axis. Q239=+1 ;THREAD PITCH

THREAD CUTTING (Cycle 18)

Z
Cycle 18 THREAD CUTTING is performed by means of spindle control. 12
The tool moves with the active spindle speed from its current position
to the entered depth. As soon as it reaches the end of thread, spindle
rotation is stopped. Tool approach and departure must be
programmed separately. The most convenient way to do this is by
using OEM cycles. The machine tool builder can give you further X
information. 1

If the spindle speed override is used during thread cutting,
the feed rate is automatically adjusted.
Example: NC blocks
The TNC automatically activates and deactivates spindle
rotation. Do not program M3 or M4 before cycle call. 22 CYCL DEF 18.0 THREAD CUTTING
U Total hole depth 1: Distance between current tool
position and end of thread 24 CYCL DEF 18.2 PITCH +1
The algebraic sign for the total hole depth determines

the working direction (a negative value means a
negative working direction in the tool axis)
U Pitch 2:
+= right-hand thread (M3 with negative depth)
– = left-hand thread (M4 with negative depth)

TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209)

The tool machines the thread in several passes until it reaches the
programmed depth. You can define in a parameter whether the tool is
to be retracted completely from the hole for chip breaking.
There it carries out an oriented spindle stop.
2 The tool moves to the programmed infeed depth, reverses the
direction of spindle rotation and retracts by a specific distance or
completely for chip release, depending on the definition .
3 It then reverses the direction of spindle rotation again and
advances to the next infeed depth.
4 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 3) until the programmed thread
depth is reached.
5 The tool is then retracted to set-up clearance. and — if
programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance with FMAX.
6 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set-up clearance.

The algebraic sign for the parameter thread depth

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance
surface
U Threaddepth Q201 (incremental value): Distance
between workpiece surface and end of thread
U Pitch Q239
occur.
Example: NC blocks
value): Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking 26 CYCL DEF 209 TAPPING W/ CHIP BRKG
U Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256: The TNC Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
multiplies the pitch Q239 by the programmed value Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
and retracts the tool by the calculated value during
chip breaking. If you enter Q256 = 0, the TNC retracts Q239=+1 ;THREAD PITCH
the tool completely from the hole (to set-up Q203=+25 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
clearance) for chip release.
U Angle for spindle orientation Q336 (absolute
value): Angle at which the TNC positions the tool Q257=5 ;DEPTH FOR CHIP BRKNG
before machining the thread. This allows you to Q256=+25 ;DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG
regroove the thread, if required.
Q336=50 ;ANGLE OF SPINDLE
If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine
stop button, the TNC will display the soft key MANUAL OPERATION.
If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key, you can retract the tool
under program control. Simply press the positive axis direction button
of the active tool axis.

Fundamentals of thread milling
Prerequisites
n Your machine tool should feature internal spindle cooling (cooling
lubricant min. 30 bar, compressed air supply min. 6 bar).
n Thread milling usually leads to distortions of the thread profile. To
correct this effect, you need tool-specific compensation values
which are given in the tool catalog or are available from the tool
manufacturer. You program the compensation with the delta value
for the tool radius DR in the tool call .
n The Cycles 262, 263, 264 and 267 can only be used with rightward
rotating tools. For Cycle 265, you can use rightward and leftward
rotating tools.
n The working direction is determined by the following input
parameters: Algebraic sign Q239 (+ = right-hand thread /– = left-
hand thread) and milling method Q351 (+1 = climb /–1 = up-cut). The
table below illustrates the interrelation between the individual input
parameters for rightward rotating tools.
Climb/Up-
Internal thread Pitch Work direction
cut
Right-handed + +1(RL) Z+
Left-handed – –1(RR) Z+
Right-handed + –1(RR) Z–
Left-handed – +1(RL) Z–
Climb/Up-
External thread Pitch Work direction
cut
Right-handed + +1(RL) Z–
Left-handed – –1(RR) Z–
Right-handed + –1(RR) Z+
Left-handed – +1(RL) Z+

Danger of collision
Always program the same algebraic sign for the infeeds:
Cycles comprise several sequences of operation that are
independent of each other. The order of precedence
according to which the work direction is determined is
described with the individual cycles. If you want to repeat
specific machining operation of a cycle, for example with
only the countersinking process, enter 0 for the thread
depth. The work direction will then be determined from
the countersinking depth.
Procedure in the case of a tool break!
If a tool break occurs during thread cutting, stop the
program run, change to the Positioning with MDI
operating mode and move the tool in a linear path to the
hole center. You can then retract the tool in the infeed axis
and replace it.
The TNC references the programmed feed rate during

thread milling to the tool cutting edge. Since the TNC,
however, always displays the feed rate relative to the path
of the tool tip, the displayed value does not match the
programmed value.
The machining direction of the thread changes if you
execute a thread milling cycle in connection with Cycle 8
MIRRORING with only one axis.

THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262)
2 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre-positioning to
the starting plane. The starting plane is derived from the algebraic
sign of the thread pitch, the milling method (climb or up-cut milling)
and the number of threads per step.
3 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a
helical movement. Before the helical approach, a compensating
motion of the tool axis is carried out in order to begin at the
programmed starting plane for the thread path.
4 Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of
threads, the tool mills the thread in one, in several spaced or in one
continuous helical movement.
5 After this, the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to
the starting point in the working plane.
6 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid traverse
to set-up clearance or, if programmed, to the 2nd set-up clearance

The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter thread depth
determines the working direction. If you program the
thread depth = 0, the cycle will not be executed.
The thread diameter is approached in a semi-circle from
the center. A pre-positioning movement to the side is
carried out if the pitch of the tool diameter is four times
smaller than the thread diameter.
U Nominal diameter Q335: Nominal thread diameter

U Thread pitch Q239: Pitch of the thread. The algebraic
sign differentiates between right-hand and left-hand
threads:
– = left-hand thread
between workpiece surface and root of thread
U Threads per step Q355: Number of thread
revolutions by which the tool is offset, see figure at
lower right
0 = one 360° helical path to the depth of thread
1 = continuous helical path over the entire length of
the thread
>1 = several helical paths with approach and
departure; between them, the TNC offsets the tool by
Q355, multiplied by the pitch

Example: NC blocks
8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Feedrate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool when moving in and out of the
workpiece, in mm/min 25 CYCL DEF 262 THREAD MILLING
U Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation with Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
M03 Q239=+1.5 ;PITCH
+1 = climb milling
–1 = up-cut milling Q201=-20 ;THREAD DEPTH
U Set-upclearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance Q355=0 ;THREADS PER STEP

between tool tip and workpiece surface Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
occur. Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the
tool in mm/min while milling.

THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING
(Cycle 263)
Countersinking
2 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre-positioning to the
countersinking depth minus the setup clearance, and then at the
feed rate for countersinking to the countersinking depth.
3 If a safety clearance to the side has been entered, the TNC
immediately positions the tool at the feed rate for pre-positioning
to the countersinking depth
4 Then, depending on the available space, the TNC makes a
tangential approach to the core diameter, either tangentially from
the center or with a pre-positioning move to the side, and follows
a circular path.
Countersinking at front
5 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre-positioning to the sinking
depth at front.
6 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center
on a semicircle to the offset at front, and then follows a circular
path at the feed rate for countersinking.
7 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center.
Thread milling
8 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre-
positioning to the starting plane for the thread. The starting plane
is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling (climb
or up-cut).
9 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread
diameter and mills the thread with a 360° helical motion.

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling 11 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid traverse

The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth of thread,
countersinking depth or sinking depth at front determines
the working direction. The working direction is defined in
the following sequence:
1st: Depth of thread
2nd: Countersinking depth
3rd: Depth at front
If you program a depth parameter to be 0, the TNC does
not execute that step.
if you wish to countersink with the front of the tool, define
the countersinking depth as 0.
Program the thread depth as a value smaller than the
countersinking depth by at least one-third the thread pitch.

threads:
U Countersinking depth Q356 (incremental value):
Distance between tool point and the top surface of
the workpiece
U Feedrate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
U Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation with
M03
+1 = climb milling
–1 = up-cut milling
between tool tip and workpiece surface
U Set-up clearance to the side Q357 (incremental
value): Distance between tool tooth and the wall
U Depthat front Q358 (incremental value): Distance
between tool point and the top surface of the
workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool
U Countersinking offset at front Q359 (incremental
value): Distance by which the TNC moves the tool
center away from the hole center

Example: NC blocks
8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute
25 CYCL DEF 263 THREAD MILLING/
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value): COUNTERSINKING
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
occur. Q239=+1.5 ;PITCH
U Feedrate for counterboring Q254: Traversing Q201=-16 ;THREAD DEPTH
speed of the tool during counterboring in mm/min
Q356=-20 ;COUNTERSINKING DEPTH
tool in mm/min while milling. Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Q357=0.2 ;CLEARANCE TO SIDE
Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
Q359=+0 ;OFFSET AT FRONT
Q254=150 ;F COUNTERSINKING
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING

THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264)
Drilling
2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed
rate for plunging.
the entered retraction value. If you are working without chip
breaking, the tool is moved at rapid traverse to setup clearance and
then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first
plunging depth.
feed rate.
hole depth is reached.
depth at front.
Thread milling
9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre-
positioning to the starting plane for the thread. The starting plane
is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling (climb
or up-cut).
10 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread
diameter and mills the thread with a 360° helical motion.

The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth of thread,
countersinking depth or sinking depth at front determines
the working direction. The working direction is defined in
the following sequence:
2nd: Total hole depth
3rd: Depth at front
Program the thread depth as a value smaller than the total
hole depth by at least one-third the thread pitch.

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Nominal diameter Q335: Nominal thread diameter
threads:
U Totalhole depth Q356 (incremental value): Distance
between workpiece surface and bottom of hole
M03
+1 = climb milling
movement if:
U Upper advanced stop distance Q258 (incremental
value): Set-up clearance for rapid traverse positioning
when the TNC moves the tool again to the current
plunging depth after retraction from the hole
value): Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking.
There is no chip breaking if 0 is entered.

Example: NC blocks

25 CYCL DEF 264 THREAD DRILLNG/MLLNG
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q239=+1.5 ;PITCH

Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Q201=-16 ;THREAD DEPTH
occur. Q356=-20 ;TOTAL HOLE DEPTH
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
the tool during drilling in mm/min Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
tool in mm/min while milling. Q258=0.2 ;ADVANCED STOP DISTANCE
Q257=5 ;DEPTH FOR CHIP BRKNG
Q256=0:2 ;DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG
Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT

HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING
(Cycle 265)
2 If countersinking is before thread milling, the tool moves at the
feed rate for countersinking to the sinking depth at front. If
countersinking is after thread milling, the tool moves at the feed
rate for pre-positioning to the countersinking depth.
Thread milling
the starting plane for the thread.
helical movement.
7 The tool moves on a continuous helical downward path until it
reaches the thread depth.
to set-up clearance, or — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up
clearance.

The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth of thread
or sinking depth at front determines the working direction.
The working direction is defined in the following
sequence:
2nd: Depth at front
The type of milling (up-cut/climb) is determined by the
thread (right-hand/left-hand) and the direction of tool
rotation, since it is only possible to work in the direction of
the tool.

threads:
U Countersink Q360: Execution of the chamfer
0 = before thread machining
1 = after thread machining

Example: NC blocks
8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute
25 CYCL DEF 265 HEL. THREAD DRLG/MLG
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can Q239=+1.5 ;PITCH
occur.
Q201=-16 ;THREAD DEPTH
U Feedrate for counterboring Q254: Traversing
speed of the tool during counterboring in mm/min Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
tool in mm/min while milling. Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
Q360=0 ;COUNTERSINKING
Q254=150 ;F COUNTERSINKING

OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267)
2 The TNC moves on the reference axis of the working plane from
the center of the stud to the starting point for countersinking at
front. The position of the starting point is determined by the thread
radius, tool radius and pitch.
depth at front.
5 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the starting point.
Thread milling
6 The TNC positions the tool to the starting point if there has been
no previous countersinking at front. Starting point for thread milling
= starting point for countersinking at front.
the starting plane. The starting plane is derived from the algebraic
sign of the thread pitch, the milling method (climb or up-cut milling)
and the number of threads per step.
helical movement.
9 Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of
threads, the tool mills the thread in one, in several spaced or in one
continuous helical movement.

8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling 11 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid traverse
clearance.

Program a positioning block for the starting point (stud
The offset required before countersinking at the front
should be determined ahead of time. You must enter the
value from the center of the stud to the center of the tool
(uncorrected value).
The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth of thread
or sinking depth at front determines the working direction.
The working direction is defined in the following
sequence:
2nd: Depth at front
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter thread depth

threads:
U Threads per step Q355: Number of thread
revolutions by which the tool is offset, see figure at
lower right 0 = one 360° helical path to the depth of
thread
1 = continuous helical path over the entire length of
the thread
>1 = several helical paths with approach and
departure; between them, the TNC offsets the tool by
Q355, multiplied by the pitch
M03
+1 = climb milling

Example: NC blocks
8.3 Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread Milling U Set-upclearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance
25 CYCL DEF 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MLLNG
between tool point and the top surface of the Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Q239=+1.5 ;PITCH
U Countersinking offset at front Q359 (incremental Q201=-20 ;THREAD DEPTH
center away from the stud center Q355=0 ;THREADS PER STEP
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
occur. Q359=+0 ;OFFSET AT FRONT
U Feedrate for counterboring Q254: Traversing Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
speed of the tool during counterboring in mm/min Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q254=150 ;F COUNTERSINKING

Example: Drilling cycles
Y
100
90
10
X
10 20 80 90 100
0 BEGIN PGM C200 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Define cycle
Q201=-15 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q203=-10 ;SURFACE COORDINATE

7 L X+10 Y+10 R0 F MAX M3 Approach hole 1, spindle ON
8 CYCL CALL Call the cycle
9 L Y+90 R0 F MAX M99 Approach hole 2, call cycle
10 L X+90 R0 F MAX M99 Approach hole 3, call cycle
11 L Y+10 R0 F MAX M99 Approach hole 4, call cycle
13 END PGM C200 MM

Example: Drilling cycles
Program sequence
n Program the drilling cycle in the main program Y
n Program machining within a subprogram, see 100
M12
“Subprograms,” page 343
70
M12
20
X
20 70 100
0 BEGIN PGM C18 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
6 CYCL DEF 18.0 THREAD CUTTING Define THREAD CUTTING cycle
7 CYCL DEF 18.1 DEPTH +30
8 CYCL DEF 18.2 PITCH -1.75
9 L X+20 Y+20 R0 F MAX Approach hole 1
10 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram 1
11 L X+70 Y+70 R0 F MAX Approach hole 2
12 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram 1
13 L Z+250 R0 F MAX M2 Retract tool, end of main program

14 LBL 1 Subprogram 1: Thread cutting
15 CYCL DEF 13.0 ORIENTATION Define the spindle angle (makes it possible to cut repeatedly)
16 CYCL DEF 13.1 ANGLE 0
17 L M19 Orient the spindle (machine-specific M function)
18 L IX-2 R0 F1000 Tool offset to prevent collision during tool infeed (dependent
on core diameter and tool)
19 L Z+5 R0 F MAX Pre-position in rapid traverse
20 L Z-30 R0 F1000 Move to starting depth
21 L IX+2 Reset the tool to hole center
22 CYCL CALL Call Cycle 18
23 L Z+5 R0 F MAX Retract tool
24 LBL 0 End of subprogram 1
25 END PGM C18 MM

8.4 Cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots
8.4 Cycles for milling pockets,
studs and slots
Overview
Cycle Soft key

4 POCKET MILLING (rectangular)
Roughing cycle without automatic pre-positioning
212 POCKET FINISHING (rectangular)

Finishing cycle with automatic pre-positioning,
2nd set-up clearance
213 STUD FINISHING (rectangular)

5 CIRCULAR POCKET
Roughing cycle without automatic pre-positioning
214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING

215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING

3 SLOT MILLING
Roughing/finishing cycle without automatic pre-
positioning, vertical depth infeed
210 SLOT RECIP. PLNG

Roughing/finishing cycle with automaticpre-
positioning, with reciprocating plunge infeed
211 CIRCULAR SLOT

Roughing/finishing cycle with automaticpre-
positioning, with reciprocating plunge infeed

POCKET MILLING (Cycle 4)
1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position (pocket
center) and advances to the first plunging depth.
2 The cutter begins milling in the positive axis direction of the longer 15
side (on square pockets, always starting in the positive Y direction)
and then roughs out the pocket from the inside out.
14
3 This process (1 to 2) is repeated until the depth is reached. Z
4 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool to the starting
position.
1
13 X
This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641), or pilot 12
drilling at the pocket center.
Pre-position over the pocket center with radius
compensation R0.
The following prerequisite applies for the 2nd side length:
2nd side length greater than [(2 x rounding radius) +
stepover factor k].

surface
U Depth2 (incremental value): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of pocket
U Plungingdepth 3 (incremental value): Infeed per cut
The TNC will go to depth in one movement if:
Example: NC blocks
n the plunging depth is greater than the depth 11 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
U Feed rate for plunging: Traversing speed of the tool 12 CYCL DEF 4.0 POCKET MILLING
during penetration
U First side length 4 (incremental value): Pocket 14 CYCL DEF 4.2 DEPTH -10
length, parallel to the reference axis of the working
plane 15 CYCL DEF 4.3 PLNGNG 4 F80
U 2nd side length 5: Pocket width 16 CYCL DEF 4.4 X80
U Feed rate F: Traversing speed of the tool in the 17 CYCL DEF 4.5 Y40
working plane 18 CYCL DEF 4.6 F100 DR+ RADIUS 10
U Clockwise 19 L X+60 Y+35 FMAX M3
DR +: Climb milling with M3
DR –: Up-cut milling with M3 20 L Z+2 FMAX M99

U Rounding off radius: Radius for the pocket corners.
If Radius = 0 is entered, the pocket corners will be
rounded with the radius of the cutter.
Calculations:
Stepover factor k = K x R
K: is the overlap factor, preset in machine parameter 7430, and

R is the cutter radius

POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 212)
1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to set-up
clearance, or — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance, and
subsequently to the center of the pocket.
2 From the pocket center, the tool moves in the working plane to the
starting point for machining. The TNC takes the allowance and tool
radius into account for calculating the starting point. If necessary,
the TNC penetrates at the pocket center.
3 If the tool is at the 2nd set-up clearance, it moves in rapid traverse
FMAX to set-up clearance, and from there advances to the first
plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging.
4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part
and, using climb milling, machines one revolution.
5 The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns
to the starting point in the working plane.
6 This process (3 to 5) is repeated until the programmed depth is
reached.
clearance, and finally to the center of the pocket (end position =
starting position).
Q206
Before programming, note the following: Z
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in the tool
axis and working plane. Q200 Q204
Q203
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH Q202
Q201
If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same
tool, use a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) and enter a low
feed rate for plunging.
X
Minimum size of the pocket: 3 times the tool radius.
Y Q218
Q
22
0
Q219
Q217
Q207
X
Q216 Q221

Example: NC blocks

34 CYCL DEF 212 POCKET FINISHING
workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of Q201=-20 ;DEPTH

the tool in mm/min when moving to depth. If you are Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
plunge-cutting into the material, enter a value lower
than that defined in Q207 Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
tool in mm/min while milling. Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q218=80 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Q219=60 ;SECOND SIDE LENGTH
between tool and workpiece (clamping devices) can Q220=5 ;CORNER RADIUS
occur.
Q221=0 ;ALLOWANCE
U Center in 1st axis Q216 (absolute value): Center of
the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane
U Center in 2nd axis Q217 (absolute value): Center of
the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane
U First side length Q218 (incremental value): Pocket
length, parallel to the reference axis of the working
plane.
U Second side length Q219 (incremental value): Pocket
length, parallel to the minor axis of the working plane
U Corner radius Q220: Radius of the pocket corner If
you make no entry here, the TNC assumes that the
corner radius is equal to the tool radius.
U Allowance in 1st axis Q221 (incremental value):
Allowance for pre-positioning in the reference axis of
the working plane referenced to the length of the
pocket.

STUD FINISHING (Cycle 213)
1 The TNC moves the tool in the tool axis to set-up clearance, or —
if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance, and subsequently Y
to the center of the stud.
2 From the stud center, the tool moves in the working plane to the
starting point for machining. The starting point lies to the right of
the stud by a distance approx. 3.5 times the tool radius.
6 This process (3 to 5) is repeated until the programmed depth is X
reached.
7 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in FMAX to set-
up clearance, or — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance,
and finally to the center of the stud (end position = starting
position).

Z
axis and working plane.
Q200 Q204
Q203
determines the working direction. If you program DEPTH Q202
Q201
If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool,
use a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) and enter a low feed
rate for plunging.
X
Y Q218
Q
Q207
22
0
Q219
Q217
X
Q216 Q221

Example: NC blocks

35 CYCL DEF 213 STUD FINISHING
workpiece surface and bottom of stud Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

plunge-cutting into the material, enter a low value; if
you have already cleared the stud, enter a higher feed Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
rate. Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
U Plunging depth Q202 (incremental value): Infeed per Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
cut. Enter a value greater than 0.
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q218=80 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q219=60 ;SECOND SIDE LENGTH
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Q220=5 ;CORNER RADIUS
occur. Q221=0 ;ALLOWANCE

the stud in the reference axis of the working plane
the stud in the minor axis of the working plane.
U First side length Q218 (incremental value): Length
of stud parallel to the reference axis of the working
plane
U Second side length Q219 (incremental value): Length
of stud parallel to the secondary axis of the working
plane
U Corner radius Q220: Radius of the stud corner
U Allowance in 1st axis Q221 (incremental value):
Allowance for pre-positioning in the reference axis of
the working plane referenced to the length of the stud

CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING (Cycle 5)
1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position (pocket
center) and advances to the first plunging depth. Y
2 The tool subsequently follows a spiral path at the feed rate F - see
figure at right. For calculating the stepover factor k, see Cycle 4
POCKET MILLING.see “POCKET MILLING (Cycle 4),” page 258
3 This process is repeated until the depth is reached.
4 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool to the starting
position.

This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641), or pilot
drilling at the pocket center.
Pre-position over the pocket center with radius
compensation R0. X
Z
between tool tip (at starting position) and workpiece 1
surface
U Milling depth 2: Distance between workpiece 13 X
surface and bottom of pocket 12
U Plungingdepth 3 (incremental value): Infeed per cut
The TNC will go to depth in one movement if:

U Feed rate for plunging: Traversing speed of the tool
during penetration
U Circular radius: Radius of the circular pocket
U Feed rate F: Traversing speed of the tool in the
working plane
U Clockwise
DR +: Climb milling with M3
DR –: Up-cut milling with M3
Example: NC blocks
16 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
17 CYCL DEF 5.0 CIRCULAR POCKET
20 CYCL DEF 5.3 PLNGNG 6 F80
21 CYCL DEF 5.4 RADIUS 35
22 CYCL DEF 5.5 F100 DR+
23 L X+60 Y+50 FMAX M3
24 L Z+2 FMAX M99

CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING (Cycle 214)
clearance, or — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance, and Y
subsequently to the center of the pocket.
2 From the pocket center, the tool moves in the working plane to the
starting point for machining. The TNC takes the workpiece blank
diameter and tool radius into account for calculating the starting
point. If you enter a workpiece blank diameter of 0, the TNC
plunge-cuts into the pocket center.
5 After this, the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to X
6 This process (3 to 5) is repeated until the programmed depth is
reached.
to set-up clearance, or, if programmed, to the
2nd set-up clearance and then to the center of the pocket (end
position = starting position) Q206
Z
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in the tool Q200 Q204
axis and working plane. Q203
Q202
Q201
If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same
tool, use a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) and enter a low
feed rate for plunging. X
Q207
Q222
Q223
Q217
X
Q216

Example: NC blocks

42 CYCL DEF 214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING
workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

plunge-cutting into the material, enter a value lower
than that defined in Q207 Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
cut. Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
tool in mm/min while milling. Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q222=79 ;WORKPIECE BLANK DIA.
Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision Q223=80 ;FINISHED PART DIA.
occur.
the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane
the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane
U Workpiece blank diameter Q222: Diameter of the
premachined pocket for calculating the pre-position.
Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be less than
the diameter of the finished part
U Finished part diameter Q223: Diameter of the
finished pocket. Enter the diameter of the finished
part to be greater than the workpiece blank diameter.

CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING (Cycle 215)
clearance, or — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance, and Y
subsequently to the center of the stud.
2 From the stud center, the tool moves in the working plane to the
starting point for machining. The starting point lies to the right of
the stud by a distance approx. 3.5 times the tool radius.
6 This process (3 to 5) is repeated until the programmed depth is X
reached.
7 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in FMAX to set-
up clearance, or — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up clearance,
and finally to the center of the pocket (end position = starting
position).

Z
Q200 Q204
Q203
determines the working direction. If you program DEPTH Q202
Q201
If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool,
use a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) and enter a low feed
rate for plunging.
X
Q207
Q223
Q222
Q217
X
Q216

Example: NC blocks

43 CYCL DEF 215 C. STUD FINISHING
workpiece surface and bottom of stud Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

plunge-cutting into the material, enter a low value; if
you have already cleared the stud, enter a higher feed Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
rate. Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
U Plunging depth Q202 (incremental value): Infeed per Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
cut. Enter a value greater than 0.
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q222=81 ;WORKPIECE BLANK DIA.
U 2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q223=80 ;FINISHED PART DIA.
occur.
the stud in the reference axis of the working plane
the stud in the minor axis of the working plane.
U Workpiece blank diameter Q222: Diameter of the
premachined stud for calculating the pre-position.
Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be greater
than the diameter of the finished part
U Diameter of finished part Q223: Diameter of the
finished stud. Enter the diameter of the finished part
to be less than the workpiece blank diameter.

SLOT MILLING (Cycle 3)
Roughing process
1 The TNC moves the tool inward by the milling allowance (half the
difference between the slot width and the tool diameter). From
there it plunge-cuts into the workpiece and mills in the longitudinal
direction of the slot.
2 After downfeed at the end of the slot, milling is performed in the
opposite direction. This process is repeated until the programmed
milling depth is reached.
Finishing process
3 The TNC advances the tool at the slot bottom on a tangential arc
to the outside contour. The tool subsequently climb mills the
contour (with M3).
4 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in rapid traverse FMAX
to set-up clearance. If the number of infeeds was odd, the tool
returns to the starting position at the level of the set-up clearance.

This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641), or pilot
drilling at the starting point.
Pre-position to the center of the slot and offset by the tool
radius into the slot with radius compensation R0.
The cutter diameter must be not be larger than the slot
width and not smaller than half the slot width.

15
surface
U Millingdepth 2 (incremental value): Distance 14
between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket
U Plunging depth 3 (incremental value): Infeed per cut.
The tool will drill to the depth in one operation if:
1
n the plunging depth is greater than the depth 13
12
U Feedrate for plunging: Traversing speed during
penetration
U 1st side length 4: Slot length; specify the sign to
determine the first milling direction
U 2nd side length 5: Slot width
U Feed rate F: Traversing speed of the tool in the
working plane
Example: NC blocks
9 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
10 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+6
11 TOOL CALL 1 Z S1500
12 CYCL DEF 3.0 SLOT MILLING
16 CYCL DEF 3.4 X50
17 CYCL DEF 3.5 Y15
18 CYCL DEF 3.6 F120
19 L X+16 Y+25 R0 FMAX M3
20 L Z+2 M99

SLOT (oblong hole) with reciprocating plunge-
cut (Cycle 210)

During roughing the tool plunges into the material with a
sideward reciprocating motion from one end of the slot to
the other. Pilot drilling is therefore unnecessary.
The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width
and not smaller than a third of the slot width.
The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot
length. The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle.
Roughing process
1 At rapid traverse, the TNC positions the tool in the tool axis to the
2nd set-up clearance and subsequently to the center of the left
circle. From there, the TNC positions the tool to set-up clearance
above the workpiece surface. Z
Q207
2 The tool moves at the feed rate for milling to the workpiece
surface. From there, the cutter advances in the longitudinal Q200 Q204
direction of the slot — plunge-cutting obliquely into the material — Q203
until it reaches the center of the right circle.
Q202
3 The tool then moves back to the center of the left circle, again with
oblique plunge-cutting. This process is repeated until the Q201
programmed milling depth is reached.
4 At the milling depth, the TNC moves the tool for the purpose of
face milling to the other end of the slot and then back to the center X
of the slot.
Finishing process
5 The TNC advances the tool from the slot center tangentially to the Y
contour of the finished part. The tool subsequently climb mills the
contour (with M3), and if so entered, in more than one infeed.
6 When the tool reaches the end of the contour, it departs the
contour tangentially and returns to the center of the slot. Q218
7 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in rapid traverse FMAX Q224
to set-up clearance and — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up Q217
clearance.
Q219
X
Q216

Example: NC blocks

51 CYCL DEF 210 SLOT RECIP. PLNG
workpiece surface and bottom of slot Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
tool in mm/min while milling. Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
U Plunging depth Q202 (incremental value): Total Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
extent by which the tool is fed in the tool axis during
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
a reciprocating movement
U Machining operation (0/1/2) Q215: Define the
machining operation: Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
0: Roughing and finishing Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute Q218=80 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q219=12 ;SECOND SIDE LENGTH
U 2nd setup clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q224=+15 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and
workpiece (clamping devices) can occur Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING

the slot in the reference axis of the working plane
the slot in the minor axis of the working plane
U First side length Q218 (value parallel to the
reference axis of the working plane): Enter the length
of the slot
U Second side length Q219 (value parallel to the
secondary axis of the working plane): Enter the slot
width. If you enter a slot width that equals the tool
diameter, the TNC will carry out the roughing process
only (slot milling).
U Angle of rotation Q224 (absolute value): Angle by
which the entire slot is rotated. The center of rotation
lies in the center of the slot.
U Infeed for finishing Q338 (incremental value):
Infeed per cut. Q338=0: Finishing in one infeed.

CIRCULAR SLOT (oblong hole) with
reciprocating plunge-cut (Cycle 211)
Roughing process
1 At rapid traverse, the TNC positions the tool in the tool axis to the
2nd set-up clearance and subsequently to the center of the right
circle. From there, the tool is positioned to the programmed set-up
clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The tool moves at the milling feed rate to the workpiece surface.
From there, the cutter advances — plunge-cutting obliquely into
the material — to the other end of the slot.
3 The tool then moves at a downward angle back to the starting
point, again with oblique plunge-cutting. This process (2 to 3) is
repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached.
4 At the milling depth, the TNC moves the tool for the purpose of
face milling to the other end of the slot.
Finishing process
5 The TNC advances the tool from the slot center tangentially to the
contour of the finished part. The tool subsequently climb mills the
contour (with M3), and if so entered, in more than one infeed. The
starting point for the finishing process is the center of the right
circle.
6 When the tool reaches the end of the contour, it departs the
Z
contour tangentially.
Q207
7 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in rapid traverse FMAX
to set-up clearance and — if programmed — to the 2nd set-up Q204
Q200
clearance. Q203
Q202
Q201
During roughing the tool plunges into the material with a
helical sideward reciprocating motion from one end of the X
slot to the other. Pilot drilling is therefore unnecessary.
determines the working direction. If you program DEPTH Y
The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width
and not smaller than a third of the slot width. Q248
Q219
The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot Q24
4 Q245
length. The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle. Q217
X
Q216

Example: NC blocks

52 CYCL DEF 211 CIRCULAR SLOT
workpiece surface and bottom of slot Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
tool in mm/min while milling. Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
U Plunging depth Q202 (incremental value): Total Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
extent by which the tool is fed in the tool axis during
a reciprocating movement
U Machining operation (0/1/2) Q215: Define the
machining operation: Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
0: Roughing and finishing Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 (absolute Q244=80 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIAMETR
value): Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q219=12 ;SECOND SIDE LENGTH
U 2nd setup clearance Q204 (incremental value): Q245=+45 ;STARTING ANGLE
Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and
workpiece (clamping devices) can occur Q248=90 ;ANGULAR LENGTH
U Center in 1st axis Q216 (absolute value): Center of Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
the slot in the reference axis of the working plane
the slot in the minor axis of the working plane
U Pitch circle diameter Q244: Enter the diameter of
the pitch circle
U Second side length Q219: Enter the slot width. If you
enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter, the
TNC will carry out the roughing process only (slot
milling).
U Starting angle Q245 (absolute value): Enter the polar
angle of the starting point
U Angular length Q248 (incremental value): Enter the
angular length of the slot
U Infeed for finishing Q338 (incremental value):
Infeed per cut. Q338=0: Finishing in one infeed.

Example: Milling pockets, studs and slots
Y Y
90
100
90°
70
8 45°
R2
80
50
5
X Z
50 100 -40 -30 -20
0 BEGIN PGM C210 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+6 Define the tool for roughing/finishing
4 TOOL DEF 2 L+0 R+3 Define slotting mill
5 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3500 Call the tool for roughing/finishing
7 CYCL DEF 213 STUD FINISHING Define cycle for machining the contour outside
Q201=-30 ;DEPTH
Q207=250 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLNG
Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q219=80 ;SECOND SIDE LENGTH

Q220=0 ;CORNER RADIUS
Q221=5 ;ALLOWANCE
8 CYCL CALL M3 Call cycle for machining the contour outside
9 CYCL DEF 5.0 CIRCULAR POCKET Define CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle
13 CYCL DEF 5.4 RADIUS 25
14 CYCL DEF 5.5 F400 DR+
15 L Z+2 R0 F MAX M99 Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle
16 L Z+250 R0 F MAX M6 Tool change
17 TOOL CALL 2 Z S5000 Call slotting mill
18 CYCL DEF 211 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle definition for slot 1
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q244=70 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIA.
Q245=+45 ;STARTING ANGLE
Q248=90 ;ANGULAR LENGTH
Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
19 CYCL CALL M3 Call cycle for slot 1
20 FN 0: Q245 = +225 New starting angle for slot 2
21 CYCL CALL Call cycle for slot 2
23 END PGM C210 MM

8.5 Cycles for Machining Hole
8.5 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns
Patterns
Overview
The TNC provides two cycles for machining hole patterns directly:
Cycle Soft key

220 CIRCULAR PATTERN
221 LINEAR PATTERN
You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed
cycles:
If you have to machine irregular hole patterns, use CYCL

CALL PAT (see “Point Tables” on page 206) to develop
point tables.
Cycle 1 PECKING
Cycle 2 TAPPING with a floating tap holder
Cycle 3 SLOT MILLING
Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING
Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING
Cycle 17 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder
Cycle 18 THREAD CUTTING
Cycle 200 DRILLING
Cycle 201 REAMING
Cycle 202 BORING
Cycle 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING
Cycle 204 BACK BORING
Cycle 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING
Cycle 206 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder
Cycle 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW without a floating tap holder
Cycle 208 BORE MILLING
Cycle 209 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING
Cycle 212 POCKET FINISHING
Cycle 213 STUD FINISHING
Cycle 214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING
Cycle 215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING
Cycle 262 THREAD MILLING
Cycle 263 THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING
Cycle 264 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING
Cycle 265 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING
Cycle 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING

CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220)
1 At rapid traverse, the TNC moves the tool from its current position
to the starting point for the first machining operation. Y
Sequence: N = Q241
n Move to 2nd set-up clearance (spindle axis) Q247
n Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Q246
Q24
n Move to set-up clearance above the workpiece surface (spindle 4 Q245
axis) Q217
2 From this position, the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle.
3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining
operation on a straight line at set-up clearance (or 2nd set-up
clearance).
4 This process (1 to 3) is repeated until all machining operations have
been executed. X
Q216
Cycle 220 is DEF active, which means that Cycle 220
automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle.
If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200
to 208, 212 to 215, 262 to 265 or 267, the set-up Z
clearance, workpiece surface and 2nd set-up clearance
that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the
selected fixed cycle. Q200 Q204
Q203

the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working
plane
the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane
U Pitch circle diameter Q244: Diameter of the pitch X
circle
Example: NC blocks
U Starting angle Q245 (absolute value): Angle
between the reference axis of the working plane and 53 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN
the starting point for the first machining operation on
the pitch circle Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
U Stopping angle Q246 (absolute value): Angle Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
between the reference axis of the working plane and Q244=80 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIAMETR
the starting point for the last machining operation on
the pitch circle (does not apply to complete circles). Q245=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE
Do not enter the same value for the stopping angle Q246=+360 ;STOPPING ANGLE
and starting angle. If you enter the stopping angle
greater than the starting angle, machining will be Q247=+0 ;STEPPING ANGLE
carried out counterclockwise; otherwise, machining Q241=8 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
will be clockwise.
Q301=1 ;TRAVERSE TO CLEARANCE HEIGHT

8.5 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns U Stepping angle Q247 (incremental value): Angle
between two machining operations on a pitch circle.
If you enter an angle step of 0, the TNC will calculate
the angle step from the starting and stopping angles
and the number of pattern repetitions. If you enter a
value other than 0, the TNC will not take the stopping
angle into account. The sign for the angle step
determines the working direction (– = clockwise).
U Number of repetitions Q241: Number of machining
operations on a pitch circle
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a
positive value.
occur.
U Traversing to clearance height Q301: Definition of
how the tool is to move between machining
processes:
0: Move between operations to the set-up clearance
1: Move between operations to 2nd set-up clearance.

LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221)

Cycle 221 is DEF active, which means that Cycle 221 calls Z
the last defined fixed cycle automatically.
If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the fixed cycles 200 Y
to 208, 212 to 215, 262 to 265 or 267, the set-up
clearance, workpiece surface and 2nd set-up clearance
X
that you defined in Cycle 221 will be effective for the
selected fixed cycle.
1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position to
the starting point for the first machining operation.
Sequence:
n 2. Move to 2nd set-up clearance (spindle axis)
n Approach the starting point in the spindle axis
n Move to set-up clearance above the workpiece surface (spindle
axis) Y
2 From this position, the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle.
3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining 7
Q23
operation in the positive reference axis direction at set-up Q238
clearance (or 2nd set-up clearance).
4 This process (1 to 3) is repeated until all machining operations on 3
the first line have been executed. The tool is located above the last Q24
N=
point on the first line. 2
Q24
5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line N=
where it carries out the machining operation. Q224
Q226
6 From this position, the tool approaches the starting point for the
next machining operation in the negative reference axis direction.
7 This process (6) is repeated until all machining operations in the X
second line have been executed. Q225
8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line.
9 All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating movement.
Q200 Q204
Q203

Example: NC blocks
8.5 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns U Starting point 1st axis Q225 (absolute value):
Coordinate of the starting point in the reference axis
of the working plane 54 CYCL DEF 221 CARTESIAN PATTRN
U Starting point 2nd axis Q226 (absolute value): Q225=+15 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Coordinate of the starting point in the minor axis of Q226=+15 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND AXIS
the working plane
Q237=+10 ;SPACING IN 1ST AXIS
U Spacing in 1st axis Q237 (incremental value):
Spacing between the individual points on a line Q238=+8 ;SPACING IN 2ND AXIS
Q242=6 ;NUMBER OF COLUMNS
U Spacing in 2nd axis Q238 (incremental value):
Spacing between the individual lines Q243=4 ;NUMBER OF LINES
U Number of columns Q242: Number of machining Q224=+15 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
operations on a line Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Number of lines Q243: Number of passes Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
U Angle of rotation Q224 (absolute value): Angle by Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
which the entire pattern is rotated. The center of
rotation lies in the starting point. Q301=1 ;TRAVERSE TO CLEARANCE HEIGHT

occur.
U Traversing to clearance height Q301: Definition of
how the tool is to move between machining
processes:
0: Move to set-up clearance
1: Move to 2nd set-up clearance between the
measuring points.

Example: Circular hole patterns
100
R25
70 30°
R35
25
X
30 90 100
0 BEGIN PGM HOLEPAT MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
5 L Z+250 R0 F MAX M3 Retract the tool
6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: drilling
Q201=-15 ;DEPTH

7 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN Define cycle for circular pattern 1, CYCL 200 is called automatically,
Q216=+30 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q200, Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220.
Q246=+360 ;STOPPING ANGLE
Q247=+0 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Q241=10 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
8 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN Define cycle for circular pattern 2, CYCL 200 is called automatically,
Q216=+90 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q200, Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220.
Q246=+360 ;STOPPING ANGLE
Q247=+30 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Q241=5 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
10 END PGM HOLEPAT MM

8.6 SL cycles
8.6 SL cycles
Fundamentals
SL cycles enable you to form complex contours by combining up to 12 Example: Program structure: Machining with SL
subcontours (pockets or islands). You define the individual cycles
subcontours in subprograms. The TNC calculates the total contour
from the subcontours (subprogram numbers) that enter in Cycle 14 0 BEGIN PGM SL2 MM
CONTOUR GEOMETRY. ...
The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle (all 12 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY ...
contour subprograms) is limited to 48 kilobytes. The 13 CYCL DEF 20.0 CONTOUR DATA ...
number of possible contour elements depends on the
type of contour (inside or outside contour) and the number ...
of subcontours. For example, you can program up to 16 CYCL DEF 21.0 PILOT DRILLING
approx. 256 line blocks.
17 CYCL CALL
Characteristics of the subprograms ...

18 CYCL DEF 22.0 ROUGH-OUT
n Coordinate transformations are allowed. If they are programmed
within the subcontour they are also effective in the following 19 CYCL CALL
subprograms, but they need not be reset after the cycle call.
...
n The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M.
22 CYCL DEF 23.0 FLOOR FINISHING ...
n The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour,
for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius 23 CYCL CALL
compensation RR. ...
n The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the
contour, for example if you machine the contour clockwise with 26 CYCL DEF 24.0 SIDE FINISHING ...
radius compensation RL. 27 CYCL CALL
n The subprograms must not contain tool axis coordinates. ...
n The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the
50 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
subprogram. The secondary axes U,V,W are permitted.
Characteristics of the fixed cycles 51 LBL 1
n The TNC automatically positions the tool to set-up clearance before ...
a cycle. 55 LBL 0
n Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the 56 LBL 2
cutter traverses around islands instead of over them.
...
n The radius of “inside corners” can be programmed—the tool keeps
moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners (this applies 60 LBL 0
for the outermost pass in the Rough-out and Side-Finishing cycles).
...
n The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing.
99 END PGM SL2 MM
n For floor finishing, the tool again approaches the workpiece in a
tangential arc (for tool axis Z, for example, the arc may be in the Z/X
plane).
n The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up-cut milling.
With MP7420 you can determine where the tool is

positioned at the end of Cycles 21 to 24.
The machining data (such as milling depth, finishing allowance and

setup clearance) are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20.

8.6 SL cycles
Overview of SL cycles
Cycle Soft key

14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY (essential)
20 CONTOUR DATA (essential)
21 PILOT DRILLING (optional)
22 ROUGH-OUT (essential)
23 FLOOR FINISHING (optional)
24 SIDE FINISHING (optional)
Enhanced cycles:
Cycle Soft key

25 CONTOUR TRAIN
27 CYLINDER SURFACE
28 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling

8.6 SL cycles
CONTOUR GEOMETRY (Cycle 14)
All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are
listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY.
Before programming, note the following: C D

Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes A B
effective as soon as it is defined in the part program.
You can list up to 12 subprograms (subcontours) in
Cycle 14.
U Label numbers for the contour: Enter all label

numbers for the individual subprograms that are to be
superimposed to define the contour. Confirm every
label number with the ENT key. When you have
entered all numbers, conclude entry with the END
key.
S1
A B
S2
Example: NC blocks
12 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY

13 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1 /2 /3 /4
Overlapping contours
Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour. You can
thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an
island.
Subprograms: Overlapping pockets
The subsequent programming examples are contour

subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR
GEOMETRY in a main program.
Pockets A and B overlap.

8.6 SL cycles The TNC calculates the points of intersection S1 and S2 (they do not
have to be programmed).
The pockets are programmed as full circles.
Subprogram 1: Pocket A
51 LBL 1
52 L X+10 Y+50 RR
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0
Subprogram 2: Pocket B
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RR
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0
Area of inclusion
Both surfaces A and B are to be machined, including the mutually
overlapped area:
n The surfaces A and B must be pockets.
n The first pocket (in Cycle 14) must start outside the second pocket.
Surface A: B
51 LBL 1
52 L X+10 Y+50 RR A
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0
Surface B:
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RR
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0

8.6 SL cycles
Area of exclusion
Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B
n Surface A must be a pocket and B an island.
n A must start outside of B.
Surface A:
51 LBL 1
B
52 L X+10 Y+50 RR
A
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0
Surface B:
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RL
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0
Area of intersection
Only the area overlapped by both A and B is to be machined. (The
areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined.)
n A and B must be pockets.
n A must start inside of B.
Surface A:
A B
51 LBL 1
52 L X+60 Y+50 RR
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+60 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0
Surface B:
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RR
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0

8.6 SL cycles
CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20)
Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are
entered in Cycle 20.
Y
Cycle 20 is DEF active which means that it becomes
effective as soon as it is defined in the part program.
8
Q
determines the working direction. If you program depth =
0, the TNC does not execute that next cycle.
Q9=+1
The machining data entered in Cycle 20 are valid for Cycles
21 to 24.
If you are using the SL cycles in Q parameter programs,
the cycle parameters Q1 to Q19 cannot be used as k
program parameters.
X
U Millingdepth Q1 (incremental value): Distance

between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket
Z
U Path overlap factor Q2: Q2 x tool radius = stepover
factor k
U Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental
value): Finishing allowance in the working plane
U Finishing allowance for floor Q4 (incremental
value): Finishing allowance in the tool axis Q6
Q7
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 (absolute value): Q10 Q1
Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface
Q5
U Clearance height Q7 (absolute value): Absolute
X
height at which the tool cannot collide with the
workpiece (for intermediate positioning and retraction Example: NC blocks
at the end of the cycle)
57 CYCL DEF 20.0 CONTOUR DATA
U Inside corner radius Q8: Inside “corner” rounding
radius; entered value is referenced to the tool Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
midpoint path.
Q2=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
U Direction of rotation ? Clockwise = -1 Q9: Q3=+0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Machining direction for pockets
Q4=+0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
n Clockwise (Q9 = –1 up-cut milling for pocket and
island) Q5=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
n Counterclockwise (Q9 = +1 climb milling for pocket Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
and island)
Q7=+80 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
You can check the machining parameters during a program Q8=0.5 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
interruption and overwrite them if required.
Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION

8.6 SL cycles
REAMING (Cycle 21)
When calculating the infeed points, the TNC does not

account for the delta value DR programmed in a TOOL
CALL block. Y
In narrow areas, the TNC may not be able to carry out pilot
drilling with a tool that is larger than the rough-out tool.
Process
Same as Cycle 1, Pecking; see “Cycles for Drilling, Tapping and Thread
Milling,” page 209.
Application
Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points. It accounts
for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as well as the X
radius of the rough-out tool. The cutter infeed points also serve as
starting points for roughing.
U Plunging depth Q10 (incremental value): Dimension
Example: NC blocks
by which the tool drills in each infeed (negative sign
for negative working direction) 58 CYCL DEF 21.0 PILOT DRILLING
U Feed
rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed in Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
mm/min during drilling
U Rough-out tool number Q13: Tool number of the
roughing mill Q13=1 ;ROUGH-OUT TOOL

8.6 SL cycles
ROUGH-OUT (Cycle 22)
1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point, taking the
allowance for side into account.
2 In the first plunging depth, the tool mills the contour from inside
outward at the milling feed rate Q12.
3 The island contours (here: C/D) are cleared out with an approach A B
toward the pocket contour (here: A/B).
4 Then the TNC rough-mills the pocket contour retracts the tool to
the clearance height. C D
This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) or pilot
drilling with Cycle 21.

by which the tool plunges in each infeed
U Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of the Example: NC blocks
tool in mm/min during penetration
59 CYCL DEF 22.0 ROUGH-OUT
U Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed for
milling in mm/min Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
U Coarse roughing tool number Q18: Number of the Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
tool with which the TNC has already coarse-roughed Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
the contour. If there was no coarse roughing, enter
“0”; if you enter a value other than zero, the TNC will Q18=1 ;COARSE ROUGHING TOOL
only rough-out the portion that could not be machined Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED RATE
with the coarse roughing tool.
If the portion that is to be roughed cannot be
approached from the side, the TNC will mill in a
reciprocating plunge-cut; For this purpose you must
enter the tool length LCUTS in the tool table TOOL.T,
see “Tool Data,” page 99 and define the maximum
plunging ANGLE of the tool. The TNC will otherwise
generate an error message.
U Reciprocation feed rate Q19: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min during reciprocating plunge-cut

8.6 SL cycles
FLOOR FINISHING (Cycle 23)
The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for

finishing. The starting point depends on the available
space in the pocket.
The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly (in a vertically Z

tangential arc). The tool then clears the finishing allowance remaining
from rough-out.
U Feed rate for plunging: Traversing speed of the tool
during penetration Q12
U Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed for Q11
milling
Example: NC blocks
60 CYCL DEF 23.0 FLOOR FINISHING


8.6 SL cycles
SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24)
The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc.
Each subcontour is finish-milled separately.

The sum of allowance for side (Q14) and the radius of the Z
finish mill must be smaller than the sum of allowance for Q11
side (Q3, Cycle 20) and the radius of the rough mill.
This calculation also holds if you run Cycle 24 without
having roughed out with Cycle 22; in this case, enter “0” Q12
for the radius of the rough mill. Q10
The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for

finishing. The starting point depends on the available
space in the pocket.
X
U Direction of rotation ? Clockwise = -1 Q9:
Machining direction: Example: NC blocks
+1:Counterclockwise
-1:Clockwise 61 CYCL DEF 24.0 SIDE FINISHING
U Plunging depth Q10 (incremental value): Dimension Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION
Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
U Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of the
tool during penetration Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
U Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed for
milling Q14=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
value): Enter the allowed material for several finish-
milling operations. If you enter Q14 = 0, the remaining
finishing allowance will be cleared.

8.6 SL cycles
CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25)
In conjunction with Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY, this cycle
facilitates the machining of open contours (i.e. where the starting
point of the contour is not the same as its end point). Z
Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over Y
machining an open contour using positioning blocks:
n The TNC monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface
blemishes. It is recommended that you run a graphic simulation of
the contour before execution.
n If the radius of the selected tool is too large, the corners of the
contour may have to be reworked.
n The contour can be machined throughout by up-cut or by climb
milling. The type of milling even remains effective when the
contours are mirrored.
n The tool can traverse back and forth for milling in several infeeds: X
This results in faster machining.
n Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated
Example: NC blocks
rough-milling and finish-milling operations.
Before programming, note the following: 62 CYCL DEF 25.0 CONTOUR TRAIN
Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program DEPTH Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q5=+0 ;WORKPIECE SURFACE COORD.
The TNC takes only the first label of Cycle 14 CONTOUR Q7=+50 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
GEOMETRY into account.
Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle is
limited. For example, you can program up to 256 straight- Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
line blocks in one SL cycle. Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA is not required. Q1=-1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Positions that are programmed in incremental dimensions
immediately after Cycle 25 are referenced to the position
of the tool at the end of the cycle.
U Millingdepth Q1 (incremental value): Distance

between workpiece surface and contour floor
value): Finishing allowance in the working plane
U Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 (absolute value):
Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface
referenced to the workpiece datum
U Clearance height Q7 (absolute value): Absolute
height at which the tool cannot collide with the
workpiece. Position for tool retraction at the end of
the cycle.
U Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of the
tool in the tool axis

8.6 SL cycles U Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of the
tool in the working plane
U Climb or up-cut ? Up-cut = –1 Q15:
Climb milling: Input value = +1
Up-cut milling: Input value = –1
To enable climb milling and up-cut milling alternately
in several infeeds:Input value = 0

8.6 SL cycles
CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27)

This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and

then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3-D machining. Use Cycle 28 if
you wish to mill guide notches onto the cylinder surface.
The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle 14
CONTOUR GEOMETRY.
The subprogram contains coordinates in a rotary axis and in its parallel
axis. The rotary axis C, for example, is parallel to the Z axis. The path
functions L, CHF, CR, RND APPR (except APPR LCT) and DEP are
available.
The dimensions in the rotary axis can be entered as desired either in
degrees or in mm (or inches). You can select the desired dimension
type in the cycle definition.
1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point, taking the
allowance for side into account.
Z
2 At the first plunging depth, the tool mills along the programmed
contour at the milling feed rate Q12.
3 At the end of the contour, the TNC returns the tool to the setup
clearance and returns to the point of penetration;
4 Steps 1 to 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1
is reached.
5 Then the tool moves to the setup clearance.

limited. For example, you can program up to 256 straight-
line blocks in one SL cycle. C
This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641).
The cylinder must be set up centered on the rotary table.
The tool axis must be perpendicular to the rotary table. If
this is not the case, the TNC will generate an error
message.
This cycle can also be used in a tilted working plane.
The TNC checks whether the compensated and non-
compensated tool paths lie within the display range of the
rotary axis, which is defined in Machine Parameter 810.x.
If the error message “Contour programming error” is
output, set MP 810.x = 0.

Example: NC blocks
8.6 SL cycles U Milling depth Q1 (incremental value): Distance
between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the
contour 63 CYCL DEF 27.0 CYLINDER SURFACE
U Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental Q1=-8 ;MILLING DEPTH

value): Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
cylindrical surface. This allowance is effective in the
direction of the radius compensation Q6=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Set-upclearance Q6 (incremental value): Distance Q10=+3 ;PLUNGING DEPTH

between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
U Plunging depth Q10 (incremental value): Dimension Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q16=25 ;RADIUS
U Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of the Q17=0 ;DIMENSION TYPE (ANG/LIN)
U Cylinder radius Q16: Radius of the cylinder on which
the contour is to be machined
U Dimension type ? ang./lin. Q17: The dimensions for
the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in
degrees (0) or in mm/inches (1)

8.6 SL cycles
CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling (Cycle 28)

This cycle enables you to program a guide notch in two dimensions

and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface. Unlike Cycle 27, with this
cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that, with radius compensation
active, the walls of the slot are always parallel. Program the center-line
path of the contour.
1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point.
2 At the first plunging depth, the tool mills along the programmed
slot wall at the milling feed rate Q12 while respecting the finishing
allowance for the side.
3 At the end of the contour, the TNC moves the tool to the opposite
wall and returns to the infeed point.
4 Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1
is reached.
5 Then the tool moves to the setup clearance.
Z
limited. For example, you can program up to 256 straight-
line blocks in one SL cycle.
This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641).
The cylinder must be set up centered on the rotary table.
The tool axis must be perpendicular to the rotary table. If C
this is not the case, the TNC will generate an error
message.
This cycle can also be used in a tilted working plane.
The TNC checks whether the compensated and non-
compensated tool paths lie within the display range of the
rotary axis, which is defined in Machine Parameter 810.x.
If the error message “Contour programming error” is
output, set MP 810.x = 0.

Example: NC blocks
8.6 SL cycles U Milling depth Q1 (incremental value): Distance
between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the
contour 63 CYCL DEF 28.0 CYLINDER SURFACE
U Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental Q1=-8 ;MILLING DEPTH

value): Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
cylindrical surface. This allowance is effective in the
direction of the radius compensation Q6=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
U Set-upclearance Q6 (incremental value): Distance Q10=+3 ;PLUNGING DEPTH

between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING
U Plunging depth Q10 (incremental value): Dimension Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q16=25 ;RADIUS
U Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of the Q17=0 ;DIMENSION TYPE (ANG/LIN)
Q20=12 ;SLOT WIDTH
U Cylinder radius Q16: Radius of the cylinder on which
the contour is to be machined
U Dimension type ? ang./lin. Q17: The dimensions for
the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in
degrees (0) or in mm/inches (1)
U Slot width Q20: Width of the slot to be machined

8.6 SL cycles
Example: Roughing-out and fine-roughing a pocket
10
Y 10
R20
55
R30 60°
30
X
30
0 BEGIN PGM C20 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X-10 Y-10 Z-40
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 Define the workpiece blank
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+15 Tool definition: coarse roughing tool
4 TOOL DEF 2 L+0 R+7.5 Tool definition: fine roughing tool
5 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500 Tool call: coarse roughing tool
7 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Define contour subprogram
8 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1
9 CYCL DEF 20.0 CONTOUR DATA Define general machining parameters
Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q4=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q8=0.1 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
Q9=-1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION

8.6 SL cycles
10 CYCL DEF 22.0 ROUGH-OUT Cycle definition: Coarse roughing
Q18=0 ;COARSE ROUGHING TOOL
Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED RATE
11 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Coarse roughing
13 TOOL CALL 2 Z S3000 Tool call: fine roughing tool
14 CYCL DEF 22.0 ROUGH-OUT Define the fine roughing cycle
15 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Fine roughing
17 LBL 1 Contour subprogram

18 L X+0 Y+30 RR see “Example: FK programming 2,” page 169
19 FC DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
20 FL AN+60 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
21 FSELECT 3
22 FPOL X+30 Y+30
23 FC DR- R20 CCPR+55 CCPA+60
24 FSELECT 2
25 FL AN-120 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
26 FSELECT 3
27 FC X+0 DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
28 FSELECT 2
29 LBL 0
30 END PGM C20 MM

8.6 SL cycles
Example: Pilot drilling, roughing-out and finishing overlapping contours
Y
16 16
100
R2
5
16
50
5
R2
X
35 65 100
0 BEGIN PGM C21 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+6 Define tool: drill
4 TOOL DEF 2 L+0 R+6 Define the tool for roughing/finishing
5 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500 Call the drilling tool
8 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1 /2 /3 /4
9 CYCL DEF 20.0 CONTOUR DATA Define general machining parameters
Q3=+0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q4=+0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q8=0.1 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
Q9=-1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION

8.6 SL cycles
10 CYCL DEF 21.0 PILOT DRILLING Cycle definition: Pilot drilling
Q13=2 ;ROUGH-OUT TOOL
11 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Pilot drilling
13 TOOL CALL 2 Z S3000 Call the tool for roughing/finishing
14 CYCL DEF 22.0 ROUGH-OUT Cycle definition: Rough-out
15 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Rough-out
16 CYCL DEF 23.0 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle definition: Floor finishing
17 CYCL CALL Cycle call: Floor finishing
18 CYCL DEF 24.0 SIDE FINISHING Cycle definition: Side finishing
Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION
19 CYCL CALL Cycle call: Side finishing

8.6 SL cycles
21 LBL 1 Contour subprogram 1: left pocket
22 CC X+35 Y+50
23 L X+10 Y+50 RR
24 C X+10 DR-
25 LBL 0
26 LBL 2 Contour subprogram 2: right pocket
27 CC X+65 Y+50
28 L X+90 Y+50 RR
29 C X+90 DR-
30 LBL 0
31 LBL 3 Contour subprogram 3: square left island
32 L X+27 Y+50 RL
33 L Y+58
34 L X+43
35 L Y+42
36 L X+27
37 LBL 0
38 LBL 4 Contour subprogram 4: triangular right island
39 L X+65 Y+42 RL
40 L X+57
41 L X+65 Y+58
42 L X+73 Y+42
43 LBL 0
44 END PGM C21 MM

8.6 SL cycles
Example: Contour train
Y
100
95
R7
5
R7,
,5
80
75
20
15
X
5 50 100
0 BEGIN PGM C25 MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
8 CYCL DEF 25.0 CONTOUR TRAIN Define machining parameters
9 CYCL CALL M3 Call the cycle

8.6 SL cycles
12 L X+0 Y+15 RL
13 L X+5 Y+20
14 CT X+5 Y+75
15 L Y+95
16 RND R7.5
17 L X+50
18 RND R7.5
19 L X+100 Y+80
20 LBL 0
21 END PGM C25 MM

8.6 SL cycles
Example: Cylinder surface
Note:
n Cylinder centered on rotary table.
n Datum at center of rotary table Z
,5
R7
60
20
C
30 50 157
0 BEGIN PGM C27 MM

2 TOOL CALL 1 Y S2000 Call tool, tool axis is Y
3 L Y+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
4 L X+0 R0 FMAX Position tool on rotary table center
7 CYCL DEF 27.0 CYLINDER SURFACE Define machining parameters
Q16=25 ;RADIUS
Q17=1 ;DIMENSION TYPE (ANG/LIN)
8 L C+0 R0 F MAX M3 Pre-position rotary table
10 L Y+250 R0 F MAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program

8.6 SL cycles
12 L C+40 Z+20 RL Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm (Q17=1)
13 L C+50
14 RND R7.5
15 L Z+60
16 RND R7.5
17 L IC-20
18 RND R7.5
19 L Z+20
20 RND R7.5
21 L C+40
22 LBL 0
23 END PGM C27 MM

8.7 Cycles for multipass milling
Overview
The TNC offers three cycles for machining the following surface types:
n Created by digitizing or with a CAD/CAM system
n Flat, rectangular surfaces
n Flat, oblique-angled surfaces
n Surfaces that are inclined in any way
n Twisted surfaces
Cycle Soft key
30 RUN DIGITIZED DATA
For multipass milling of digitized surface data in
several infeeds
230 MULTIPASS MILLING

For flat rectangular surfaces
231 RULED SURFACE

For oblique, inclined or twisted surfaces

RUN DIGITIZED DATA (Cycle 30)
1 From the current position, the TNC positions the tool in rapid
traverse FMAX in the tool axis to the set-up clearance above the
MAX point that you have programmed in the cycle.
2 The tool then moves in FMAX in the working plane to the MIN
point you have programmed in the cycle.
3 From this point, the tool advances to the first contour point at the
feed rate for plunging.
4 The TNC subsequently processes all points that are stored in the
digitizing data file at the feed rate for milling. If necessary, the TNC 14
retracts the tool between machining operations to set-up
clearance if specific areas are to be left unmachined.
5 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in FMAX to set-up
clearance.

You can use Cycle 30 to run digitizing data and PNT files.
If you want to run PNT files in which no tool axis
coordinate is programmed, the milling depth is derived
from the programmed MIN point in the tool axis.
13
U PGM Name digitizing data: Enter the name of the file
in which the digitizing data is stored. If the file is not Z
stored in the current directory, enter the complete
path. If you wish to execute a point table, enter also 12
the file type .PNT.
U Min. point of range: Lowest coordinates (X, Y and Z 1 X
coordinates) in the range to be milled
U Max. point of range: Highest coordinates (X, Y and Z
coordinates) in the range to be milled
between tool tip and workpiece surface for tool
movements in rapid traverse Example: NC blocks
U Plunging depth 2 (incremental value): Infeed per cut 64 CYCL DEF 30.0 RUN DIGITIZED DATA
U Feed rate for plunging 3: Traversing speed of the 65 CYCL DEF 30.1 PGM DIGIT.: BSP.H
tool in mm/min during penetration
66 CYCL DEF 30.2 X+0 Y+0 Z-20
U Feed rate for milling 4: Traversing speed of the tool
in mm/min while milling. 67 CYCL DEF 30.3 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
U Miscellaneous function M: Optional entry of a
miscellaneous function, for example M13 69 CYCL DEF 30.5 PLNGNG +5 F100
70 CYCL DEF 30.6 F350 M8

MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230)
1 From the current position in the working plane, the TNC positions
the tool in rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1; the TNC
moves the tool by its radius to the left and upward. Z
2 The tool then moves in FMAX in the tool axis to set-up clearance.
From there it approaches the programmed starting position in the
tool axis at the feed rate for plunging.
3 The tool then moves as the programmed feed rate for milling to Y
the end point 2. The TNC calculates the end point from the 12
programmed starting point, the program length, and the tool
radius.
4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at
the stepover feed rate. The offset is calculated from the 1 X
programmed width and the number of cuts.
5 The tool then returns in the negative direction of the first axis.
6 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has
been completed.
7 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in FMAX to set-up
clearance.

From the current position, the TNC positions the tool at
the starting point 1, first in the working plane and then in
the tool axis.
Pre-position the tool in such a way that no collision
between tool and clamping devices can occur.

U Starting point in 1st axis Q225 (absolute value):
Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be Y
multipass-milled in the reference axis of the working Q207
plane
U Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 (absolute value):
Minimum-point coordinate of the surface to be
multipass-milled in the minor axis of the working N = Q240
Q219
plane
Q209
U Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 (absolute value):
Height in the spindle axis at which multipass-milling is
carried out
Q226
U First side length Q218 (incremental value): Length
of the surface to be multipass-milled in the reference
axis of the working plane, referenced to the starting Q218 X
point in 1st axis Q225
U Second side length Q219 (incremental value): Length

of the surface to be multipass-milled in the minor axis
of the working plane, referenced to the starting point
in 2nd axis Q206
U Number of cuts Q240: Number of passes to be made Z
over the width
U Feed rate for plunging 206: Traversing speed of the Q200
tool in mm/min when moving from set-up clearance Q227
to the milling depth
U Stepover feed rate Q209: Traversing speed of the
tool in mm/min when moving to the next pass. If you
are moving the tool transversely in the material, enter
Q209 to be smaller than Q207 If you are moving it X
transversely in the open, Q209 may be greater than
Q207. Example: NC blocks
U Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental value): Distance 71 CYCL DEF 230 MULTIPASS MILLNG
between tool tip and milling depth for positioning at
the start and end of the cycle. Q225=+10 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Q226=+12 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND AXIS
Q227=+2.5 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND AXIS
Q240=25 ;NUMBER OF CUTS
Q209=200 ;STEPOVER FEED RATE

RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231)
1 From the current position, the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3-
D movement to the starting point 1.
2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed Z
rate for milling. 14
3 From this point, the tool moves in rapid traverse FMAX by the tool
diameter in the positive tool axis direction, and then back to 13
starting point 1. Y 1
4 At the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool back to the last
traversed Z value.
5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point 1 in the
direction of point 4 to the next line. 12
X
6 From this point, the tool moves to the stopping point on this pass.
The TNC calculates the end point from point 2 and a movement in
the direction of point 3.
7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has
been completed.
8 At the end of the cycle, the tool is positioned above the highest
programmed point in the tool axis, offset by the tool diameter. Z
Cutting motion
The starting point, and therefore the milling direction, is selectable 14
because the TNC always moves from point 1 to point 2 and in the total
movement from point 1 / 2 to point 3 / 4. You can program point 1at
any corner of the surface to be machined. 13
Y
If you are using an end mill for the machining operation, you can 1
optimize the surface finish in the following ways
n A shaping cut (spindle axis coordinate of point 1 greater than 12
spindle-axis coordinate of point 2) for slightly inclined surfaces.
n A drawing cut (spindle axis coordinate of point 1 smaller than
spindle-axis coordinate of point 2) for steep surfaces. X
n When milling twisted surfaces, program the main cutting direction
(from point 1 to point 2) parallel to the direction of the steeper
inclination.
If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation, you can Z
optimize the surface finish in the following way
n When milling twisted surfaces, program the main cutting direction 13
(from point 1 to point 2) perpendicular to the direction of the
steepest inclination.
12
Y
The TNC positions the tool from the current position 14
in a linear 3-D movement to the starting point 1. Pre-
position the tool in such a way that no collision between
1
tool and clamping devices can occur.
The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation R0 to X
the programmed positions.
If required, use a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641).

U Starting point in 1st axis Q225 (absolute value):
Starting point coordinate of the surface to be
multipass-milled in the reference axis of the working Z
plane
U Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 (absolute value):
14
multipass-milled in the minor axis of the working Q236
plane 13
Q233 1
U Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 (absolute value):
Q227
multipass-milled in the tool axis 12
Q230
U 2nd point in 1st axis Q228 (absolute value):
Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be X
multipass milled in the reference axis of the working Q228 Q231 Q234 Q225
plane
U 2nd point in 2nd axis Q229 (absolute value):
Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be Y
multipass milled in the minor axis of the working
plane
Q235
14
U 2nd point in 3rd axis Q230 (absolute value): 13
Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be Q232
multipass milled in the tool axis
N = Q240
U 3rdpoint in 1st axis Q231 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point 3 in the reference axis of the
working plane 12
Q229
U 3rd point in 2nd axis Q232 (absolute value): 1
Coordinate of point 3 in the minor axis of the working Q226
plane Q207
U 3rdpoint in 3rd axis Q233 (absolute value): X

Coordinate of point 3 in the tool axis

Example: NC blocks
8.7 Cycles for multipass milling U 4thpoint in 1st axis Q234 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point 4 in the reference axis of the
working plane 72 CYCL DEF 231 RULED SURFACE
U 4th point in 2nd axis Q235 (absolute value): Q225=+0 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Coordinate of point 4 in the minor axis of the working Q226=+5 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND AXIS
plane
Q227=-2 ;STARTING PNT 3RD AXIS
U 4thpoint in 3rd axis Q236 (absolute value):
Coordinate of point 4 in the tool axis Q228=+100 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
Q229=+15 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
U Numberof cuts Q240: Number of passes to be made
between points 1 and 4, 2 and 3. Q230=+5 ;2ND POINT 3RD AXIS
U Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the Q231=+15 ;3RD POINT 1ST AXIS
tool in mm/min while milling. The TNC performs the Q232=+125 ;3RD POINT 2ND AXIS
first step at half the programmed feed rate.
Q233=+25 ;3RD POINT 3RD AXIS
Q234=+15 ;4TH POINT 1ST AXIS
Q235=+125 ;4TH POINT 2ND AXIS
Q236=+25 ;4TH POINT 3RD AXIS

Example: Multipass milling
Y Y
100
X Z
100 35
0 BEGIN PGM C230 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z+0 Define the workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+40
6 CYCL DEF 230 MULTIPASS MILLNG Cycle definition: MULTIPASS MILLING
Q225=+0 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Q226=+0 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND AXIS
Q227=+35 ;STARTNG PNT 3RD AXIS
Q209=150 ;STEPOVER FEED RATE

7 L X+-25 Y+0 R0 F MAX M3 Pre-position near the starting point
10 END PGM C230 MM

8.8 Coordinate Transformation
8.8 Coordinate Transformation Cycles

Cycles
Overview
Once a contour has been programmed, you can position it on the
workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use
of coordinate transformations. The TNC provides the following
coordinate transformation cycles:
Cycle Soft key

7 DATUM SHIFT
For shifting contours directly within the program or
from datum tables
247 DATUM SETTING

Datum setting during program run
8 MIRROR IMAGE
Mirroring contours
10 ROTATION
For rotating contours in the working plane
11 SCALING FACTOR
For increasing or reducing the size of contours
26 AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING FACTOR

For increasing or reducing the size of contours with
scaling factors for each axis
19 WORKING PLANE
For executing machining operations in a tilted
coordinate system
for machines with tilting heads
and/or rotary tables
Effect of coordinate transformations

Beginning of effect: A coordinate transformation becomes effective as
soon as it is defined — it is not called. It remains in effect until it is
changed or canceled.
To cancel coordinate transformations:
n Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value, such as scaling
factor 1.0
n Execute a miscellaneous function M02, M30, or an END PGM block
(depending on machine parameter 7300)
n Select a new program
n Program miscellaneous function M142 Erasing modal program
information

DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7)
A datum shift allows machining operations to be repeated at various
locations on the workpiece. Z
Effect Z
Y Y
When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined, all coordinate data is based X
on the new datum. The TNC displays the datum shift in each axis in
the additional status display. Input of rotary axes is also permitted.
U Datum shift: Enter the coordinates of the new datum. X
Absolute values are referenced to the manually set
workpiece datum. Incremental values are always
referenced to the datum which was last valid — this
can be a datum which has already been shifted.
Cancellation
A datum shift is canceled by entering the datum shift coordinates X=0,
Y=0 and Z=0.
Graphics
If you program a new BLK FORM after a datum shift, you can use Z
machine parameter 7310 to determine whether the BLK FORM is Y
referenced to the current datum or to the original datum. Referencing
a new BLK FORM to the current datum enables you to display each
part in a program in which several pallets are machined. IY
Status Displays
X
n The actual position values are referenced to the active (shifted) IX
datum.
n All of the position values shown in the additional status display are
referenced to the manually set datum.
Example: NC blocks
13 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT

14 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+60
16 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z-5
15 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+40

DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7)
If you are using datum shifts with datum tables, then use
the SEL TABLE function to activate the desired datum
table from the NC program. Z
If you work without SEL-TABLE, then you must activate
Y
the desired datum table before the test run or the program N5
run. (This applies also for the programming graphics). N4
N3
n Use the file management to select the desired table for N2 X
a test run in the Test Run operating mode: The table N1
receives the status S. N0
n Use the file management in a program run mode to
select the desired table for a program run: The table
receives the status M.
Datums from a datum table can be referenced either to
the current datum or to the machine datum (depending on
machine parameter 7475).
The coordinate values from datum tables are only effective
with absolute coordinate values.
New lines can only be inserted at the end of the table. Z
Y
Function N2
Datum tables are used for
N1 X
n frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on Y2
the workpiece
n frequent use of the same datum shift Y1 N0
Within a program, you can either program datum points directly in the X2
X1
cycle definition or call them from a datum table.
U Datum shift: Enter the number of the datum from the
datum table or a Q parameter. If you enter a Q
parameter, the TNC activates the datum number
found in the Q parameter.
Example: NC blocks
Cancellation
n Call a datum shift to the coordinates 77 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
X=0; Y=0 etc. from a datum table 78 CYCL DEF 7.1 #5
n Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X=0; Y=0 etc. directly with
a cycle definition.

8.8 Coordinate Transformation Cycles Selecting a datum table in the part program
With the SEL TABLE function you select the table from which the TNC
takes the datums:
U Toselect the functions for program call, press the
PGM CALL key.
U Press the TOOL TABLE soft key.
U Enter the complete path name of the datum table and
confirm your entry with the END key.
Program a SEL TABLE block before Cycle 7 Datum Shift.

A datum table selected with SEL TABLE remains active
until you select another datum table with SEL TABLE or
through PGM MGT.
Editing a datum table

Select the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of
operation.
U To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key, see
“File Management: Fundamentals,” page 39.
U Display the datum tables: Press the soft keys SELECT
TYPE and SHOW .D.
U Select the desired table or enter a new file name.
U Edit the file. The soft-key row comprises the following
functions for editing:
Function Soft key

Select end of table
Go to the next page
Go to the next page
Insert line (only possible at the end of table)
Delete line
Confirm the entered line and go to the beginning of

the next line
Add the entered number of lines (reference points)

to the end of the table.

Edit a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode.
In a program run mode you can select the active datum table. Press
the DATUM TABLE soft key. You can then use the same editing
functions as in the Programming and Editing mode of operation.
Configuring the datum table

On the second and third soft-key rows you can define for each datum
table the axes for which you wish to set the datums. In the standard
setting all of the axes are active. If you wish to exclude an axis, set the
corresponding soft key to OFF. The TNC then deletes that column
from the datum table.
If you do not wish to define a datum table for an active axis, press the
NO ENT key. The TNC then enters a dash in the corresponding
column.
To leave a datum table

Select a different type of file in file management and choose the
desired file.
Status Displays
If datums in the table are referenced to the machine datum, then:
n The actual position values are referenced to the active (shifted)
datum.
n All of the position values shown in the additional status display are
referenced to the machine datum, whereby the TNC accounts for
the manually set datum.

DATUM SETTING (Cycle 247)
With the cycle DATUM SETTING, you can activate a datum defined in
a datum table as the new datum. Z
Effect Z
Y Y
After a DATUM SETTING cycle definition, all of the coordinate inputs X
and datum shifts (absolute and incremental) are referenced to the new
datum. Setting datums for rotary axes is also possible.
U Number for datum?: Enter the number of the datum in X
the datum table.
Cancellation
You can reactivate the last datum set in the Manual mode by entering
the miscellaneous function M104.
The TNC only sets the datum for those axes which are
active in the datum table. An axis displayed as a column in
the datum table, but not existing on the TNC, will cause an
error message. Example: NC blocks
Cycle 247 always interprets the values saved in the datum 13 CYCL DEF 247 DATUM SETTING
table as coordinates referenced to the machine datum.
Machine parameter 7475 has no influence on this. Q339=4 ;DATUM NUMBER
When using Cycle 247, you cannot use the block scan
function for mid-program startup.
Cycle G247 is not functional in Test Run mode.

MIRROR IMAGE (Cycle 8)
The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working
plane. Z
Y
Effect
The mirror image cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in
the program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation. The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status X
display.
n If you mirror only one axis, the machining direction of the tool is
reversed (except in fixed cycles).
n If you mirror two axes, the machining direction remains the same.
The result of the mirror image depends on the location of the datum:
n If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored, the element simply
flips over.
n If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored, the element
also “jumps” to another location.
If you mirror only one axis, the machining direction is
reversed for the new machining cycles (cycles 2xx). The
machining direction remains the same for older machining Z
cycles, such as Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING.

8.8 Coordinate Transformation Cycles U Mirrored axis?: Enter the axis to be mirrored. You can
mirror all axes, including rotary axes, except for the
spindle axis and its auxiliary axes. You can enter up to
three axes. Z
Reset
Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT. Y
Example: NC blocks
79 CYCL DEF 8.0 MIRROR IMAGE

80 CYCL DEF 8.1 X Y U

ROTATION (Cycle 10)
The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum in
the working plane within a program. Z
Effect Z
Y
The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the X
Y
program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation. The active rotation angle is shown in the additional status
display. X
Reference axis for the rotation angle:
n X/Y plane X axis
n Y/Z plane Y axis
n Z/X plane Z axis
An active radius compensation is canceled by defining
Cycle 10 and must therefore be reprogrammed, if
necessary.
After defining Cycle 10, you must move both axes of the
working plane to activate rotation for all axes.
U Rotation: Enter the rotation angle in degrees (°). Input

range: –360° to +360° (absolute or incremental).
Cancellation
Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of 0°.
Example: NC blocks
12 CALL LBL1
16 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG
17 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+35
18 CALL LBL1

SCALING FACTOR (Cycle 11)
The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program,
enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances. Z
Effect
Y Z
The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in Y
the program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of X
operation. The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status
display. X
Scaling factor
n in the working plane, or on all three coordinate axes at the same
time (depending on machine parameter 7410)
n to the dimensions in cycles
n to the parallel axes U,V,W
Prerequisite
It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour
before enlarging or reducing the contour.
U Scaling factor ?: Enter the scaling factor SCL. The
TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL
factor (as described under “Effect” above)
Enlargement: SCL greater than 1 (up to 99.999 999)

Reduction: SCL less than 1 (down to 0.000 001)
Cancellation
Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor
of 1.
Example: NC blocks
11 CALL LBL1
15 CYCL DEF 11.0 SCALING
16 CYCL DEF 11.1 SCL 0.75
17 CALL LBL1

AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26)

Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be
Y
enlarged or reduced by the same factor.
You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis-
specific scaling factor.
CC
In addition, you can enter the coordinates of a center for all
scaling factors.
The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with
reference to the center, and not necessarily (as in Cycle 11
SCALING FACTOR) with reference to the active datum.
Effect
X
The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in
the program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation. The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status
display.
U Axis and scaling factor: Enter the coordinate axis/
axes as well as the factor(s) involved in enlarging or
reducing. Enter a positive value up to 99.999 999.
U Center coordinates: Enter the center of the axis-
specific enlargement or reduction.
The coordinate axes are selected with soft keys.
Cancellation
Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor
of 1 for the same axis.
Example: NC blocks
25 CALL LBL1
26 CYCL DEF 26.0 AXIS-SPEC. SCALING
27 CYCL DEF 26.1 X 1.4 Y 0.6 CCX+15 CCY+20
28 CALL LBL1

WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19)
The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to

the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder.
With some swivel heads and tilting tables, the machine
tool builder determines whether the entered angles are
interpreted as coordinates of the tilt axes or as
mathematical angles of a tilted plane. Refer to your
machine manual.
The working plane is always tilted around the active

datum.
For fundamentals, see “Tilting the working plane,” page
24. Please read this section completely.
Effect
In Cycle 19 you define the position of the working plane — i.e. the
position of the tool axis referenced to the machine coordinate system
— by entering tilt angles. There are two ways to determine the
position of the working plane:
n Enter the position of the tilting axes directly.
n Describe the position of the working plane using up to 3 rotations
(spatial angle) of the machine-referenced coordinate system. The
required spatial angle can be calculated by cutting a perpendicular
line through the tilted working plane and considering it from the axis
around which you wish to tilt. With two spatial angles, every tool
position in space can be defined exactly.
Note that the position of the tilted coordinate system, and

therefore also all movement in the tilted system, are
dependent on your description of the tilted plane.
If you program the position of the working plane via spatial angles, the
TNC will calculate the required angle positions of the tilted axes
automatically and will store these in the parameters Q120 (A axis) to
Q122 (C axis). If two solutions are possible, the TNC will choose the
shorter path from the zero position of the rotary axes.
The axes are always rotated in the same sequence for calculating the
tilt of the plane: The TNC first rotates the A axis, then the B axis, and
finally the C axis.
Cycle 19 becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program. As
soon as you move an axis in the tilted system, the compensation for
this specific axis is activated. You have to move all axes to activate
compensation for all axes.

If you set the function TILTING program run to ACTIVE in the Manual
Operation mode see “Tilting the working plane,” page 24, the angular
value entered in this menu is overwritten by Cycle 19 WORKING
PLANE.
U Tilt axis and tilt angle?: The axes of rotation
together with the associated tilt angles. The rotary
axes A, B and C are programmed using soft keys.
If the TNC automatically positions the rotary axes, you can enter the
following parameters
U Feed rate ? F=: Traverse speed of the rotary axis
during automatic positioning
U Set-up clearance ? (incremental value): The TNC
positions the tilting head so that the position that
results from the extension of the tool by the set-up
clearance does not change relative to the workpiece.
Cancellation
To cancel the tilt angle, redefine the WORKING PLANE cycle and enter
an angular value of 0° for all axes of rotation. You must then program
the WORKING PLANE cycle once again by answering the dialog
question with the NO ENT key to disable the function.
Position the axis of rotation
The machine tool builder determines whether Cycle 19

positions the axes of rotation automatically or whether
they must be pre-positioned in the program. Refer to your
machine manual.
If the rotary axes are positioned automatically in Cycle 19:

n The TNC can position only controlled axes
n In order for the tilted axes to be positioned, you must enter a feed
rate and a set-up clearance in addition to the tilting angles, during
cycle definition.
n You can use only preset tools (with the full tool length defined in the
TOOL DEF block or in the tool table).
n The position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece surface
remains nearly unchanged after tilting
n The TNC tilts the working plane at the last programmed feed rate.
The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the
complexity of the swivel head or tilting table.
If the axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle 19, position them
before defining the cycle, for example with an L block.
Example NC blocks:
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
11 L X+25 Y+10 R0 FMAX
12 L B+15 R0 F1000 Position the axis of rotation
13 CYCL DEF 19.0 WORKING PLANE Define the angle for calculation of the compensation
14 CYCL DEF 19.1 B+15

15 L Z+80 R0 FMAX Activate compensation for the tool axis
16 L X-7.5 Y-10 R0 FMAX Activate compensation for the working plane
Position display in the tilted system

On activation of Cycle 19, the displayed positions (ACTL and NOML) and
the datum indicated in the additional status display are referenced to
the tilted coordinate system. The positions displayed immediately
after cycle definition may not be the same as the coordinates of the
last programmed position before Cycle 19.
Workspace monitoring
The TNC monitors only those axes in the tilted coordinate system that
are moved. If necessary, the TNC outputs an error message.
Positioning in a tilted coordinate system

With the miscellaneous function M130 you can move the tool, while
the coordinate system is tilted, to positions that are referenced to the
non-tilted coordinate system see “Miscellaneous Functions for
Coordinate Data,” page 178.
Positioning movements with straight lines that are referenced to the
machine coordinate system (blocks with M91 or M92), can also be
executed in a tilted working plane. Constraints:
n Positioning is without length compensation.
n Positioning is without machine geometry compensation.
n Tool radius compensation is not permitted.

Combining coordinate transformation cycles
When combining coordinate transformation cycles, always make sure
the working plane is swiveled around the active datum. You can
program a datum shift before activating Cycle 19. In this case, you are
shifting the “machine-based coordinate system.”
If you program a datum shift after having activated Cycle 19, you are
shifting the “tilted coordinate system.”
Important: When resetting the cycles, use the reverse sequence used
for defining the them:
1. Activate the datum shift.
2nd: Activate tilting function.
3rd: Activate rotation.
...
Machining
...
1st: Reset the rotation.
2nd: Reset the tilting function.
3rd: Reset the datum shift.
Automatic workpiece measurement in the tilted system

The TNC measuring cycles enable you to have the TNC measure a work-
piece in a tilted system automatically. The TNC stores the measured
data in Q parameters for further processing (for example, for printout).
Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE
1 Write the program

U Define the tool (not required, when TOOL.T is active), and enter the
full tool length.
U Call the tool.
U Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is no
danger of collision with the workpiece (clamping devices) during
tilting.
U If required, position the tilt axis or axes with an L block to the
appropriate angular value(s) (depending on a machine parameter).
U Activate datum shift if required.
U Define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE; enter the angular values for the
tilt axes.
U Traverse all main axes (X, Y, Z) to activate compensation.
U Write the program as if the machining process were to be executed
in a non-tilted plane.
U If required, define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE with other angular
values to execute machining in a different axis position. In this case,
it is not necessary to reset Cycle 19. You can define the new angular
values directly.
U Reset Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE; program 0° for all tilt axes.
U Disable the WORKING PLANE function; redefine Cycle 19 and
answer the dialog question with NO ENT.
U Reset datum shift if required.
U Position the tilt axes to the 0° position, if required.

8.8 Coordinate Transformation Cycles 2 Clamp the workpiece
3 Preparations in the operating mode

Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)
Pre-position the tilt axis/axes to the corresponding angular value(s) for
setting the datum. The angular value depends on the selected
reference plane on the workpiece.
4 Preparations in the operating mode

Manual Operation
Use the 3D-ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE
to ACTIVE in the Manual Operation mode. Enter the angular values for
the tilt axes into the menu if the axes are not controlled.
If the axes are not controlled, the angular values entered in the menu
must correspond to the actual position(s) of the tilted axis or axes,
respectively. The TNC will otherwise calculate a wrong datum.
5 Set the datum

n Manually by touching the workpiece with the tool in the untilted
coordinate system see “Datum Setting(Without a 3-D Touch
Probe),” page 22
n Automatically by using a HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe (see the
new Touch Probe Cycles Manual, chapter 2)
n Automatically by using a HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe (see the
new Touch Probe Cycles Manual, chapter 3)
6 Start the part program in the operating mode Program Run, Full
Sequence
7 Manual Operation mode

Use the 3D-ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE
to INACTIVE. Enter an angular value of 0° for each axis in the menu
see “To activate manual tilting:,” page 27.

Example: Coordinate transformation cycles
Program sequence
n Program the coordinate transformations in R5
10
the main program Y R5
n For subprograms within a subprogram, see
10
130 X
“Subprograms,” page 343
20 10
45°
30
65
X
65 130
0 BEGIN PGM KOUMR MM

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+130 Y+130 Z+0
6 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center
7 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+65
8 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+65
9 CALL LBL 1 Call milling operation
10 LBL 10 Set label for program section repeat
11 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG Rotate by 45° (incremental)
12 CYCL DEF 10.1 IROT+45
13 CALL LBL 1 Call milling operation
14 CALL LBL 10 REP 6/6 Return jump to LBL 10; execute the milling operation six times
15 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG Reset the rotation
17 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Reset the datum shift
18 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
19 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0

21 LBL 1 Subprogram 1:
22 L X+0 Y+0 R0 F MAX Define milling operation
23 L Z+2 R0 F MAX M3
24 L Z-5 R0 F200
25 L X+30 RL
26 L IY+10
27 RND R5
28 L IX+20
29 L IX+10 IY-10
30 RND R5
31 L IX-10 IY-10
32 L IX-20
33 L IY+10
34 L X+0 Y+0 R0 F500
35 L Z+20 R0 F MAX
36 LBL 0
37 END PGM KOUMR MM

8.9 Special Cycles
8.9 Special Cycles

DWELL TIME (Cycle 9)
This causes the execution of the next block within a running program
to be delayed by the programmed dwell time. A dwell time can be
used for such purposes as chip breaking.
Effect
Cycle 9 becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program.
Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected.
U Dwelltime in seconds: Enter the dwell time in
seconds
Input range 0 to 3600 s (1 hour) in 0.001 s steps
Example: NC blocks
89 CYCL DEF 9.0 DWELL TIME

90 CYCL DEF 9.1 DWELL 1.5
PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12)

Routines that you have programmed (such as special drilling cycles or
geometrical modules) can be written as main programs and then
called like fixed cycles.
Before programming, note the following: 7 CYCL DEF 12.0 0 BEGIN PGM
PGM CALL LOT31 MM
If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in 8 CYCL DEF 12.1
the same directory as the program you are calling it from, LOT31
you need only to enter the program name. 9 ... M99
If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located
in the same directory as the program you are calling it
from, you must enter the complete path (for example
END PGM LOT31
TNC:\KLAR35\FK1\50.H.
If you want to define an ISO program to be a cycle, enter
the file type .I behind the program name.
U Program name: Enter the name of the program you Example: NC blocks
want to call and, if necessary, the directory it is
located in. 55 CYCL DEF 12.0 PGM CALL
Call the program with 56 CYCL DEF 12.1 PGM TNC:\KLAR35\FK1\50.H
n CYCL CALL (separate block) or 57 L X+20 Y+50 FMAX M99
n M99 (blockwise) or
n M89 (executed after every positioning block)

8.9 Special Cycles Example: Program call
A callable program 50 is to be called into a program via a cycle call.
ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP (Cycle 13)
Machine and control must be specially prepared by the Z

Y
Cycle 13 is used internally for machining cycles 202, 204

and 209. Please note that, if required, you must program X
Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the
machining cycles mentioned above.
The control can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given
angular position.
Oriented spindle stops are required for
n Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position
n Orientation of the transmitter/receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3-D
touch probes with infrared transmission
Example: NC blocks
Effect
93 CYCL DEF 13.0 ORIENTATION
The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by
entering M19 or M20 (depending on the machine). 94 CYCL DEF 13.1 ANGLE 180
If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13, the TNC
positions the machine tool spindle to an angle that has been set in a
machine parameter (see your machine manual).
U Angle of orientation: Enter the angle according to
the reference axis of the working plane
Input range: 0 to 360°
Input resolution: 0.1°

8.9 Special Cycles
TOLERANCE (Cycle 32)

The TNC automatically smoothens the contour between two path

elements (whether compensated or not). The tool has constant
contact with the workpiece surface. If necessary, the TNC
automatically reduces the programmed feed rate so that the program
can be machined at the fastest possible speed without short pauses
for computing time. As a result the surface quality is improved and the
machine is protected.
A contour deviation results from the smoothing out. The size of this
deviation (tolerance value) is set in a machine parameter by the
machine manufacturer. You can change the pre-set tolerance value
with Cycle 32.

Example: NC blocks
Cycle 32 is DEF active which means that it becomes
effective as soon as it is defined in the part program. 95 CYCL DEF 32.0 TOLERANCE
You can reset Cycle 32 by defining it again and confirming 96 CYCL DEF 32.1 T0.05
the dialog question after the tolerance value with NO
ENT. Resetting Cycle 32 reactivates the pre-set tolerance:
U Tolerance value: Permissible contour deviation in

mm

9
Programming:
Subprograms and Program
Section Repeats
9.1 Labeling Subprograms and
9.1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
Program Section Repeats
Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a
machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired.
Labels
The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are
marked in a part program by labels.
A label is identified by a number between 1 and 254. Each label can be
set only once with LABEL SET in a program.
If a label is set more than once, the TNC sends an error

message at the end of the LBL SET block. With very long
programs, you can limit the number of blocks to be
checked for repeated labels with MP7229.
LABEL 0 (LBL 0) is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram

and can therefore be used as often as desired.
342 9 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

9.2 Subprograms
9.2 Subprograms
Operating sequence
1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which a
subprogram is called with CALL LBL. 0 BEGIN PGM ...
2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end. The
subprogram end is marked LBL 0.
3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the CALL LBL1
subprogram call.
Programming notes L Z+100 M2

n A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms.
LBL1
n You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired.
n A subprogram cannot call itself.
n Write subprograms at the end of the main program (behind the block LBL0
with M2 or M30). END PGM ...
n If subprograms are located before the block with M02 or M30, they
will be executed at least once even if they are not called.
Programming a subprogram
U Tomark the beginning, press the LBL SET key and
enter a label number.
U Enter the subprogram number.
U To mark the end, press the LBL SET key and enter the
label number “0”.
Calling a subprogram
U To call a subprogram, press the LBL CALL key.
U Label number: Enter the label number of the
subprogram you wish to call.
U Repeat REP: Ignore the dialog question with the NO
ENT key. Repeat REP is used only for program section
repeats.
CALL LBL 0 is not permitted (label 0 is only used to mark

the end of a subprogram).

9.3 Program Section Repeats
9.3 Program Section Repeats
Label LBL
The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label LBL.
The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL /REP. 0 BEGIN PGM ...
Operating sequence
LBL1
1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program
section (CALL LBL /REP).
2 Then the program section between the called LBL and the label
call is repeated the number of times entered after REP. CALL LBL1 REP 2/2
3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition.
Programming notes END PGM ...
n You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession.

n The number behind the slash after REP indicates the number of
repetitions remaining to be run.
n The total number of times the program section is executed is always
one more than the programmed number of repeats.
Programming a program section repeat

U Tomark the beginning, press the LBL SET key and
enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you
wish to repeat.
U Enter the program section.
Calling a program section repeat

U Press the LBL CALL key and enter the label number of
the program section you want to repeat as well as the
number of repeats (with Repeat REP).

9.4 Separate Program as
9.4 Separate Program as Subprogram

Subprogram
Operating sequence
1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which
another program is called with CALL PGM.
2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end.
0 BEGIN PGM A 0 BEGIN PGM B
3 The TNC then resumes the first (calling) part program with the
block behind the program call.
Programming notes CALL PGM B
n No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram.

n The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions END PGM A END PGM B
M2 or M30.
n The called program must not contain a program call into the calling
program, otherwise an infinite loop will result.
Calling any program as a subprogram

U Toselect the functions for program call, press the
PGM CALL key.
U Press the PROGRAM soft key.
U Enterthe complete path name of the program you
want to call and confirm your entry with the END key.
The program you are calling must be stored on the hard

disk of your TNC.
You need only enter the program name if the program you
want to call is located in the same directory as the program
you are calling it from.
If the called program is not located in the same directory
as the program you are calling it from, you must enter the
complete path, e.g. TNC:\ZW35\ROUGH\PGM1.H
If you want to call an ISO program, enter the file type .I
after the program name.
You can also call a program with Cycle 12 PGM CALL.

9.5 Nesting
9.5 Nesting
Types of nesting
n Subprograms within a subprogram
n Program section repeats within a program section repeat
n Subprograms repeated
n Program section repeats within a subprogram
Nesting depth
The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which
program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or
subprograms.
n Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 8
n Maximum nesting depth for calling main programs: 4
n You can nest program section repeats as often as desired
Subprogram within a subprogram

Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM SUBPGMS MM
...
17 CALL LBL 1 Calling a subprogram at LBL 1
...
35 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Last program block of the
main program (with M2)
36 LBL 1 Beginning of subprogram 1
...
39 CALL LBL 2 Call the subprogram marked with LBL2
...
46 LBL 2 Beginning of subprogram 2
...
63 END PGM SUBPGMS MM

9.5 Nesting
Program execution
1 Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17.
2 Subprogram 1 is called, and executed up to block 39.
3 Subprogram 2 is called, and executed up to block 62. End of
subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it
was called.
4 Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45. End of
subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS.
5 Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block
35. Return jump to block 1 and end of program.
Repeating program section repeats

Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM REPS MM
...
15 LBL 1 Beginning of program section repeat 1
...
...
27 CALL LBL 2 REP 2/2 The program section between this block and LBL 2
... (block 20) is repeated twice
35 CALL LBL 1 REP 1/1 The program section between this block and LBL 1
... (block 15) is repeated once.
50 END PGM REPS MM
Program execution
1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27.
2 Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated twice.
3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35.
4 Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once
(including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27).
5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 (end of
program).

9.5 Nesting
Repeating a subprogram
Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM SUBREP MM
...
11 CALL LBL 2 Subprogram call
12 CALL LBL 1 REP 2/2 The program section between this block and LBL1
... (block 10) is repeated twice
19 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Last block of the main program with M2
20 LBL 2 Beginning of subprogram
...
28 LBL 0 End of subprogram
29 END PGM SUBREP MM
Program execution
1 Main program SUBREP is executed up to block 11.
2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed.
3 Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated twice.
This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice.
4 Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19. End
of program.

9.6 Programming Examples
Example: Milling a contour in several infeeds
Program sequence
n Pre-position the tool to the workpiece surface
n Enter the infeed depth in incremental values Y
n Mill the contour 100
n Repeat downfeed and contour-milling
R1
5
75
R18
30
R15
20
X
20 50 75 100
0 BEGIN PGM PGMWDH MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
6 L X-20 Y+30 R0 F MAX Pre-position in the working plane
7 L Z+0 R0 F MAX M3 Pre-position to the workpiece surface

8 LBL 1 Set label for program section repeat
9 L IZ-4 R0 F MAX Infeed depth in incremental values (in the open)
10 APPR CT X+2 Y+30 CCA90 R+5 RL F250 Approach contour
11 FC DR- R18 CLSD+ CCX+20 CCY+30 Contour
12 FLT
14 FLT
16 FLT
17 FCT DR- R18 CLSD- CCX+20 CCY+30
18 DEP CT CCA90 R+5 F1000 Depart contour
19 L X-20 Y+0 R0 F MAX Retract tool
20 CALL LBL 1 REP 4/4 Return jump to LBL 1; section is repeated a total of 4 times.
22 END PGM PGMWDH MM

Example: Groups of holes
Program sequence
n Approach the groups of holes in the main
program Y
n Call the group of holes (subprogram 1)
100
n Program the group of holes only once in
subprogram 1
21
60
5
20
20
1 31
10
X
15 45 75 100
0 BEGIN PGM UP1 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: drilling
Q200=2 ; SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-10 ; DEPTH
Q206=250 ; FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5 ; PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ; DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0; SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=10 ; 2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.25 ; DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM

7 L X+15 Y+10 R0 F MAX M3 Move to starting point for group 1
8 CALL LBL 1 Call the subprogram for the group
9 L X+45 Y+60 R0 F MAX Move to starting point for group 2
13 L Z+250 R0 F MAX M2 End of main program
14 LBL 1 Beginning of subprogram 1: Group of holes
15 CYCL CALL Hole 1
16 L IX+20 R0 F MAX M99 Move to 2nd hole, call cycle
17 L IY+20 R0 F MAX M99 Move to 3rd hole, call cycle
18 L IX-20 R0 F MAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle
20 END PGM UP1 MM

Example: Groups of holes with several tools
Program sequence
n Program the fixed cycles in the main program Y Y
n Call the entire hole pattern (subprogram 1)
n Approach the groups of holes in subprogram 1, 100
call group of holes (subprogram 2)
n Program the group of holes only once in
subprogram 2 21
60
5
20
20
1 31
10
X Z
15 45 75 100 -15
-20
0 BEGIN PGM UP2 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+4 Define tool: center drill
4 TOOL DEF 2 L+0 R+3 Define tool: drill
5 TOOL DEF 3 L+0 R+3.5 Define tool: reamer
6 TOOL CALL 1 Z S5000 Call tool: center drill
8 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: Centering
Q201=-3 ; DEPTH
Q202=3 ; PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ; DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ; SURFACE COORDINATE
Q211=0.25 ; DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
9 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern

11 TOOL CALL 2 Z S4000 Call the drilling tool
12 FN 0: Q201 = -25 New depth for drilling
13 FN 0: Q202 = +5 New plunging depth for drilling
16 TOOL CALL 3 Z S500 Tool call: reamer
17 CYCL DEF 201 REAMING Cycle definition: REAMING
Q201=-15 ; DEPTH
Q211=0.5 ; DWELL TIME AT DEPTH
Q208=400 ; RETRACTION FEED RATE
Q203=+0 ; SURFACE COORDINATE
19 L Z+250 R0 F MAX M2 End of main program
20 LBL 1 Beginning of subprogram 1: Entire hole pattern

21 L X+15 Y+10 R0 F MAX M3 Move to starting point for group 1
22 CALL LBL 2 Call subprogram 2 for the group
28 LBL 2 Beginning of subprogram 2: Group of holes

29 CYCL CALL 1st hole with active fixed cycle
30 L IX+20 R0 F MAX M99 Move to 2nd hole, call cycle
31 L IY+20 R0 F MAX M99 Move to 3rd hole, call cycle
32 L IX-20 R0 F MAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle
34 END PGM UP2 MM

10
Programming: Q Parameters
10.1 Principle and Overview
You can program an entire family of parts in a single part program. You
do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed
numerical values.
Q parameters can represent information such as:
Q6
n Coordinate values
n Feed rates
Q1 Q3
n RPM
n Cycle data Q4
Q2
Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined
through mathematical functions. You can also use Q parameters to
make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions. Q5
In conjunction with FK programming you can also combine contours
that do not have NC-compatible dimensions with Q parameters.
Q parameters are designated by the letter Q and a number between 0
and 299. They are grouped according to three ranges:
Meaning Range
Freely applicable parameter, global for all Q0 to Q99
programs in the TNC memory
Parameters for special TNC functions Q100 to Q199
Parameters that are primarily used for cycles, Q200 to Q399

globally effective for all programs that are stored
in the TNC memory
Programming notes
You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a
program.
Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between
-99 999.9999 and +99 999.9999. Internally, the TNC can calculate up
to a width of 57 bits before and 7 bits after the decimal point (32-bit
data width corresponds to a decimal value of 4 294 967 296).
Some Q parameters are always assigned the same data by

the TNC. For example, Q108 is always assigned the
current tool radius,see “Preassigned Q Parameters,” page
386. If you are using the parameters Q60 to Q99 in OEM
cycles, define via MP7251 whether the parameters are
only to be used locally in the OEM cycles, or may be used
globally.
356 10 Programming: Q Parameters

Calling Q parameter functions
When you are writing a part program, press the “Q” key (in the keypad
for numerical input, below the –/+ key). The TNC then displays the
Function group Soft key

Basic arithmetic (assign, add, subtract, multiply,
divide, square root)
Trigonometric functions
Function for calculating circles
If/then conditions, jumps
Other functions
Entering formulas directly

10.2 Part Families – Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values
10.2 Part Families – Q Parameters
in Place of Numerical Values
The Q parameter function FN0: ASSIGN assigns numerical values to
Q parameters. This enables you to use variables in the program
instead of fixed numerical values.
Example NC blocks
15 FNO: Q10=25 Assign
... Q10 contains the value 25
25 L X +Q10 Means L X +25
You need write only one program for a whole family of parts, entering
the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters.
To program a particular part, you then assign the appropriate values to
the individual Q parameters.
Example
Cylinder with Q parameters
Cylinder radius R = Q1
Cylinder height H = Q2 Q1
Cylinder Z1 Q1 = +30
Q2 = +10
Cylinder Z2 Q1 = +10
Q2 = +50 Q1
Q2 Z2
Q2
Z1

10.3 Describing Contours through
10.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations

Mathematical Operations
Function
The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic
mathematical functions in a part program:
U Select a Q parameter function: Press the Q key (in the numerical
keypad at right). The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft-
key row.
U To select the mathematical functions: Press the BASIC
ARITHMETIC The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Overview
Function Soft key

FN0: ASSIGN
Example: FN0: Q5 = +60
Assigns a numerical value.
FN1: ADDITION
Example: FN1: Q1 = –Q2 + –5
Calculates and assigns the sum of two values.
FN2: SUBTRACTION
Example: FN2: Q1 = +10 – +5
Calculates and assigns the difference of two values.
FN3: MULTIPLICATION
Example: FN3: Q2 = +3 * +3
Calculates and assigns the product of two values.
FN4: DIVISION
Example: FN4: Q4 = +8 DIV +Q2
Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values.
Not permitted: division by 0
FN5: SQUARE ROOT

Example: FN5: Q20 = SQRT 4
Calculates and assigns the square root of a number.
Not permitted: Square root of a negative number
To the right of the “=” character you can enter the following:
n Two numbers
n Two Q parameters
n A number and a Q parameter
The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be
entered with positive or negative signs.

10.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations
Programming fundamental operations
Example: Example: Program blocks in the TNC
16 FN0: Q5 = +10
To select Q parameter functions, press the Q key.
17 FN3: Q12 = +Q5 * +7
To select the mathematical functions: Press the

BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key.
To select the Q parameter function ASSIGN, press

the FN0 X = Y soft key.
Parameter number for result?
5 Enter the number of the Q parameter: 5
1. value or parameter ?
10 Assign the value 10 to Q5.
To select Q parameter functions, press the Q key.
To select the mathematical functions: Press the

BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key.
To select the Q parameter function

MULTIPLICATION, press the FN3 X * Y soft key.
12 Enter the number of the Q parameter: 12
Q5 Enter Q5 for the first value.
7 Enter 7 for the second value.

10.4 Trigonometric Functions

Definitions
Sine, cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of
right triangles. For a right triangle, the trigonometric functions of the
angle a are defined by the following equations:
Sine: sin α = a / c
Cosine: cos α = b / c
Tangent: tan α = a / b = sin α / cos α c
a
where
α
n c is the side opposite the right angle
b
n a is the side opposite the angle a
n b is the third side.
The TNC can find the angle from the tangent:
α = arc tan (a / b) = arc tan (sin α / cos α)
Example:
a = 25 mm
b = 50 mm
α = arc tan (a / b) = arc tan 0.5 = 26.57°
Furthermore:
a² + b² = c² (where a² = a x a)
c = (a² + b²)

Programming trigonometric functions
Press the TRIGONOMETRY soft key to call the trigonometric
functions. The TNC then displays the soft keys that are listed in the
table below.
Programming: Compare “Example: Programming fundamental
operations.”
Function Soft key

FN6: SINE
Example: FN6: Q20 = SIN–Q5
Calculate the sine of an angle in degrees (°) and
assign it to a parameter.
FN7: COSINE
Example: FN7: Q21 = COS–Q5
Calculate the cosine of an angle in degrees (°) and
assign it to a parameter.
FN8: ROOT SUM OF SQUARES

Example: FN8: Q10 = +5 LEN +4
Calculate and assign length from two values.
FN13: ANGLE
Example: FN13: Q20 = +25 ANG–Q1
Calculate the angle from the arc tangent of two sides
or from the sine and cosine of the angle (0 < angle <
360°) and assign it to a parameter.

10.5 Calculating Circles
10.5 Calculating Circles

Function
The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the
circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the
circle. The calculation is more accurate if four points are used.
Application: These functions can be used if you wish to determine the
location and size of a bore hole or a pitch circle using the
programmable probing function.
Function Soft key

FN23: Determining the CIRCLE DATA from three
points
Example: FN23: Q20 = CDATA Q30
The coordinate pairs for three points of the circle must be stored in
Parameter Q30 and in the following five parameters – here to Q35.
The TNC then stores the circle center of the reference axis (X with
spindle axis Z) in Parameter Q20, the circle center of the minor axis (Y
with spindle axis Z) in Parameter Q21 and the circle radius in
Parameter Q22.
Function Soft key

FN24: Determining the CIRCLE DATA from four
points
Example: FN24: Q20 = CDATA Q30
The coordinate pairs for four points of the circle must be stored in
Parameter Q30 and in the following seven parameters – here to Q37.
The TNC then stores the circle center of the reference axis (X with
spindle axis Z) in Parameter Q20, the circle center of the minor axis (Y
with spindle axis Z) in Parameter Q21 and the circle radius in
Parameter Q22.
Note that FN23 and FN24 beside the resulting parameter

also overwrite the two following parameters.

10.6 If-Then Decisions with Q
10.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters
Parameters
Function
The TNC can make logical If-Then decisions by comparing a Q
parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value. If the
condition is fulfilled, the TNC continues the program at the label that
is programmed after the condition (for information on labels, see
“Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats,” page 342). If
it is not fulfilled, the TNC continues with the next block.
To call another program as a subprogram, enter PGM CALL after the
block with the target label.
Unconditional jumps
An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump
whose condition is always true. Example:
FN9: IF+10 EQU+10 GOTO LBL1
Programming If-Then decisions

Press the JUMP soft key to call the if-then conditions. The TNC then
displays the following soft keys:
Function Soft key

FN9: IF EQUAL, JUMP
Example: FN9: IF +Q1 EQU +Q3 GOTO LBL 5
If the two values or parameters are equal, jump to the
given label.
FN10: IF NOT EQUAL, JUMP

Example: FN10: IF +10 NE –Q5 GOTO LBL 10
If the two values or parameters are not equal, jump to
the given label.
FN11: IF GREATER THAN, JUMP

Example: FN11: IF+Q1 GT+10 GOTO LBL 5
If the first parameter or value is greater than the
second value or parameter, jump to the given label.
FN12: IF LESS THAN, JUMP

Example: FN12: IF+Q5 LT+0 GOTO LBL 1
If the first value or parameter is less than the second
value or parameter, jump to the given label.

10.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters
Abbreviations used:
IF : If
EQU : Equals
NE : Not equal
GT : Greater than
LT : Less than
GOTO : Go to

10.7 Checking and changing Q
10.7 Checking and changing Q parameters
parameters
Procedure
During a program run or test run, you can check or change Q
parameters if necessary.
U If you are in a program run, interrupt it (for example by pressing the
machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft key). If you are
doing a test run, interrupt it.
U To call the Q parameter functions, press the Q key.
U Enter the Q parameter number and press the ENT key.

The TNC displays the current value of the Q
parameter in the dialog line.
U If
you wish to change the value, enter a new value,
confirm it with the ENT key and conclude your entry
with the END key.
U To leave the value unchanged, terminate the dialog
with the END key.

10.8 Additional Functions

Overview
Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional
functions. The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Function Soft key

FN14:ERROR
Output error messages
FN15:PRINT
Unformatted output of texts or Q parameter values
FN16:PRINT
Formatted output of texts or Q parameter values
FN18:SYS-DATUM READ
Read system data
FN19:PLC
Transfer values to the PLC
FN20:WAIT FOR
Synchronize NC and PLC
FN25:PRESET
Set datum during program run
FN26:TABOPEN
Open a freely definable table
FN27:TABWRITE
Write to a freely definable table
FN28:TABREAD
Read from a freely definable table

FN14: ERROR: Displaying error messages
With the function FN14: ERROR you can call messages under Error number Text
program control. The messages were preprogrammed by the machine 1000 Spindle ?
tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN. The program must then be restarted.
The error number are listed in the table below. 1001 Tool axis is missing
1002 Slot width too large
Range of error numbers Standard dialog text 1003 Tool radius too large
0 ... 299 FN 14: Error code 0 .... 299 1004 Range exceeded
1005 Start position incorrect
300 ... 999 Machine-dependent dialog 1006 ROTATION not permitted
1000 ... 1099 Internal error messages (see table 1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted
at right) 1008 MIRRORING not permitted
1009 Datum shift not permitted
Example NC block 1010 Feed rate is missing
1011 Entry value incorrect
The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254:
1012 Wrong sign programmed
180 FN14: ERROR = 254 1013 Entered angle not permitted
1014 Touch point inaccessible
1015 Too many points
1016 Contradictory entry
1017 CYCL incomplete
1018 Plane wrongly defined
1019 Wrong axis programmed
1020 Wrong RPM
1021 Radius comp. undefined
1022 Rounding-off undefined
1023 Rounding radius too large
1024 Program start undefined
1025 Excessive subprogramming
1026 Angle reference missing
1027 No fixed cycle defined
1028 Slot width too small
1029 Pocket too small
1030 Q202 not defined
1031 Q205 not defined
1032 Enter Q218 greater than Q219
1033 CYCL 210 not permitted
1034 CYCL 211 not permitted
1035 Q220 too large
1037 Q244 must be greater than 0
1038 Q245 must not equal Q246
1039 Angle range must be < 360°
1041 Q214: 0 not permitted

Error number Text
1042 Traverse direction not defined
1043 No datum table active
1044 Position error: center in axis 1
1045 Position error: center in axis 2
1046 Hole diameter too small
1047 Hole diameter too large
1048 Stud diameter too small
1049 Stud diameter too large
1050 Pocket too small: rework axis 1
1051 Pocket too small: rework axis 2
1052 Pocket too large: scrap axis 1
1053 Pocket too large: scrap axis 2
1054 Stud too small: scrap axis 1
1055 Stud too small: scrap axis 2
1056 Stud too large: rework axis 1
1057 Stud too large: rework axis 2
1058 TCHPROBE 425: length exceeds max
1059 TCHPROBE 425: length below min
1060 TCHPROBE 426: length exceeds max
1061 TCHPROBE 426: length below min
1062 TCHPROBE 430: diameter too large
1063 TCHPROBE 430: diameter too small
1064 No measuring axis defined
1065 Tool breakage tolerance exceeded
1066 Enter Q247 unequal 0
1067 Enter Q247 greater than 5
1068 Datum table?
1069 Enter direction Q351 unequal 0
1070 Thread depth too large
1071 Missing calibration data
1072 Tolerance exceeded
1073 Block scan active
1074 ORIENTATION not permitted
1075 3DROT not permitted
1076 Activate 3DROT
1077 Enter depth as a negative value

FN15: PRINT: Output of texts or Q parameter
values
Setting the data interface: In the menu option PRINT or

PRINT-TEST, you must enter the path for storing the texts
or Q parameters. See “Assign,” page 423.
The function FN15: PRINT transfers Q parameter values and error

messages through the data interface, for example to a printer. When
you save the data in the TNC memory or transfer them to a PC, the
TNC stores the data in the file %FN 15RUN.A (output in program run
mode) or in the file %FN15SIM.A (output in test run mode).
To output dialog texts and error messages with FN 15: PRINT

“numerical value”
Numerical values from 0 to 99: Dialog texts for OEM cycles
Numerical values exceeding 100: PLC error messages
Example: Output of dialog text 20
67 FN15: PRINT 20
Outputting dialog texts and Q parameters with FN15: PRINT “Q

parameter”
Application example: Recording workpiece measurement.
You can transfer up to six Q parameters and numerical values
simultaneously. The TNC separates them with slashes.
Example: Output of dialog text 1 and numerical value for Q1
70 FN15: PRINT1/Q1

FN16: F-PRINT: Formatted output of texts or Q
parameter values
Setting the data interface: In the menu option PRINT or

PRINT-TEST, you must enter the path for storing the text
file. See “Assign,” page 423.
The function FN16: F-PRINT transfers Q parameter values and texts in

a selectable format through the data interface, for example to a printer.
If you save the values internally or send them to a computer, the TNC
saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block.
To output the formatted texts and Q parameter values, create a text
file with the TNC’s text editor. In this file, you then define the output
format and Q parameters you want to output.
Example of a text file to define the output format:
“TEST RECORD IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY”;
“————————————————————————“
“NO. OF MEASURED VALUES : = 1”;
“*******************************************“;#
“X1 = %5.3LF”, Q31;
“Y1 = %5.3LF”, Q32;
“Z1 = %5.3LF”, Q33;
“******************************************“;
When you create a text file, use the following formatting functions:
Special
Function
character
“............“ Define output format for texts and variables
between the quotation marks
%5.3LF Define format for Q parameter:

5 places before and 4 places behind the decimal
point; long, floating (decimal number)
%S Format for text variable
, Separation character between output format

and parameter
; End of block character

10.8 Additional Functions The following functions allow you to include the following additional
information in the protocol log file:
Code word Function

CALL_PATH Gives the path for the NC program where you will
find the FN16 function. Example: “Measuring
program: %S”,CALL_PATH;
M_CLOSE Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16.
Example: M_CLOSE;
L_ENGLISH Output text only for English conversational language
L_GERMAN Output text only for German conversational

language
L_CZECH Output text only for Czech conversational language
L_FRENCH Output text only for French conversational language
L_ITALIAN Output text only for Italian conversational language
L_SPANISH Output text only for Spanish conversational

language
L_SWEDISH Output text only for Swedish conversational

language
L_DANISH Output text only for Danish conversational language
L_FINNISH Output text only for Finnish conversational language
L_DUTCH Output text only for Dutch conversational language
L_POLISH Output text only for Polish conversational language
L_HUNGARIA Output text only for Hungarian conversational

language
L_ALL Output text independent of the conversational

language
HOUR Number of hours from the real-time clock
MIN Number of minutes from the real-time clock
SEC Number of seconds from the real-time clock
DAY Day from the real-time clock
MONTH Month as a number from the real-time clock
STR_MONTH Month as a string abbreviation from the real-time

clock
YEAR2 Two-digit year from the real-time clock
YEAR4 Four-digit year from the real-time clock

In the part program, program FN 16: F-PRINT, to activate the
output:
96 FN16: F-PRINT TNC:\MASKE\MASKE1.A/RS232:\PROT1.TXT
The TNC then outputs the file PROT1.TXT through the serial interface:
CALIBRAT. CHART IMPELLER CENTER GRAVITY
————————————————————————
NO. OF MEASURED VALUES : = 1
*******************************************
X1 = 149.360
Y1 = 25.509
Z1 = 37.000
*******************************************
If you use FN 16 several times in the program, the TNC

saves all texts in the file that you have defined with the
first FN 16 function. The file is not output until the TNC
reads the END PGM block, or you press the NC stop
button, or you close the file with M_CLOSE.
FN18: SYS-DATUM READ Read system data

With the function FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ you can read system
data and store them in Q parameters. You select the system data
through a group number (ID number), and additionally through a
number and an index.
Group name, ID No. Number Index Meaning

Program information, 10 1 - MM/inch condition
2 - Overlap factor for pocket milling
3 - Number of active fixed cycle
Machine status, 20 1 - Active tool number
2 - Prepared tool number
3 - Active tool axis

0=X, 1=Y, 2=Z, 6=U, 7=V, 8=W
4 - Programmed spindle rpm
5 - Active spindle status: -1=undefined, 0=M3 active,

1=M4 active, 2=M5 after M3, 3=M5 after M4
8 - Coolant status: 0=off, 1=on
9 - Active feed rate
10 - Index of the prepared tool

11 - Index of the active tool
Cycle parameter, 30 1 - Setup clearance of active fixed cycle
2 - Drilling depth / milling depth of active fixed cycle
3 - Plunging depth of active fixed cycle
4 - Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle
5 - 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle
6 - 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle
7 - 1st side length for slot cycle
8 - 2nd side length for slot cycle
9 - Radius for circular pocket cycle
10 - Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle
11 - Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle
12 - Dwell time for active fixed cycle
13 - Thread pitch for Cycles 17, 18
14 - Milling allowance for active fixed cycle
15 - Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle
Data from the tool table, 50 1 Tool no. Tool length
2 Tool no. Tool radius
3 Tool no. Tool radius R2
4 Tool no. Oversize for tool length DL
5 Tool no. Oversize for tool radius DR
6 Tool no. Oversize for tool radius DR2
7 Tool no. Tool inhibited (0 or 1)
8 Tool no. Number of replacement tool
9 Tool no. Maximum tool age TIME1
10 Tool no. Maximum tool age TIME2
11 Tool no. Current tool age CUR. TIME
12 Tool no. PLC status
13 Tool no. Maximum tooth length LCUTS

14 Tool no. Maximum plunge angle ANGLE
15 Tool no. TT: Number of teeth CUT
16 Tool no. TT: Wear tolerance for length LTOL
17 Tool no. TT: Wear tolerance for radius RTOL
18 Tool no. TT: Rotational direction DIRECT (0=positive/-1=negative)
19 Tool no. TT: Offset for radius R-OFFS
20 Tool no. TT: Offset for length L-OFFS
21 Tool no. TT: Breakage tolerance in length LBREAK
22 Tool no. TT: Breakage tolerance in radius RBREAK
No index: Data of the currently active tool
Data from the tool table, 51 1 Pocket Tool number

number
2 Pocket Special tool: 0=no, 1=yes

number
3 Pocket Fixed pocket: 0=no, 1=yes

number
4 Pocket Locket pocket: 0=no, 1=yes

number
5 Pocket PLC status

number
Pocket number of a tool in the tool- 1 Tool no. Pocket number

pocket table, 52
Immediately after TOOL CALL 1 - Position valid / invalid (1/0)

programmed position, 70
2 1 X axis
2 2 Y axis
2 3 Z axis
3 - Programmed feed rate (-1: no feed rate programmed)
Active tool compensation, 200 1 - Tool radius (including delta values)
2 - Tool length (including delta values)
Active transformations, 210 1 - Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode
2 - Programmed rotation with Cycle 10
3 - Active mirror axis

0: mirroring not active
+1: X axis mirrored
+2: Y axis mirrored
+4: Z axis mirrored
+64: U axis mirrored
+128: V axis mirrored
+256: W axis mirrored
Combinations = sum of individual axes
4 1 Active scaling factor in X axis
4 2 Active scaling factor in Y axis
4 3 Active scaling factor in Z axis
4 7 Active scaling factor in U axis
4 8 Active scaling factor in V axis
4 9 Active scaling factor in W axis
5 1 3D ROT A axis
5 2 3D ROT B axis
5 3 3D ROT C axis
6 - Tilted working plane active / inactive (-1/0)
Active datum shift, 220 2 1 X axis
2 Y axis
3 Z axis
4 A axis
5 B axis
6 C axis
7 U axis
8 V axis
9 W axis
Traverse range, 230 2 1 to 9 Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9
3 1 to 9 Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9

Nominal position in the REF system, 1 1 X axis
240
2 Y axis
3 Z axis
4 A axis
5 B axis
6 C axis
7 U axis
8 V axis
9 W axis
Nominal positions in the input 1 1 X axis

system, 270
2 Y axis
3 Z axis
4 A axis
5 B axis
6 C axis
7 U axis
8 V axis
9 W axis
Status of M128, 280 1 - 0: M128 inactive, -1: M128 active
2 - Feed rate that was programmed with M128
Triggering touch probe, 350 10 - Touch probe axis
11 - Effective ball radius
12 - Effective length
13 - Radius setting ring
14 1 Center misalignment in ref. axis
2 Center misalignment in minor axis
15 - Direction of center misalignment compared with 0°

position
Tool touch probe 130 20 1 Center point X-axis (REF system)

2 Center point Y-axis (REF system)
3 Center point Z axis (REF system)
21 - Probe contact radius
Measuring touch probe, 350 30 - Calibrated stylus length
31 - Stylus radius 1
32 - Stylus radius 2
33 - Setting ring diameter
34 1 Center misalignment in ref. axis
2 Center misalignment in minor axis
35 1 Compensation factor for 1st axis
2 Compensation factor for 2nd axis
3 Compensation factor for 3rd axis
36 1 Power ratio for 1st axis
2 Power ratio for 2nd axis
3 Power ratio for 3rd axis
Last touch point in TCH PROBE- 1 1 to 9 Position in the active coordinate system in axes 1 to 9
cycle 0 or last touch point from
manual operating mode, 360
2 1 to 9 Position in the REF system in axes 1 to 9
Value from the active datum table in Datum 1 to 9 X axis to W axis

the active coordinate system, 500 number
REF value from the active datum Datum 1 to 9 X axis to W axis

table, 500 number
Datum table selected, 505 1 - Acknowledgement value = 0: No datum table active

Return code = 1: Datum table active
Data from the active pallet table, 510 1 - Active line
2 - Palette number from PAL/PGM field
Machine parameter exists, 1010 MP MP index Acknowledgement value = 0: MP does not exist
number Return code = 1: MP exists

Example: Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z
axis to Q25.
55 FN18: SYSREAD Q25 = ID210 NR4 IDX3
FN19: PLC: Transferring values to the PLC

The function FN 19: PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q
parameters to the PLC.
Increments and units: 0.1 µm or 0.0001°
Example: Transfer the numerical value 10 (which means 1 µm or

0.001°) to the PLC
56 FN19: PLC=+10/+Q3
FN20: WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization
This function may only be used with the permission of

your machine tool builder.
With function FN 20: WAIT FOR you can synchronize the NC and PLC
with each other during a program run. The NC stops machining until
the condition that you have programmed in the FN 20 block is fulfilled.
With FN10 the TNC can check the following operands:
PLC Operand Abbreviation Address range

Marker M 0 to 4999
Input I 0 to 31, 128 to 152

64 to 126 (first PL 401 B)
192 to 254 (second
PL 401 B)
Output O 0 to 30
32 to 62 (first PL 401 B)
64 to 94 (second PL 401 B)
Counter C 48 to 79
Timer T 0 to 95
Byte B 0 to 4095
Word W 0 to 2047
Double word D 2048 to 4095

10.8 Additional Functions The following conditions are permitted in the FN 20 block:
Condition Abbreviation
Equals ==
Less than <
Greater than >
Less than or equal <=
Greater than or equal >=
Example: Stop program run until the PLC sets marker 4095 to 1
32 FN20: WAIT FOR M4095==1
FN 25: PRESET: Setting a new datum
This function can only be programmed if you have entered

the code number 555343, see “Code Number,” page 421.
With the function FN 25: PRESET, it is possible to set a new datum in

an axis of choice during program run.
U Select a Q parameter function: Press the Q key (in the numerical
keypad at right). The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft-
key row.
U To select the additional functions, press the DIVERSE FUNCTIONS
soft key.
U Select FN25: Switch the soft-key row to the second level, press the
FN25 DATUM SET soft key
U Axis?: Enter the axis where you wish to set the new datum and
confirm with ENT
U Value to be calculated?: Enter the coordinate for the new datum
point in the active coordinate system
U New datum?: Enter the value that the new datum point will have in
the new coordinate system

Example: Set a new datum at the current coordinate X+100
56 FN25: PRESET = X/+100/+0
Example: The current coordinate Z+50 will have the value -20 in
the new coordinate system
56 FN25: PRESET = Z/+50/-20
FN26: TABOPEN: Opening a Freely Definable

Table
With FN 26: TABOPEN you can define a table to be written with FN27,
or to be read from with FN28.
Only one table can be open in an NC program. A new block

with TABOPEN automatically closes the last opened table.
The table to be opened must have the file name extension
.TAB.
.Example: Open the table TAB1.TAB, which is save in the

directory TNC:\DIR1.
56 FN26: TABOPEN TNC:\SIR1\TAB1.TAB
FN27: TABWRITE: writing to a freely definable

table
After you have opened a table with FN 26 TABOPEN, you can use
function FN 27: TABWRITE to write to it.
You can define and write up to 8 column names in a TABWRITE block.
The column names must be written between quotation marks and
separated by a comma. You define the values that the TNC is to write
to the respective column with Q parameters.
You can write only to numerical table fields.

If you wish to write to more than one column in a block,
you must save the values under successive Q parameter
numbers.
Example:
You wish to write to the columns “Radius,” “Depth” and “D” in line
5 of the presently opened table. The values to be written in the table
must be saved in the Q parameters Q5, Q6 and Q7.
53 FN0: Q5 = 3.75
54 FN0: Q6 = -5
55 FN0: Q7 = 7.5
56 FN27: TABWRITE 5/“radius,depth,D” = Q5

FN28: TABREAD: Reading a Freely Definable
Table
After you have opened a table with FN 26 TABOPEN, you can use
function FN 28: TABREAD to read from it.
You can define, i.e. read in, up to 8 column names in a TABREAD
block. The column names must be written between quotation marks
and separated by a comma. In the FN 28 block you can define the Q
parameter number in which the TNC is to write the value that is first
read.
You can read only numerical table fields.

If you wish to read from more than one column in a block,
the TNC will save the values under successive Q
parameter numbers.
Example:
You wish to read the values of the columns “Radius,” “Depth” and
“D” from line 6 of the presently opened table. Save the first value in
Q parameter Q10 (second value in Q11, third value in Q12).
56 FN28: TABREAD Q10 = 6/“radius,depth,D”

10.9 Entering Formulas Directly

Entering formulas
You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations
directly into the part program by soft key.
Press the FORMULA soft key to call the formula functions. The TNC
displays the following soft keys in several soft-key rows:
Mathematical function Soft key

Addition
Example: Q10 = Q1 + Q5
Subtraction
Example: Q25 = Q7 – Q108
Multiplication
Example: Q12 = 5 * Q5
Division
Example: Q25 = Q1 / Q2
Opening parenthesis
Example: Q12 = Q1 * (Q2 + Q3)
Closing parenthesis
Example: Q12 = Q1 * (Q2 + Q3)
Square of a value
Example: Q15 = SQ 5
Square root
Example: Q22 = SQRT 25
Sine of an angle
Example: Q44 = SIN 45
Cosine of an angle
Example: Q45 = COS 45
Tangent of an angle
Example: Q46 = TAN 45
Arc sine
Inverse of the sine. Determine the angle from the ratio
of the opposite side to the hypotenuse.
Example: Q10 = ASIN 0.75
Arc cosine
Inverse of the cosine. Determine the angle from the
ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse.
Example: Q11 = ACOS Q40

Mathematical function Soft key
Arc tangent
Inverse of the tangent. Determine the angle from the
ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side.
Example: Q12 = ATAN Q50
Powers of values
Example: Q15 = 3^3
Constant “pi” (3.14159)

Example: Q15 = PI
Natural logarithm (LN) of a number

Base 2.7183
Example: Q15 = LN Q11
Logarithm of a number, base 10

Example: Q33 = LOG Q22
Exponential function, 2.7183 to the power of n

Example: Q1 = EXP Q12
Negate (multiplication by -1)

Example: Q2 = NEG Q1
Truncate decimal places

(form an integer)
Example: Q3 = INT Q42
Absolute value of a number

Example: Q4 = ABS Q22
Truncate places before the decimal point

(form a fraction)
Example: Q5 = FRAC Q23
Rules for formulas

Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following
rules:
Higher-level operations are performed first (multiplication and

division before addition and subtraction)
12 Q1 = 5 * 3 + 2 * 10 = 35
1st step 5 * 3 = 15
2nd step 2 * 10 = 20
3rd step 15 + 20 = 35

or
13 Q2 = SQ 10 - 3^3 = 73
1st step 10 squared = 100

2nd step 3 to the powers 3 = 27
3rd step 100 – 27 = 73
Distributive law
for calculating with parentheses
a * (b + c) = a * b + a * c
Programming example
Calculate an angle with arc tangent as opposite side (Q12) and
adjacent side (Q13); then store in Q25.
To select the formula entering function, press the Q

key and FORMULA soft key.
Enter the parameter number.

25
Shift the soft-key row and select the arc tangent

function.
Shift the soft-key row and open the parentheses.
Enter Q parameter number 12.

12
Select division.
Enter Q parameter number 13.

13
Close parentheses and conclude formula entry.
Example NC block
37 Q25 = ATAN (Q12/Q13)

10.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
The Q parameters Q100 to Q122 are assigned values by the TNC.
These values include:
n Values from the PLC
n Tool and spindle data
n Data on operating status, etc.
Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107

The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from
the PLC to an NC program.
Active tool radius: Q108

The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108. Q108 is
calculated from:
n Tool radius R (Tool table or TOOL DEF block)
n Delta value DR from the tool table
n Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block
Tool axis: Q109

The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis:
Tool axis Parameter value

No tool axis defined Q109 = –1
X axis Q109 = 0
Y axis Q109 = 1
Z axis Q109 = 2
U axis Q109 = 6
V axis Q109 = 7
W axis Q109 = 8
Spindle status: Q110

The value of Q110 depends on which M function was last
programmed for the spindle:
M Function Parameter value
No spindle status defined Q110 = –1
M03: Spindle ON, clockwise Q110 = 0

M04: Spindle ON, counterclockwise Q110 = 1
M05 after M03 Q110 = 2
M05 after M04 Q110 = 3
Coolant on/off: Q111

M08: Coolant ON Q111 = 1
M09: Coolant OFF Q111 = 0
Overlap factor: Q112

The overlap factor for pocket milling (MP7430) is assigned to Q112.
Unit of measurement for dimensions in the

program: Q113
The value of parameter Q113 specifies whether the highest-level NC
program (for nesting with PGM CALL) is programmed in millimeters or
inches.
Dimensions of the main program Parameter value

Metric system (mm) Q113 = 0
Inch system (inches) Q113 = 1
Tool length: Q114

The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114.
Coordinates after probing during program run

The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle
position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement
with the 3-D touch probe. The coordinates are referenced to the
datum that is currently active in the Manual operating mode.
The length and radius of the probe tip are not compensated in these
coordinates.
Coordinate axis Parameter value

X axis Q115
Y axis Q116
Z axis Q117

Coordinate axis Parameter value
IVth axis Q118
dependent on MP100
Vth axis Q119

dependent on MP100
Deviation between actual value and nominal

value during automatic tool measurement with
the TT 130
Actual-nominal deviation Parameter value

Tool length Q115
Tool radius Q116
Tilting the working plane with mathematical

angles: Rotary axis coordinates calculated by the
TNC
coordinates Parameter value

A axis Q120
B axis Q121
C axis Q122

Results of measurements with touch probe
cycles
(see also Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual)
Measured actual values Parameter value

Angle of a straight line Q150
Center in reference axis Q151
Center in minor axis Q152
Diameter Q153
Length of pocket Q154
Width of pocket Q155
Length in the axis selected in the cycle Q156
Position of the center line Q157
Angle of the A axis Q158
Angle of the B axis Q159
Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Q160
Measured deviation Parameter value

Center in reference axis Q161
Center in minor axis Q162
Diameter Q163
Length of pocket Q164
Width of pocket Q165
Measured length Q166
Position of the center line Q167
Measured solid angle Parameter value

Rotation about the A axis Q170
Rotation about the B axis Q171
Rotation about the C axis Q172

Workpiece status Parameter value
Good Q180
Re-work Q181
Scrap Q182
Measured deviation with cycle 440 Parameter value

X axis Q185
Y axis Q186
Z axis Q187
Reserved for internal use Parameter value

Markers for cycles (point patterns) Q197
Status during tool measurement with TT Parameter value

Tool within tolerance Q199 = 0.0
Tool is worn (LTOL/RTOL exceeded) Q199 = 1.0
Tool is broken (LBREAK/RBREAK exceeded) Q199 = 2.0

Example: Ellipse
Program sequence
n The contour of the ellipse is approximated by
many short lines (defined in Q7). The more Y
calculating steps you define for the lines, the
smoother the curve becomes.
n The machining direction can be altered by 50
changing the entries for the starting and end
angles in the plane:
30
Clockwise machining direction:
starting angle > end angle
50
Counterclockwise machining direction:
starting angle < end angle
n The tool radius is not taken into account.
X
50
0 BEGIN PGM ELLIPSE MM

1 FN 0: Q1 = +50 Center in X axis
2 FN 0: Q2 = +50 Center in Y axis
3 FN 0: Q3 = +50 Semiaxis in X
4 FN 0: Q4 = +30 Semiaxis in Y
5 FN 0: Q5 = +0 Starting angle in the plane
6 FN 0: Q6 = +360 End angle in the plane
7 FN 0: Q7 = +40 Number of calculating steps
8 FN 0: Q8 = +0 Rotational position of the ellipse
9 FN 0: Q9 = +5 Milling depth
10 FN 0: Q10 = +100 Feed rate for plunging
11 FN 0: Q11 = +350 Feed rate for milling
12 FN 0: Q12 = +2 Setup clearance for pre-positioning
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
18 CALL LBL 10 Call machining operation

20 LBL 10 Subprogram 10: Machining operation
21 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center of ellipse
22 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+Q1
23 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2
24 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG Account for rotational position in the plane
25 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+Q8
26 Q35 = (Q6 - Q5) / Q7 Calculate angle increment
27 Q36 = Q5 Copy starting angle
28 Q37 = 0 Set counter
29 Q21 = Q3 * COS Q36 Calculate X coordinate for starting point
30 Q22 = Q4 * SIN Q36 Calculate Y coordinate for starting point
31 L X+Q21 Y+Q22 R0 F MAX M3 Move to starting point in the plane
32 L Z+Q12 R0 F MAX Pre-position in tool axis to setup clearance
33 L Z-Q9 R0 FQ10 Move to working depth
34 LBL 1
35 Q36 = Q36 + Q35 Update the angle
36 Q37 = Q37 + 1 Update the counter
37 Q21 = Q3 * COS Q36 Calculate the current X coordinate
38 Q22 = Q4 * SIN Q36 Calculate the current Y coordinate
39 L X+Q21 Y+Q22 R0 FQ11 Move to next point
40 FN 12: IF +Q37 LT +Q7 GOTO LBL 1 Unfinished? If not finished, return to LBL 1

44 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
45 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
46 L Z+Q12 R0 F MAX Move to setup clearance
48 END PGM ELLIPSE MM

Example: Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter
Program sequence
Z
n Program functions only with a spherical cutter.
The tool length refers to the sphere center. R4
0 X
n The contour of the cylinder is approximated by
many short line segments (defined in Q13). The
more line segments you define, the smoother
the curve becomes. -50
n The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts (here: Y Y

parallel to the Y axis). 100
n The machining direction can be altered by

changing the entries for the starting and end
angles in space:
Clockwise machining direction:
starting angle > end angle
Counterclockwise machining direction:
starting angle < end angle
n The tool radius is compensated automatically.
50 100 X Z
0 BEGIN PGM CYLIN MM

3 FN 0: Q3 = +0 Center in Z axis
4 FN 0: Q4 = +90 Starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
5 FN 0: Q5 = +270 End angle in space (Z/X plane)
6 FN 0: Q6 = +40 Radius of the cylinder
7 FN 0: Q7 = +100 Length of the cylinder
8 FN 0: Q8 = +0 Rotational position in the X/Y plane
9 FN 0: Q10 = +5 Allowance for cylinder radius
10 FN 0: Q11 = +250 Feed rate for plunging
12 FN 0: Q13 = +90 Number of cuts
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
19 FN 0: Q10 = +0 Reset allowance


23 Q16 = Q6 - Q10 - Q108 Account for allowance and tool, based on the cylinder radius
24 FN 0: Q20 = +1 Set counter
25 FN 0: Q24 = +Q4 Copy starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
26 Q25 = (Q5 - Q4) / Q13 Calculate angle increment
27 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center of cylinder (X axis)
30 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+Q3
31 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG Account for rotational position in the plane
33 L X+0 Y+0 R0 F MAX Pre-position in the plane to the cylinder center
34 L Z+5 R0 F1000 M3 Pre-position in the tool axis
35 LBL 1
36 CC Z+0 X+0 Set pole in the Z/X plane
37 LP PR+Q16 PA+Q24 FQ11 Move to starting position on cylinder, plunge-cutting obliquely into
38 L Y+Q7 R0 FQ12 Longitudinal cut in Y+ direction
39 FN 1: Q20 = +Q20 + +1 Update the counter
40 FN 1: Q24 = +Q24 + +Q25 Update solid angle
41 FN 11: IF +Q20 GT +Q13 GOTO LBL 99 Finished? If finished, jump to end.
42 LP PR+Q16 PA+Q24 FQ11 Move in an approximated “arc” for the next longitudinal cut.
43 L Y+0 R0 FQ12 Longitudinal cut in Y– direction
44 FN 1: Q20 = +Q20 + +1 Update the counter
45 FN 1: Q24 = +Q24 + +Q25 Update solid angle
46 FN 12: IF +Q20 LT +Q13 GOTO LBL 1 Unfinished? If not finished, return to LBL 1
47 LBL 99
51 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
52 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
53 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0
55 END PGM CYLIN MM

Example: Convex sphere machined with end mill
Program sequence
n This program requires an end mill.
n The contour of the sphere is approximated by Y
Y
many short lines (in the Z/X plane, defined in
Q14). The smaller you define the angle 100
increment, the smoother the curve becomes.
n You can determine the number of contour cuts
through the angle increment in the plane
5
5
R4
(defined in Q18). R4
n The tool moves upward in three-dimensional 50
cuts.
n The tool radius is compensated automatically.
X Z
50 100 -50
0 BEGIN PGM BALL MM

3 FN 0: Q4 = +90 Starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
4 FN 0: Q5 = +0 End angle in space (Z/X plane)
5 FN 0: Q14 = +5 Angle increment in space
6 FN 0: Q6 = +45 Radius of the sphere
7 FN 0: Q8 = +0 Starting angle of rotational position in the X/Y plane
8 FN 0: Q9 = +360 End angle of rotational position in the X/Y plane
9 FN 0: Q18 = +10 Angle increment in the X/Y plane for roughing
10 FN 0: Q10 = +5 Allowance in sphere radius for roughing
11 FN 0: Q11 = +2 Setup clearance for pre-positioning in the tool axis
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

19 FN 0: Q10 = +0 Reset allowance
20 FN 0: Q18 = +5 Angle increment in the X/Y plane for finishing
24 FN 1: Q23 = +Q11 + +Q6 Calculate Z coordinate for pre-positioning
25 FN 0: Q24 = +Q4 Copy starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
26 FN 1: Q26 = +Q6 + +Q108 Compensate sphere radius for pre-positioning
27 FN 0: Q28 = +Q8 Copy rotational position in the plane
28 FN 1: Q16 = +Q6 + -Q10 Account for allowance in the sphere radius
29 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center of sphere
32 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z-Q16
33 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane
35 CC X+0 Y+0 Set pole in the X/Y plane for pre-positioning
36 LP PR+Q26 PA+Q8 R0 FQ12 Pre-position in the plane
37 LBL 1 Pre-position in the tool axis
38 CC Z+0 X+Q108 Set pole in the Z/X plane, offset by the tool radius
39 L Y+0 Z+0 FQ12 Move to working depth

40 LBL 2
41 LP PR+Q6 PA+Q24 R0 FQ12 Move upward in an approximated “arc”
42 FN 2: Q24 = +Q24 - + Q14 Update solid angle
43 FN 11: IF +Q24 GT +Q5 GOTO LBL 2 Inquire whether an arc is finished. If not finished, return to LBL 2.
44 LP PR+Q6 PA+Q5 Move to the end angle in space
45 L Z+Q23 R0 F1000 Retract in the tool axis
46 L X+Q26 R0 F MAX Pre-position for next arc
47 FN 1: Q28 = +Q28 + +Q18 Update rotational position in the plane
48 FN 0: Q24 = +Q4 Reset solid angle
49 CYCL DEF 10.0 DREHUNG Activate new rotational position
51 FN 12: IF +Q28 LT +Q9 GOTO LBL 1
52 FN 9: IF +Q28 EQU +Q9 GOTO LBL 1 Unfinished? If not finished, return to label 1
56 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
57 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
58 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0
60 END PGM BALL MM

11
Test run
and Program Run
11.1 Graphics
11.1 Graphics
Function
In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run
mode, the TNC provides the following three display modes: Using soft
keys, select whether you desire:
n Plan view
n Projection in 3 planes
n 3-D view
The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined
with a cylindrical end mill. If a tool table is active, you can also simulate
the machining operation with a spherical cutter. For this purpose,
enter R2 = R in the tool table.
The TNC will not show a graphic if
n the current program has no valid blank form definition
n no program is selected
With machine parameters 7315 to 7317 you can have the TNC display
a graphic even if no tool axis is defined or moved.
A graphic simulation is not possible for program sections

or programs in which rotary axis movements or a tilted
working plane are defined. In this case, the TNC will
display an error message.
The TNC graphic does not show a radius oversize DR that
has been programmed in the TOOL CALL block.
The TNC can display the graphic only if the ratio of the
short side to the long sides of the BLK FORM is greater than
1:64!
Overview of display modes

The TNC displays the following soft keys in the program run and
test run modes of operation:
Display mode Soft key

Plan view
Projection in 3 planes
3-D view
400 11 Test run and Program Run

11.1 Graphics
Limitations during program run
A graphical representation of a running program is not possible if the
microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated
machining tasks or if large areas are being machined. Example:
Multipass milling over the entire blank form with a large tool. The TNC
interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics
window. The machining process is continued, however.
Plan view
U Press the soft key for plan view.
U Select the number of depth levels (after shifting the

soft-key row). You can choose between 16 or 32
shades of depth.
The deeper the surface, the darker the shade.
Plan view is the fastest of the three graphic display

modes.
Projection in 3 planes
Similar to a workpiece drawing, the part is displayed with a plan view
and two sectional planes. A symbol to the lower left indicates whether
the display is in first angle or third angle projection according to ISO
6433 (selected with MP7310).
Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification, see
“Magnifying details,” page 402.
In addition, you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding
soft keys:
U Press the soft key for projection in three planes.
U Shiftthe soft-key row until the TNC displays the
Function Soft keys

Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right
or left
Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards

or downwards
The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting.
Coordinates of the line of intersection

At the bottom of the graphics window, the TNC displays the
coordinates of the line of intersection, referenced to the workpiece
datum. Only the coordinates of the working plane are shown. This
function is activated with machine parameter 7310.

11.1 Graphics
3-D view
The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions, and can be rotated
about the vertical axis.
The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions, and can be rotated
about the vertical axis. The shape of the workpiece blank can be
depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation.
In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for
magnification, see “Magnifying details,” page 402.
U Press the soft key for 3-D view.
To rotate the 3-D view

Shift the soft-key row until the following soft keys appear:
Function Soft keys

Rotate the workpiece in 27° steps
about the vertical axis
Switch the frame overlay display for the workpiece blank on/off:
U Show the frame overlay with SHOW BLK-FORM
U Omit the frame overlay with OMIT BLK-FORM
Magnifying details
You can magnify details in the Test Run mode of operation in the
following display modes, provided that the graphic simulation is
stopped:
n Projection in three planes
n 3-D view
The graphic simulation must first have been stopped. A detail
magnification is always effective in all display modes.

11.1 Graphics
Shift the soft-key row in the Test Run mode of operation until the
following soft keys appear:
Function Soft keys

Select the left/right workpiece surface
Select the front/back workpiece surface
Select the top/bottom workpiece surface
Shift the sectional plane to reduce or

magnify the blank form
Select the isolated detail
To change the detail magnification:

The soft keys are listed in the table above.
U Interrupt the graphic simulation, if necessary.
U Select the workpiece surface with the corresponding soft key (see
table).
U To reduce or magnify the blank form, press and hold the MINUS or
PLUS soft key, respectively.
U Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key
(RESET + START returns the workpiece blank to its original state).
Cursor position during detail magnification

During detail magnification, the TNC displays the coordinates of the
axis that is currently being isolated. The coordinates describe the area
determined for magnification. To the left of the slash is the smallest
coordinate of the detail (MIN point), to the left is the largest (MAX
point).
If a graphic display is magnified, this is indicated with MAGN at the lower
right of the graphics window.
If the workpiece blank cannot be further enlarged or reduced, the TNC
displays an error message in the graphics window. To clear the error
message, reduce or enlarge the workpiece blank.

11.1 Graphics
Repeating graphic simulation
A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired, either
with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it.
Function Soft key

Restore workpiece blank to the detail magnification in
which it was last shown
Reset detail magnification so that the machined

workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it was
programmed with BLK FORM
With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key, you return the
displayed workpiece blank to its originally programmed
dimensions, even after isolating a detail—without
TRANSFER DETAIL.
Measuring the machining time

program run modes of operation
The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program
end. The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted.
Test run
The timer displays the approximate time which the TNC calculates
from the duration of tool movements. The time calculated by the TNC
cannot be used for calculating the production time because the TNC
does not account for the duration of machine-dependent interruptions,
such as tool change.
To activate the stopwatch function

Shift the soft-key rows until the TNC displays the following soft keys
with the stopwatch functions:
Stopwatch functions Soft key
Store displayed time
Display the sum of stored time

and displayed time
Clear displayed time
The soft keys available to the left of the stopwatch

functions depend on the selected screen layout.
The time is reset when a new BLK form is entered.

11.2 Functions for Program Display
11.2 Functions for Program Display

Overview
In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run
mode, the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part
program in pages:
Function Soft key

Go back in the program by one screen
Go forward in the program by one screen
Go to the beginning of the program
Go to the end of the program

11.3 Test run
11.3 Test run
Function
In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and
program sections to prevent errors from occurring during program run.
The TNC checks the programs for the following:
n Geometrical incompatibilities
n Missing data
n Impossible jumps
n Violation of the machine's working space
The following functions are also available:
n Blockwise test run
n Interrupt test at any block
n Optional Block Skip
n Functions for graphic simulation
n Measuring the machining time
n Additional status display
Running a program test

If the central tool file is active, a tool table must be active (status S) to
run a program test. Select a tool table via the file manager (PGM MGT)
in the Test Run mode of operation.
With the MOD function BLANK IN WORK SPACE, you can activate
work space monitoring for the test run, see “Showing the workpiece
in the working space,” page 435.
U Select the Test Run mode of operation.
U Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and
select the file you wish to test, or
U Go to the program beginning: Select line “0” with the
GOTO key and confirm you entry with the ENT key.
The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Function Soft key
Test the entire program
Test each program block individually
Show the blank form and test the entire program
Interrupt the test run

11.3 Test run
Run a program test up to a certain block
With the STOP AT N function the TNC does a test run up to the block
with block number N.
U Go to the beginning of program in the Test Run mode of operation.
U To run a program test up to a specific block,
press the STOP AT N soft key.
U Stop at N: Enter the block number at which you wish
the test to stop.
U Program: Enter the name of the program that contains
the block with the selected block number. The TNC
displays the name of the selected program. If the test
run is to be interrupted in a program that was called
with PGM CALL, you must enter this name.
U Repetitions: If N is located in a program section
repeat, enter the number of repeats that you want to
run.
U To test a program section, press the START soft key.
The TNC will test the program up to the entered
block.

11.4 Program run
11.4 Program run
Application
In the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC
executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program
stop.
In the Program Run, Single Block mode of operation you must start
each block separately by pressing the machine START button.
The following TNC functions can be used in the program run modes of
operation:
n Interrupt program run
n Start program run from a certain block
n Optional Block Skip
n Editing the tool table TOOL.T
n Checking and changing Q parameters
n Superimposing handwheel positioning
n Functions for graphic simulation
n Additional status display
Running a part program

Preparation
1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table.
2 Set the datum.
3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files (status M).
4 Select the part program (status M).
You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the
override knobs.
It is possible to reduce the rapid traverse speed when
starting the NC program using the FMAX soft key. The
entered value remains in effect even after the machine
has been turned off and on again. In order to re-establish
the original rapid traverse speed, you need to re-enter the
corresponding value.
Program Run, Full Sequence

U Start the part program with the machine START button.
Program Run, Single Block

U Start each block of the part program individually with the machine
START button.

11.4 Program run
Interrupting machining
There are several ways to interrupt a program run:
n Programmed interruptions
n Machine STOP button
n Switching to Program Run, Single Block
If the TNC registers an error during program run, it automatically
interrupts the machining process.
Programmed interruptions
You can program interruptions directly in the part program. The TNC
interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following
entries:
n STOP (with and without a miscellaneous function)
n Miscellaneous function M0, M2 or M30
n Miscellaneous function M6 (determined by the machine tool builder)
To interrupt machining with the machine STOP button:

U Press the machine STOP button: The block which the TNC is
currently executing is not completed. The asterisk in the status
display blinks.
U If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset
the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key. The asterisk in the
status display goes out. In this case, the program must be restarted
from the program beginning.
Interruption of machining by switching to the Program Run,

Single Block mode of operation.
You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run, Full
Sequence mode of operation by switching to Program Run, Single
Block. The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the
current block.

11.4 Program run
Moving the machine axes during an interruption
You can move the machine axes during an interruption in the same
way as in the Manual Operation mode.
Danger of collision
If you interrupt program run while the working plane is
tilted, you can change from a tilted to a non-tilted
coordinate system, and vice versa, by pressing the 3-D
ON/OFF soft key.
The functions of the axis direction buttons, the electronic
handwheel and the positioning logic for return to contour
are then evaluated by the TNC. When retracting the tool
make sure the correct coordinate system is active and the
angular values of the tilt axes are entered in the 3-D ROT
menu.
Example application:
Retracting the spindle after tool breakage
U Interrupting machining
U Enable the external direction keys: Press the MANUAL OPERATION
soft key.
U Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons.
On some machines you may have to press the machine

START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to
enable the axis direction buttons. Refer to your machine
manual.

11.4 Program run
Resuming program run after an interruption
If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle, the

program must be resumed from the beginning of the
cycle.
This means that some machining operations will be
repeated.
If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or

program section repeat, use the RESTORE POS AT N function to
return to the position at which the program run was interrupted.
When a program run is interrupted, the TNC stores:
n The data of the last defined tool
n Active coordinate transformations (e.g. datum shift, rotation,
mirroring)
n The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined
Note that the stored data remains active until it is reset

(e.g. if you select a new program).
The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after
manual machine axis positioning during an interruption (RESTORE
POSITION soft key).
Resuming program run with the START button

You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button
if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways:
n The machine STOP button was pressed
n A programmed interruption
Resuming program run after an error

If the error message is not blinking:
U Remove the cause of the error.
U To clear the error message from the screen, press the CE key.
U Restart the program, or resume program run at the place at which it
was interrupted.
If the error message is blinking:
U Press and hold the END key for two seconds. This induces a TNC
system restart.
U Remove the cause of the error.
U Start again.
If you cannot correct the error, write down the error message and
contact your repair service agency.

11.4 Program run
Mid-program startup (block scan)
The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and

adapted by the machine tool builder. Refer to your
machine manual.
With the RESTORE POS AT N feature (block scan) you can start a part
program at any block you desire. The TNC scans the program blocks
up to that point. Machining can be graphically simulated.
If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP, the
TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid-program
startup.
Mid-program startup must not begin in a subprogram.

All necessary programs, tables and pallet files must be
selected in a program run mode of operation (status M).
If the program contains a programmed interruption before
the startup block, the block scan is interrupted. Press the
machine START button to continue the block scan.
After a block scan, return the tool to the calculated position
with RESTORE POSITION.
If you are working with nested programs, you can use
machine parameter 7680 to define whether the block scan
is to begin at block 0 of the main program or at block 0 of
the last interrupted program.
If the working plane is tilted, you can use the 3-D ON/OFF
soft key to define whether the TNC is to return to the
contour in a tilted or in a non-tilted coordinate system.
The function M128 is not permitted during a mid-program
startup.
If you want to use the block scan feature in a pallet table,
select the program in which a mid-program startup is to be
performed from the pallet table by using the arrow keys.
Then press the RESTORE POS AT N soft key.
All touch probe cycles and the Cycle 247 are skipped in a
mid-program startup. Result parameters that are written
to from these cycles might therefore remain empty.

11.4 Program run
U To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan,
enter GOTO “0”.
U To select mid-program startup, press the RESTORE
POS AT N soft key.
U Start-up at N: Enter the block number N at which the
block scan should end.
U Program: Enter the name of the program containing
block N.
U Repetitions: If block N is located in a program section
repeat, enter the number of repetitions to be
calculated in the block scan.
U To start the block scan, press the machine START
button.
U Toreturn to the contour, see “Returning to the
contour,” page 413
Returning to the contour

With the RESTORE POSITION function, the TNC returns to the
workpiece contour in the following situations:
n Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a
program interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL
STOP function.
n Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT N,
for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP.
n Depending on the machine, if the position of an axis has changed
after the control loop has been opened during a program
interruption:
U To select a return to contour, press the RESTORE POSITION soft
key.
U To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the
screen, press the machine START button.
U To move the axes in any sequence, press the soft keys RESTORE
X, RESTORE Z, etc., and activate each axis with the machine START
key.
U To resume machining, press the machine START key.

11.5 Automatic Program Start
11.5 Automatic Program Start
Function
The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool

builder for use of the automatic program start function.
Refer to your machine manual.
In a Program Run operating mode, you can use the soft key
AUTOSTART (see figure at upper right) to define a specific time at
which the program that is currently active in this operating mode is to
be started:
U Show the window for entering the starting time (see
figure at center right).
U Time (h:min:sec): Time of day at which the program
is to be started
U Date (DD.MM.YYYY): Date at which the program is to
be started
U Toactivate the start, set the AUTOSTART soft key to
ON.

11.6 Optional Block Skip
11.6 Optional Block Skip

Function
In a test run or program run, the TNC can skip over blocks that begin
with a slash “/”:
U To run or test the program without the blocks
preceded by a slash, set the soft key to ON.
U To run or test the program with the blocks preceded
by a slash, set the soft key to OFF.
This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks.

After a power interruption the TNC returns to the most
recently selected setting.

11.7 Optional Program Run
11.7 Optional Program Run Interruption
Interruption
Function
The TNC optionally interrupts the program or test run at blocks
containing M01. If you use M01 in the Program Run mode, the TNC
does not switch off the spindle or coolant.
U Do not interrupt program run or test run at blocks
containing M01: Set soft key to OFF
U Interrupt
program run or test run at blocks containing
M01: Set soft key to ON

12
MOD Functions
12.1 MOD functions
12.1 MOD functions
The MOD functions provide additional displays and input possibilities.

The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode.
Selecting the MOD functions

Call the mode of operation in which you wish to change the MOD
function.
U To select the MOD functions, press the MOD key.
The figures at right show typical screen menus in
Programming and Editing (figure at upper right), Test
Run (figure at lower right) and in a machine operating
mode (see figure on next page).
Changing the settings

U Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the
arrow keys.
There are three possibilities for changing a setting, depending on the
function selected:
n Enter a numerical value directly, e.g. when determining traverse
range limit
n Change a setting by pressing the ENT key, e.g. when setting
program input
n Change a setting via a selection window. If there are more than one
possibilities for a particular setting available, you can superimpose a
window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO
key. Select the desired setting directly by pressing the
corresponding numerical key (to the left of the colon), or using the
arrow keys and then confirming with ENT. If you don't want to
change the setting, close the window again with END.
Exiting the MOD functions

U Close the MOD functions with the END soft key or key.
Overview of MOD functions

Depending on the selected mode of operation, you can make the
following changes:
Programming and Editing:
n Display software numbers
n Enter code number
n Set data interface
n Machine-specific user parameters (if provided)
n HELP files (if provided)
418 12 MOD Functions

12.1 MOD functions
Test Run:
n Enter code number
n Setting the data interface
n Showing the workpiece in the working space
n Machine-specific user parameters (if provided)
n Displaying HELP files (if provided)
In all other modes:
n Display code digits for installed options
n Select position display
n Unit of measurement (mm/inches)
n Programming language for MDI
n Select the axes for actual position capture
n Set the axis traverse limits
n Display the datums
n Displaying Operating Time
n HELP files (if provided)
n Activate Teleservice functions (if provided)

12.2 Software Numbers and Option
12.2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers
Numbers
Function
The software numbers of the NC, PLC and the SETUP floppy disks
appear in the TNC screen after the MOD functions have been
selected. Directly below them are the code numbers for the installed
options (OPT:):
No option OPT 00000000
Option for digitizing with triggering touch probe OPT 00000001
Option for digitizing with measuring touch probe OPT 00000011

12.3 Code Number
12.3 Code Number

Function
The TNC requires a code number for the following functions:
Function Code number

Select user parameters 123
Configuring an Ethernet card NET123
Enabling special functions for Q 555343

parameter programming

12.4 Setting the Data Interfaces
Function
To setup the data interfaces, press the RS 232- / RS 422 - SETUP soft
key to call a menu for setting the data interfaces:
Setting the RS-232 interface

The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS-232 interface are
entered in the upper left of the screen.
Setting the RS-422 interface

The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS-422 interface are
entered in the upper right of the screen.
Setting the OPERATING MODE of the external

device
The functions “Transfer all files,” “Transfer selected file,”

and “Transfer directory” are not available in the operating
modes FE2 and EXT.
Setting the BAUD RATE

You can set the BAUD-RATE (data transfer speed) from 110 to
115,200 baud.
External device Operating mode Symbol
PC with HEIDENHAIN software LSV2
TNCremo for remote operation of
the TNC
PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer FE1

software TNCremo
HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units

FE 401 B FE1
FE 401 from prog. no. 230 626 03 FE1
HEIDENHAIN floppy disk unit FE2

FE 401 up to prog. no. 230 626 02
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices such as EXT1, EXT2

punchers, PC without TNCremo

Assign
This function sets the destination for the transferred data.
Applications:
n Transferring values with Q parameter function FN15
n Transferring values with Q parameter function FN16
n Path on the TNC’s hard disk in which the digitized data are stored
The TNC mode of operation determines whether the PRINT or PRINT
TEST function is used:
TNC mode of operation Transfer function

Program Run, Single Block PRINT
Program Run, Full Sequence PRINT
Test run PRINT TEST
You can set PRINT and PRINT TEST as follows:

Function Path
Output data via RS-232 RS232:\....
Output data via RS-422 RS422:\....
Save data to the TNC’s hard disk TNC:\....
Save data in directory in which the program with - vacant -

FN15/FN16 or the program with the digitizing
cycles is located
File names
Data Operating mode File name
Surface data Program run Defined in the
RANGE cycle
Values with FN15 Program run %FN15RUN.A
Values with FN15 Test run %FN15SIM.A
Values with FN16 Program run %FN16RUN.A
Values with FN16 Test run %FN16SIM.A

Software for data transfer
For transfer of files to and from the TNC, we recommend using one
the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software products for data
transfer, such as TNCremo or TNCremoNT. With TNCremo/
TNCremoNT, data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls
via serial interface.
Please contact your HEIDENHAIN agent if you would like

to receive the TNCremo or TNCremoNT data transfer
software for a nominal fee.
System requirements for TNCremo:

n AT personal computer or compatible system
n Operating system MS-DOS/PC-DOS 3.00 or later, Windows 3.1,
Windows for Workgroups 3.11, Windows NT 3.51, OS/2
n 640 KB working memory
n 1 MB free memory space on your hard disk
n One free serial interface
n A Microsoft-compatible mouse (for ease of operation, not essential)
System requirements for TNCremoNT:
n PC with 486 processor or higher
n Operating system Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0
n 16 MB working memory
n 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk
n One free serial interface or connection to the TCP/IP network on
TNCs with Ethernet card
Installation under Windows

U Start the SETUP.EXE installation program in the file manager
(Explorer).
U Follow the instructions of the setup program.
Starting TNCremo under Windows 3.1, 3.11 and NT 3.51

Windows 3.1, 3.11, NT 3.51:
U Double-click on the icon in the program group HEIDENHAIN
Applications.
When you start TNCremo for the first time, you will be asked for the
type of control you have connected, the interface (COM1 or COM2)
and the data transfer speed. Enter the necessary information.
Starting TNCremoNT under Windows 95, Windows 98 and NT 4.0

U Click on <Start>, <Programs>, <HEIDENHAIN Applications>,
<TNCremoNT>
When you start TNCremoNT for the first time, TNCremoNT
automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC.

Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremo
Ensure that:
n The TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC.
n The operating mode of the interface is set to LSV2 on the TNC.
n The data transfer speed set on the TNC for LSV2 operation is the
same as that set on TNCremo.
Once you have started TNCremo, you will see a list of all of the files
that are stored in the active directory on the left side of the main
window 1 . Using the menu items <Directory>, <Change>, you can
change the active directory or select another directory on your PC.
If you want to control data transfer from the PC, establish the
connection with your PC in the following way:
U Select <Connect>, <Link>. TNCremo now receives the file and
directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left
of the main window 2.
U To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC, select the file in the TNC
window (highlighted with a mouse click) and activate the functions
<File> <Transfer>.
U To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC, select the file in the PC
window (highlighted with a mouse click) and activate the functions
<File> <Transfer>.
If you want to control data transfer from the TNC, establish the
U Select <Connect>, <File server (LSV2)>. TNCremo is now in server
mode. It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC.
U You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by
pressing the key PGM MGT (see “Data transfer to or from an
external data medium” on page 59) and transfer the desired files.
End TNCremo
Select the menu items <File>, <Exit>, or press the key combination
ALT+X.
Refer also to the TNCremoNT help texts where all of the

functions are explained in more detail.
Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremoNT

Ensure that:
n The TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC or to the
network, respectively.
n The operating mode of the interface is set to LSV2 on the TNC.
Once you have started TNCremoNT, you will see a list of all of the files
that are stored in the active directory on the upper section of the main
window 1. Using the menu items <File>, <Change directory>, you can
change the active directory or select another directory on your PC.

12.4 Setting the Data Interfaces If you want to control data transfer from the PC, establish the
U Select <File>, <Setup connection>. TNCremoNT now receives the
file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the
bottom left of the main window 2.
U To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC, select the file in the TNC
window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file
into the PC window 1.
U To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC, select the file in the PC
window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file
into the PC window 2.
If you want to control data transfer from the TNC, establish the
U Select <Extras>, <TNCserver>. TNCremoNT is now in server mode.
It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC.
U You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by
pressing the key PGM MGT (see “Data transfer to or from an
external data medium” on page 59) and transfer the desired files.
End TNCremoNT
Select the menu items <File>, <Exit>.
Refer also to the TNCremoNT help texts where all of the

functions are explained in more detail.

12.5 Ethernet Interface

Introduction
As an option, you can equip the TNC with an Ethernet card to connect
the control as a client in your network. The TNC transmits data through
the Ethernet card in accordance with the Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) family of protocols and with the aid
of the Network File System (NFS). Since TCP/IP and NFS are
implemented in UNIX systems, you can usually connect the TNC in the
UNIX world without any additional software.
The PC world with Microsoft operating systems, however, also works
with TCP/IP, but not with NFS. You will therefore need additional
software to connect the TNC to a PC network. For the operating
systems Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows NT 4.0,
HEIDENHAIN recommends the network software CimcoNFS for
HEIDENHAIN which you can order separately or together with the
Ethernet card for the TNC.:
Item HEIDENHAIN ID number

Only software CimcoNFS for 339 737-01
HEIDENHAIN
Ethernet card and software 293 890-73

CimcoNFS for HEIDENHAIN
Installing an Ethernet card
Switch-off the TNC and the machine before you install an

Ethernet card!
Read the installation instruction supplied with the Ethernet
card!
Connection possibilities
You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network
through the RJ45 connection (X26, 10BaseT). The connection is
metallically isolated from the control electronics.
RJ45 connection X26 (10BaseT)
For a 10BaseT connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect TNC
the TNC to your network. PC
For unshielded cable, the maximum cable length between

the TNC and a node is 100 meters (329 ft). For shielded
cable, it is 400 meters (1300 ft). 10BaseT
If you connect the TNC directly with a PC you must use a

transposed cable.

Configuring the TNC
Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a

network specialist.
U In the Programming and Editing mode of operation, press the MOD

key. Enter the code word NET123. The TNC will then display the
main screen for network configuration.
General network settings

U Press the DEFINE NET soft key to enter the general network
settings and enter the following information:
Setting Meaning
ADDRESS Address that your network manager must assign
to the TNC. Input: four decimal numbers
separated by points, e.g. 160.1.180.20
MASK The SUBNET MASK for expanding the number of

available addresses within your network. Input:
four decimal numbers separated by points. Ask
your network manager for the number of your
subnet mask, e.g. 255.255.0.0.
ROUTER Internet address of your default router. Enter the

Internet address only if your network consists of
several parts. Input: four decimal numbers
separated by points. Ask your network manager
for your address, e.g. 160.2.0.2.
PROT Definition of the transmission protocol.
RFC: Transmission protocol according to RFC 894

IEEE: Transmission protocol according to IEEE
802.2/802.3
HW Definition of the connection used

10BASET: for use of 10BaseT
HOST Name, under which the TNC identifies itself in the

network. If you are using a host name, you must
enter the “Fully Qualified Hostname” here. If you
do not enter a name here, the TNC uses the so-
called null authentication. The UID, GID, DCM and
FCM settings specific to the device (see next
page), are then ignored by the TNC.

Network settings specific to the device
U Press the soft key DEFINE MOUNT to enter the network settings
for a specific device. You can define any number of network
settings, but you can manage only seven at one time.
Setting Meaning
ADDRESS Address of your server. Input: four decimal
numbers separated by points. Ask your network
manager for the number of your address. e.g.
160.1.13.4.
RS Packet size in bytes for data reception. Input

range: 512 to 4 096. Input 0: The TNC uses the
optimal packet size as reported by the server.
WS Packet size in bytes for data transmission. Input

range: 512 to 4 096. Input 0: The TNC uses the
optimal packet size as reported by the server.
TIMEOUT Time in ms, after which the TNC repeats a

Remote Procedure Call. Input range: 0 to 100
000. Standard input: 700, which corresponds to a 111101000
TIMEOUT of 700 milliseconds. Use higher values
only if the TNC must communicate with the
server through several routers. Ask your network
manager for the proper timeout setting.
HM Definition of whether the TNC should repeat the

Remote Procedure Call until the NFS server
answers.
0: Always repeat the Remote Procedure Call
1: Do not repeat the Remote Procedure Call
DEVICENAME Name that the TNC shows in the file manager for
a connected device.
PATH Directory of the NFS server that you wish to

connect to the TNC. Be sure to differentiate
between small and capital letters when entering
the path.
UID Definition of the User Identification under which

you access files in the network. Ask your
network manager for the proper timeout setting.
GID Definition of the group identification with which

you access files in the network. Ask your
network manager for the proper timeout setting.
DCM Here you enter the rights of access to the NFS

server (see figure at center right). Enter a binary
coded value. Example: 111101000
0: Access not permitted
1: Access permitted

Setting Meaning
DCM Here you enter the rights of access to files on the
NFS server (see figure at upper right). Enter a
binary coded value. Example: 111101000
0: Access not permitted
1: Access permitted
AM Definition of whether the TNC upon switch-on

should automatically connect with the network.
0: Do not automatically connect
1: Connect automatically
Defining the network printer

U Press the DEFINE PRINT soft key if you wish to print the files on the
network printer directly from the TNC.
Setting Meaning
ADDRESS Address of your server. Input: four decimal
numbers separated by points. Ask your network
manager for the number of your address. e.g.
160.1.13.4.
DEVICE Name of printer that the TNC shows when the

NAME PRINT soft key is pressed, see “Advanced File
Management,” page 49
PRINTER Name of the printer in your network. Ask your

NAME network manager.
Checking the network connection

U Press the PING soft key.
U Enter the Internet address of the device with which you wish to
check the connection, and confirm your entry with ENT. The TNC
transmits data packets until you exit the test monitor by pressing the
END key.
In the TRY line the TNC shows the number of data packets that were
transmitted to the previously defined addressee. Behind the number
of transmitted data packets the TNC shows the status:
Status display Meaning

HOST RESPOND Data packet was received again, connection is
OK.
TIMEOUT Data packet was not received, check the

connection.
CAN NOT ROUTE Data packet could not be transmitted. Check

the Internet address of the server and of the
router to the TNC.

Displaying the error log
U Press the SHOW ERROR soft key if you would like to see the error
log. Here the TNC records all errors that have occurred in the
network since the TNC was last switched on.
The listed error messages are divided into two categories:
Warnings are indicated with (W). Warnings occur when the TNC was
able to establish the network connection, but had to correct settings
in order to do so.
Error messages are indicated with (E). Error messages occur when the
TNC was unable to establish a network connection.
Error message Cause

LL: (W) CONNECTION xxxxx UNKNOWN USING DEFAULT The name you entered in DEFINE NET, HW was
10BASET incorrect
LL: (E) PROTOCOL xxxxx UNKNOWN The name you entered in DEFINE NET, PROT was
incorrect
IP4: (E) INTERFACE NOT PRESENT The TNC was unable to find an Ethernet card.
IP4: (E) INTERNETADDRESS NOT VALID You used an invalid Internet address for the TNC.
IP4: (E) SUBNETMASK NOT VALID The SUBNET MASK does not match the Internet
address of the TNC.
IP4: (E) SUBNETMASK OR HOST ID NOT VALID You used an invalid Internet address for the TNC, or
you entered an incorrect SUBNET MASK, or you set
all of the HostID bits to 0 (1)
IP4: (E) SUBNETMASK OR SUBNET ID NOT VALID All bits of the SUBNET ID are 0 or 1
IP4: (E) DEFAULTROUTERADRESS NOT VALID You used an invalid Internet address for the router.
IP4: (E) CAN NOT USE DEFAULTROUTER The default router does not have the same net ID or
subnet ID as the TNC.
IP4: (E) I AM NOT A ROUTER You defined the TNC as a router.
MOUNT: <Device name> (E) DEVICENAME NOT VALID The device name is either too long or it contains
illegal characters.
MOUNT: <Device name> (E) DEVICENAME ALREADY ASSIGNED You have already defined a device with this name.
MOUNT: <Device name> (E) DEVICETABLE OVERFLOW You have attempted to connect more than seven
network drives to the TNC.
NFS2: <Device name> (W) READSIZE SMALLER THEN x SET TO x The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT, RS
is too small. The TNC sets RS to 512 bytes.
NFS2: <Device name> (W) READSIZE LARGER THEN x SET TO x The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT, RS
is too large. The TNC sets RS to 4096 bytes.
NFS2: <Device name> (W) WRITESIZE SMALLER THEN x SET TO x The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT, WS
is too small. The TNC sets WS to 512 bytes.

Error message Cause
NFS2: <Device name> (W) WRITESIZE LARGER THEN x SET TO x The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT, WS
is too large. The TNC sets WS to 4096 bytes.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) MOUNTPATH TO LONG The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT,
PATH is too long.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) NOT ENOUGH MEMORY At the moment there is too little main memory
available to establish a network connection.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) HOSTNAME TO LONG The name you entered in DEFINE NET, HOST is too
long.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) CAN NOT OPEN PORT The TNC cannot open the port required to establish
the network connection.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) ERROR FROM PORTMAPPER The TNC has received implausible data from the
portmapper.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) ERROR FROM MOUNTSERVER The TNC has received implausible data from the
mountserver.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) CANT GET ROOTDIRECTORY The mount server does not permit a connection with
the directory defined in DEFINE MOUNT, PATH.
NFS2: <Device name> (E) UID OR GID 0 NOT ALLOWED You entered 0 for DEFINE MOUNT, UID or GID 0.
The input value 0 is reserved for the system
administrator.

12.6 Configuring PGM MGT
12.6 Configuring PGM MGT

Function
With this function you can determine the features of the file manager:
n Standard: Simple file management without directory display
n Expanded range: File management with additional functions and
directory display
Note: see “Standard File Management,” page 41, and see

“Advanced File Management,” page 49.
Changing the setting

U Select the file manager in the Programming and Editing mode of
operation: press the PGM MGT key
U Select the MOD function: Press the MOD key
U Select the PGM MGT setting: using the arrow keys, move the
highlight onto the PGM MGT setting and use the ENT key to switch
between STANDARD and ENHANCED.

12.7 Machine-Specific User
12.7 Machine-Specific User Parameters
Parameters
Function
To enable you to set machine-specific functions, your machine tool
builder can define up to 16 machine parameters as user parameters.
This function is not available on every TNC. Refer to your

machine manual.

12.8 Showing the workpiece in the
12.8 Showing the workpiece in the working space

working space
Function
This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the
workpiece blank in the machine's working space and to activate work
space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation. This function is
activated with the BLANK IN WORD SPACE soft key.
The TNC displays a cuboid for the working space. Its dimensions are
shown in the “Traverse range” window. The TNC takes the
dimensions for the working space from the machine parameters for
the active traverse range. Since the traverse range is defined in the
reference system of the machine, the datum of the cuboid is also the
machine datum. You can see the position of the machine datum in the
cuboid by pressing the soft key M91 in the 2nd soft-key row.
Another cuboid represents the blank form. The TNC takes its
dimensions from the workpiece blank definition in the selected
program. The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system for
input. Its datum lies within the cuboid. You can see in the cuboid the
position of the datum for input by pressing the corresponding soft key
in the 2nd soft-key row.
For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank
is located within the working space. However, if you test programs
that contain movements with M91 or M92, you must graphically shift
the workpiece blank to prevent contour damage. Use the soft keys
shown in the table at right.
You can also activate the working-space monitor for the Test Run
mode in order to test the program with the current datum and the
active traverse ranges (see table below, last line).
Function Soft key

Move workpiece blank to the left
Move workpiece blank to the right
Move workpiece blank forward
Move workpiece blank backward
Move workpiece blank upward
Move workpiece blank downward
Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum

12.8 Showing the workpiece in the working space
Function Soft key
Show the entire traversing range referenced to the
displayed workpiece blank
Show the machine datum in the working space
Show a position determined by the machine tool

builder (e.g. tool change position) in the working
space
Show the workpiece datum in the working space.
Enable (ON) or disable (OFF) work space monitoring

12.9 Position Display Types
12.9 Position Display Types

Function
In the Manual Operation mode and in the program run modes of
operation, you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed.
The figure at right shows the different tool positions:
n Starting position
n Target position of the tool
n Workpiece datum
n Machine datum
The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates:
Function Display
Nominal position: the value presently NOML.
commanded by the TNC
Actual position; current tool position ACTL.
Reference position; the actual position relative to REF

the machine datum
Distance remaining to the programmed position; DIST.

difference between actual and target positions
Servo lag: difference between nominal and actual LAG

positions (following error)
Deflection of the measuring touch probe DEFL.
Traverses that were carried out with handwheel M118

superpositioning (M118)
(only position display 2)
With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position
display in the status display.
With Position display 2 you can select the position display in the
additional status display.

12.10 Select the unit of
12.10 Select the unit of measurement
measurement
Function
This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed
in millimeters (metric system) or inches.
n To select the metric system (e.g. X = 15.789 mm) set the Change
mm/inches function to mm. The value is displayed to 3 decimal
places.
n To select the inch system (e.g. X = 0.6216 inch) set the Change mm/
inches function to inches. The value is displayed to 4 decimal places.
If you would like to activate the inch display, the TNC shows the feed
rate in inch/min. In an inch program you must enter the feed rate large
by a factor of 10.

12.11 Select the programming
12.11 Select the programming Language for $MDI

Language for $MDI
Function
The Program input mod function lets you decide whether to program
the $MDI file in HEIDENHAIN conversational dialog or in ISO format.
n To program the $MDI.H file in conversational dialog,
set the Program input function to HEIDENHAIN
n To program the $MDI.I file according to ISO,
set the Program input function to ISO

12.12 Selecting the Axes for
12.12 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks
Generating L Blocks
Function
The axis selection input field enables you to define the current tool
position coordinates that are transferred to an L block. To generate a
separate L block, press the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE soft key.
The axes are selected by bit-oriented definition similar to programming
the machine parameters:
Axis selection %11111Transfer the X, Y, Z, IV and V axes
Axis selection %01111Transfer the X, Y, Z and IV axes
Axis selection %00111Transfer the X, Y and Z axes
Axis selection %00011Transfer the X and Y axes
Axis selection %00001Transfer the X axis

12.13 Enter the axis traverse limits,
12.13 Enter the axis traverse limits, datum display

datum display
Function
The AXIS LIMIT mod function allows you to set limits to axis traverse
within the machine's actual working envelope.
Z
Possible application: to protect an indexing fixture against tool
collision.
The maximum range of traverse of the machine tool is defined by
software limit switches. This range can be additionally limited through Z max
the TRAVERSE RANGE mod function. With this function, you can Z min
enter the maximum and minimum traverse positions for each axis,
referenced to the machine datum. If several traverse ranges are Y
possible on your machine, you can set the limits for each range
X min
separately using the soft keys TRAVERSE RANGE (1) to TRAVERSE Ymax
RANGE (3).
X max Ymin
Working without additional traverse limits X

To allow a machine axis to use its full range of traverse, enter the
maximum traverse of the TNC (+/- 99999 mm) as the TRAVERSE
RANGE.
To find and enter the maximum traverse:

U Set the Position display mod function to REF.
U Move the spindle to the positive and negative end positions of the
X, Y and Z axes.
U Write down the values, including the algebraic sign.
U To select the MOD functions, press the MOD key.
U Enter the limits for axis traverse: Press the TRAVERSE
RANGE soft key and enter the values that you wrote
down as limits in the corresponding axes
U To exit the MOD function, press the END soft key
The tool radius is not automatically compensated in the

axis traverse limit value.
The traverse range limits and software limit switches
become active as soon as the reference points are
traversed.
Datum display
The values shown at the lower left of the screen are the manually set
datums referenced to the machine datum. They cannot be changed in
the menu.

12.14 Displaying HELP Files
12.14 Displaying HELP Files
Function
Help files can aid you in situations in which you need clear instructions
before you can continue (for example, to retract the tool after an
interruption of power). The miscellaneous functions may also be
explained in a help file. The figure at right shows the screen display of
a help file.
HELP files are not provided on every machine. Your

machine tool builder can provide you with further
information on this feature.
Selecting HELP files

U Select the MOD function: Press the MOD key
U To select the last active HELP file, press the HELP soft
key.
U Call the file manager (PGM MGT key) and select a
different help file, if necessary.

12.15 Displaying Operating Time
12.15 Displaying Operating Time

Function
The machine tool builder can provide further operating

time displays. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to show different operating
time displays:
Operating time Meaning

Control ON Operating time of the control since its
commissioning
Machine ON Operating time of the machine tool since

commissioning
Program run Duration of controlled operation since initial

setup

12.16 Teleservice
12.16 Teleservice
Function
The Teleservice functions are enabled and adapted by the

machine tool builder. The machine tool manual provides
further information.
The TNC provides two soft keys for the Teleservice,
making it possible to configure two different service
agencies.
The TNC allows you to carry out Teleservice. To be able to use this
feature, your TNC should be equipped with an Ethernet card which
achieves a higher data transfer rate than the serial RS232-C interface.
With the HEIDENHAIN TeleService software, your machine tool
builder can then establish a connection to the TNC via an ISDN modem
and carry out diagnostics. The following functions are available:
n On-line screen transfer
n Polling of machine states
n Data transfer
n Remote control of the TNC
Generally, a connection via the Internet would also be possible. First
tests have shown, however, that the transfer rate that can currently
be achieved is not sufficient due to the high degree of utilization of the
networks.
Calling/Exiting Teleservice
U Select any machine mode of operation.
U To select the MOD function, press the MOD key.
U Establish a connection to the service agency: Set the
SERVICE or SUPPORT soft key to ON. The TNC
breaks the connection automatically if no new data
have been transferred for a time set by the machine
tool builder (default: 15 min).
U To break the connection to the service agency: Set the
SERVICE or SUPPORT soft key to OFF. The TNC
terminates the connection after approx. one minute.

12.17 External Access
12.17 External Access

Function
The machine tool builder can configure Teleservice

settings with the LSV-2 interface. The machine tool
manual provides further information.
The soft key SERVICE can be used to grant or restrict access through
the LSV-2 interface.
With an entry in the configuration file TNC.SYS you can protect a
directory and its subdirectories with a password. The password is
requested when data from this directory is accessed from the LSV-2
interface. Enter the path and password for external access in the
configuration file TNC.SYS.
The TNC.SYS file must be stored in the root directory

TNC:\.
If you only supply one entry for the password, then the
entire drive TNC:\ is protected.
You should use the updated versions of the HEIDENHAIN
software TNCremo or TNCremoNT to transfer the data.
Entries in TNC.SYS Meaning

REMOTE.TNCPASSWORD= Password for LSV-2 access
REMOTE.TNCPRIVATEPATH= Path to be protected
Example of TNC.SYS
REMOTE.TNCPASSWORD=KR1402
REMOTE.TNCPRIVATEPATH=TNC:\RK
Permitting/Restricting external access

U Select any machine mode of operation.
U To select the MOD function, press the MOD key.
U Permit a connection to the TNC: Set the EXTERNAL
ACCESS soft key to ON. The TNC will then permit
data access through the LSV-2 interface. The
password is requested when a directory that was
entered in the configuration file TNC.SYS is accessed.
U Blockconnections to the TNC: Set the EXTERNAL
ACCESS soft key to OFF. The TNC will then block
access through the LSV-2 interface.

13
Tables and Overviews
13.1 General User Parameters
General user parameters are machine parameters affecting TNC

settings that the user may want to change in accordance with his
requirements.
Some examples of user parameters are:
n Dialog language
n Interface behavior
n Traversing speeds
n Sequence of machining
n Effect of overrides
Input possibilities for machine parameters

Machine parameters can be programmed as
n Decimal numbers
Enter only the number
n Pure binary numbers
Enter a percent sign (%) before the number
n Hexadecimal numbers
Enter a dollar sign ($) before the number
Example:
Instead of the decimal number 27 you can also enter the binary
number %11011 or the hexadecimal number $1B.
The individual machine parameters can be entered in the different
number systems.
Some machine parameters have more than one function. The input
value for these machine parameters is the sum of the individual
values. For these machine parameters the individual values are
preceded by a plus sign.
Selecting general user parameters

General user parameters are selected with code number 123 in the
MOD functions.
The MOD functions also include machine-specific user

parameters.
448 13 Tables and Overviews

External data transfer
Integrating TNC interfaces EXT1 (5020.0) MP5020.x
and EXT2 (5020.1) to an external device 7 data bits (ASCII code, 8th bit = parity): +0
8 data bits (ASCII code, 9th bit = parity): +1
Block Check Character (BCC) any: +0

Block Check Character (BCC) control character not permitted: +2
Transmission stop through RTS active: +4

Transmission stop through RTS inactive: +0
Transmission stop through DC3 active: +8

Transmission stop through DC3 inactive: +0
Character parity even: +0

Character parity odd: +16
Character parity not desired: +0

Character parity desired: +32
11/2 stop bits: +0

2 stop bit: +64
1 stop bit: +128

1 stop bit: +192
Example:
Use the following setting to adjust the TNC interface EXT2 (MP 5020.1) to
an external non-HEIDENHAIN device:
8 data bits, any BCC, transmission stop through DC3, even character
parity, character parity desired, 2 stop bits
Input for MP 5020.1: 1+0+8+0+32+64 = 105
Interface type for EXT1 (5030.0) and MP5030.x

EXT2 (5030.1) Standard transmission: 0
Interface for blockwise transfer: 1
3-D touch probes and digitizing

Select touch probe MP6200
(only with option for digitizing with Triggering touch probe: 0
measuring touch probe) Measuring touch probe: 1
Select signal transmission MP6010

Touch probe with cable transmission: 0
Touch probe with infrared transmission: 1
Probing feed rate for triggering touch MP6120

probes 1 to 3 000 [mm/min]
Maximum traverse to first probe point MP6130

0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Safety clearance to probing point during MP6140

automatic measurement 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]

Rapid traverse for triggering touch probes MP6150
1 to 300 000 [mm/min]
Measure center misalignment of the stylus MP6160

when calibrating a triggering touch probe No 180° rotation of the 3-D touch probe during calibration: 0
M function for 180° rotation of the touch probe during calibration: 1 to 999
M function for orienting the infrared sensor MP6161

before each measuring cycle Function inactive: 0
Orientation directly through the NC: -1
M function for orienting the touch probe: 1 to 999
Angle of orientation for the infrared sensor MP6162

0 to 359.9999 [°]
Difference between the current angle of MP6163

orientation and the angle of orientation set 0 to 3.0000 [°]
in MP 6162; when the entered difference is
reached, an oriented spindle stop is to be
carried out.
Automatically orient the infrared sensor MP6165

before probing to the programmed probing Function inactive: 0
direction Orient infrared sensor: 1
Multiple measurement for programmable MP6170

probe function 1 to 3
Confidence range for multiple MP6171

measurement 0.001 to 0.999 [mm]
Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the MP6180.0 (traverse range 1) to MP6180.2 (traverse range3)
calibration ring in the X-axis referenced to 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
the machine datum
Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the MP6181.x (traverse range 1) to MP6181.2 (traverse range3)
calibration ring in the Y-axis referenced to 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
the machine datum for
Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the MP6182.x (traverse range 1) to MP6182.2 (traverse range3)
calibration ring in the Z-axis referenced to 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
the machine datum for
Automatic calibration cycle: distance below MP6185.x (traverse range 1) to MP6185.2 (traverse range 3)
the upper edge of the ring where the 0.1 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
calibration is carried out by the TNC
Infeed of the stylus when digitizing with the MP6310

measuring touch probe 0.1 to 2.0000 [mm] (recommended: 1 mm)
Measure center misalignment of the stylus MP6321

when calibrating a measuring touch probe Measure center misalignment: 0
Do not measure center misalignment: 1

Assign touch probe axis to machine axis for MP6322.0
a measuring touch probe Machine X axis parallel to touch probe axis X: 0, Y: 1, Z: 2
Note: MP6322.1
Ensure that the touch probe axes are correctly Machine Y axis parallel to touch probe axis X: 0, Y: 1, Z: 2
assigned to the machine axes. Wrong
assignment could lead to a stylus break. MP6322.2
Machine Z axis parallel to touch probe axis X: 0, Y: 1, Z: 2
Maximum stylus deflection of the MP6330

measuring touch probe 0.1 to 4.0000 [mm]
Feed rate for positioning measuring touch MP6350

probes at MIN point and approaching the 1 to 3 000 [mm/min]
contour
Probe feed rate for measuring touch probes MP6360

1 to 3 000 [mm/min]
Rapid traverse for measuring touch probes MP6361

in the probe cycle 10 to 3 000 [mm/min]
Feed rate reduction when the stylus of a MP6362

measuring touch probe is deflected to the Feed rate reduction not active: 0
side Feed rate reduction active: 1
The TNC decreases the feed rate according to
a preset characteristic curve. The minimum
input value is 10% of the programmed
digitizing feed rate.
Radial acceleration during digitizing with MP6370

the measuring touch probe 0.001 to 5.000 [m/s2] (recommended input value: 0.1)
MP6370 enables you to limit the feed rate of
the TNC for circular movements during
digitizing. Circular movements are caused, for
example, by sharp changes of direction.
As long as the programmed digitizing feed rate
is less than the feed rate calculated with
MP6370, the TNC will move at the
programmed feed rate. Determine the
appropriate value for your requirements by trial
and error.
Target window for digitizing contour lines MP6390

with a measuring touch probe 0.1 to 4.0000 [mm]
When you are digitizing contour lines the
individual contour lines do not end exactly in
their starting points.
With machine parameter MP6390 you can
define a square target window within which
the end point must lie after the touch probe has
orbited the model. Enter half the side length of
the target window for the side length.

Radius measurement with the TT 130 touch MP6505.0 (traverse range 1) to 6505.2 (traverse range 3)
probe: Probing direction Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis (0° axis): 0
Positive probing direction in the +90° axis: 1
Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis (0° axis): 2
Negative probing direction in the +90° axis: 3
Probing feed rate for second measurement MP6507

with TT 120, stylus shape, corrections in Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 130,
TOOL.T with constant tolerance: +0
Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 130,
with variable tolerance: +1
Constant feed rate for second measurement with TT 130: +2
Maximum permissible measuring error MP6510

with TT 130 during measurement with 0.001 to 0.999 [mm] (recommended input value: 0.005 mm)
rotating tool
Required for calculating the probing feed rate in
connection with MP6570
Feed rate for probing a stationary tool with MP6520

the TT 130 1 to 3 000 [mm/min]
Radius measurement with the TT 130: MP6530.0 (traverse range 1) to MP6530.2 (traverse range 3)
Distance from lower edge of tool to upper 0.001 to 99.9999 [mm]
edge of stylus
Set-up clearance in the tool axis above the MP6540.0

stylus of the TT 130 for pre-positioning 0.001 to 30 000.000 [mm]
Clearance zone in the machining plane MP6540.1

around the stylus of the TT 130 for pre- 0.001 to 30 000.000 [mm]
positioning
Rapid traverse for TT 130 in the probe cycle MP6550

10 to 10 000 [mm/min]
M function for spindle orientation when MP6560

measuring individual teeth 0 to 999
Measuring rotating tools: Permissible MP6570

rotational speed at the circumference of the 1.000 to 120.000 [m/min]
milling tool
Required for calculating rpm and probe feed
rate
Measuring rotating tools: Permissible MP6572

rotational rpm 0.000 to 1 000.000 [rpm]
If you enter 0, the speed is limited to 1000 rpm

Coordinates of the TT 120 stylus center MP6580.0 (traverse range 1)
relative to the machine datum X axis
MP6580.1 (traverse range 1)

Y axis

Z axis

X axis

Y axis

Z axis

X axis

Y axis

Z axis
TNC displays, TNC editor

Programming station MP7210
TNC with machine: 0
TNC as programming station with active PLC: 1
TNC as programming station with inactive PLC: 2
Acknowledgment of MP7212
POWER INTERRUPTED Acknowledge with key: 0
after switch-on Acknowledge automatically: 1
ISO programming: Set MP7220

the block number 0 to 150
increment
Disabling the selection MP7224.0

of file types All file types selectable via soft key: +0
Disable selection of HEIDENHAIN programs (soft key SHOW .H): +1
Disable selection of ISO programs (soft key SHOW .I): +2
Disable selection of tool tables (soft key SHOW .T): +4
Disable selection of datum tables (soft key SHOW .D): +8
Disable selection of pallet tables (soft key SHOW .P): +16
Disable selection of text files (soft key SHOW .A):+32
Disable selection of point tables (soft key SHOW .PNT): +64

Disabling the editor for MP7224.1
certain file types Do not disable editor: +0
Disable editor for
Note:
n HEIDENHAIN programs: +1
If a particular file type is
inhibited, the TNC will n ISO programs: +2
erase all files of this type. n Tool tables: +4
n Datum tables: +8
n Pallet tables: +16
n Text files: +32
n Point tables: +64
Configure pallet files MP7226.0

Pallet table inactive: 0
Number of pallets per pallet table: 1 to 255
Configure datum files MP7226.1

Datum table inactive: 0
Number of datums per datum table: 1 to 255
Program length for MP7229.0

program check Blocks 100 to 9 999
Program length up to MP7229.1

which FK blocks are Blocks 100 to 9 999
permitted
Dialog language MP7230

English: 0
German: 1
Czech: 2
French: 3
Italian: 4
Spanish: 5
Portuguese: 6
Swedish: 7
Danish: 8
Finnish: 9
Dutch: 10
Polish: 11
Hungarian: 12
reserved: 13
Russian: 14
Internal clock of the MP7235

TNC Universal time (Greenwich time): 0
Central European Time (CET): 1
Central European Summertime: 2
Time difference to universal time: -23 to +23 [hours]

Configure tool tables MP7260
Inactive: 0
Number of tools generated by the TNC when a new tool table is opened:
1 to 254
If you require more than 254 tools, you can expand the tool table with the function APPEND N
LINES, see “Tool Data,” page 99
Configure pocket MP7261.0 (magazine 1)

tables MP7261.1 (magazine 2)
MP7261.2 (magazine 3)
MP7261.3 (magazine 4)
Inactive: 0
Number of pockets in the tool magazine: 1 to 254
If the value 0 is entered in MP 7261.1 to MP7261.3, then only one tool magazine will be used.
Index tool numbers in MP7262

order to be able to Do not index: 0
assign different Number of permissible indices: 1 to 9
compensation data to
one tool number
Soft key for pocket MP7263

tables Show the POCKET TABLE soft key in the tool table: 0
Do not show the POCKET TABLE soft key in the tool table: 1
Configure tool table MP7266.0

(To omit from the Tool name – NAME: 0 to 31; column width: 16 characters
table: enter 0); Column MP7266.1
number in the tool Tool length – L: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
table for MP7266.2
Tool radius – R: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.3
Tool radius 2 – R2: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.4
Oversize length – DL: 0 to 31; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.5
Oversize radius – DR: 0 to 31; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.6
Oversize radius 2 – DR2: 0 to 31; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.7
Tool locked – TL: 0 to 31; column width: 2 characters
MP7266.8
Replacement tool – RT: 0 to 31; column width: 3 characters
MP7266.9
Maximum tool life – TIME1: 0 to 31; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.10
Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL – TIME2: 0 to 31; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.11
Current tool life – CUR. TIME: 0 to 31; column width: 8 characters

Configure tool table MP7266.12
(To omit from the Tool comment – DOC: 0 to 31; column width: 16 characters
table: enter 0); Column MP7266.13
number in the tool Number of teeth – CUT.: 0 to 31; column width: 4 characters
table for MP7266.14
Tolerance for wear detection in tool length – LTOL: 0 to 31; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.15
Tolerance for wear detection in tool radius – RTOL: 0 to 31; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.16
Cutting direction – DIRECT.: 0 to 31; column width: 7 characters
MP7266.17
PLC status – PLC: 0 to 31; column width: 9 characters
MP7266.18
Offset of the tool in the tool axis in addition to MP6530 – TT:L-OFFS: 0 to 31
column width: 11 characters
MP7266.19
Offset of the tool between stylus center and tool center – TT:R-OFFS: 0 to 31
column width: 11 characters
MP7266.20
Tolerance for break detection in tool length – LBREAK: 0 to 31; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.21
Tolerance for break detection in tool radius – RBREAK: 0 to 31; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.22
Tooth length (Cycle 22) – LCUTS: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.23
Maximum plunge angle (Cycle 22) – ANGLE.: 0 to 31; column width: 7 characters
MP7266.24
Tool type –TYP: 0 to 31; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.25
Tool material – TMAT: 0 to 31; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.26
Cutting data table – CDT: 0 to 31; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.27
PLC value – PLC-VAL: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.28
Center misalignment in reference axis – CAL-OFF1: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.29
Center misalignment in minor axis – CAL-OFF2: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.30
Spindle angle for calibration – CALL-ANG: 0 to 31; column width: 11 characters
Configure pocket MP7267.0

tables; Column Tool number – T: 0 to 7
number in the tool MP7267.1
table for Special tool – ST: 0 to 7
(To omit from the MP7267.2
table: enter 0) Fixed pocket – F: 0 to 7
MP7267.3
Pocket locked – L: 0 to 7
MP7267.4
PLC status – PLC: 0 to 7
MP7267.5
Tool name from tool table – TNAME: 0 to 7
MP7267.6
Comment from tool table – DOC: 0 to 7

Manual Operation MP7270
mode: Display of feed Display feed rate F only if an axis direction button is pressed: 0
rate Display feed rate F even if no axis direction button is pressed (feed rate defined via soft key F or
feed rate of the “slowest” axis): 1
Decimal character MP7280

The decimal character is a comma: 0
The decimal character is a point: 1
Display mode MP7281.0 Programming and Editing operating mode

MP7281.1 Program run mode
Always display multiple line blocks completely: 0
Display multiline blocks completely if the multiline block is the active block: 1
Display multiline blocks completely if the multiline block is being edited: 2
Position display in the MP7285

tool axis Display is referenced to the tool datum: 0
Display in the tool axis is referenced to the
tool face: 1
Display step for the MP7289

spindle position 0.1 °: 0
0.05 °: 1
0.01 °: 2
0.005 °: 3
0.001 °: 4
0.0005 °: 5
0.0001 °: 6
Display step MP7290.0 (X axis) to MP7290.8 (9th axis)

0.1 mm: 0
0.05 mm: 1
0.01 mm: 2
0.005 mm: 3
0.001 mm: 4
0.0005 mm: 5
0.0001 mm: 6
Disable datum setting MP7295

Do not disable datum setting: +0
Disable datum setting in the X axis: +1
Disable datum setting in the Y axis: +2
Disable datum setting in the Z axis: +4
Disable datum setting in the IVth axis: +8
Disable datum setting in the Vth axis: +16
Disable datum setting in the 6th axis: +32
Disable datum setting in the 8th axis: 128
Disable datum setting MP7296

with the orange axis Do not disable datum setting: 0
keys Disable datum setting with the orange axis keys: 1

Reset status display, Q MP7300
parameters and tool Reset them all when a program is selected: 0
data Reset them all when a program is selected and with M02, M30, END PGM: 1
Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected: 2
Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected and with M02, M30, END
PGM: 3
Reset status display and Q parameters when a program is selected: 4
Reset status display and Q parameters when a program is selected and with M02, M30, END
PGM: 5
Reset status display when a program is selected: 6
Reset status display when a program is selected and with M02, M30, END PGM: 7
Graphic display mode MP7310

Projection in three planes according to ISO 6433, projection method 1: +1
Projection in three planes according to ISO 6433, projection method 2: +1
Do not rotate coordinate for graphic display: +0
Rotate coordinate system for graphic display by 90°: +2
Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the old datum: +0
Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the new datum: +4
Do not show cursor position during projection in three planes: +0
Show cursor position during projection in three planes: +8
Graphic simulation MP7315

without programmed 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
tool axis: Tool radius
Graphic simulation MP7316

without programmed 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
tool axis: Penetration
depth
Graphic simulation MP7317.0

without programmed 0 to 88 (0: Function inactive)
tool axis: M function
for start
Graphic simulation MP7317.1

without programmed 0 to 88 (0: Function inactive)
tool axis: M function
for end
Screen saver MP7392

0 to 99 [min] (0: Function inactive)
Enter the time after
which the TNC should
start the screen saver

Machining and program run
Cycle 17: Oriented spindle stop at beginning MP7160
of cycle Oriented spindle stop: 0
No oriented spindle stop: 1
Effect of Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR MP7410

SCALING FACTOR effective in 3 axes: 0
SCALING FACTOR effective in the working plane only: 1
Manage tool data/calibration data MP7411

Overwrite current tool data by the calibrated data from the 3-D touch
probe system: +0
Current tool data are retained: +1
Manage calibrated data in the calibration menu: +0
Manage calibrated data in the tool table: +2
SL cycles MP7420
Mill channel around the contour - clockwise for islands and
counterclockwise for pockets: +0
Mill channel around the contour - clockwise for pockets and
counterclockwise for islands: +1
First mill the channel, then rough out the contour: +0
First rough out the contour, then mill the channel: +2
Combine compensated contours: +0
Combine uncompensated contours: +4
Complete one process for all infeeds before switching to the other
process: +0
Mill channel and rough-out for each infeed depth before continuing to the
next depth: +8
The following note applies to the Cycles 6, 15, 16, 21, 22, 23, and 24:
At the end of the cycle, move the tool to the position that was last
programmed before the cycle call: +0
At the end of the cycle, retract the tool in the tool axis only: +16
Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5 MP7430

CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING: Overlap factor 0.1 to 1.414
Permissible deviation of circle radius MP7431

between circle end point and circle starting 0.0001 to 0.016 [mm]
point
Operation of various miscellaneous MP7440

functions M Program stop with M06: +0
No program stop with M06: +1
Note: No cycle call with M89: +0
The k V factors for position loop gain are set by Cycle call with M89: +2
the machine tool builder. Refer to your machine Program stop with M functions: +0
manual. No program stop with M functions: +4
kV factors cannot be switched through M105 and M106: +0
kV factors switchable through M105 and M106: +8
Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F..
Function inactive: +0
Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F..
Function active: +16
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes inactive: +0
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes active: +32

Machining and program run
Error message during cycle call MP7441
Error message when M3/M4 not active: 0
Suppress error message when M3/M4 not active: +1
reserved: +2
Suppress error message when positive depth programmed: +0
Output error message when negative depth programmed: +4
M function for spindle orientation in the MP7442

fixed cycles Function inactive: 0
Orientation directly through the NC: -1
M function for orienting the spindle: 1 to 999
Maximum contouring speed at feed rate MP7470

override setting of 100% in the Program Run 0 to 99 999 [mm/min]
modes
Feed rate for rotary-axis compensation MP7471

movements 0 to 99 999 [mm/min]
Datums from a datum table are referenced MP7475

to the Workpiece datum: 0
Machine datum: 1
Running pallet tables MP7683

Program Run, Single Block: Run one line of the active NC program at every
NC start; Program Run, Full Sequence: Run the entire NC program at
every NC start: +0
Program Run, Single Block: Run the entire NC program at every NC
start:+1
Program Run, Full Sequence: Run all NC programs up to the next pallet at
every NC start: +2
Program Run, Full Sequence: Run the entire NC pallet file at every NC
start:+4
Program Run, Full Sequence: If running of the complete pallet file is
selected (+4), then run the pallet file without interruption, i.e. until you
press NC stop: +8
Pallet tables can be edited with the EDIT PALLET soft key: +16
Display the AUTOSTART soft key: +32
Pallet table or NC program is displayed: +64

13.2 Pin Layout and Connecting
13.2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces
Cable for the Data Interfaces
RS-232-C/V.24 Interface
HEIDEHAIN devices
External HEIDENHAIN RS-422 Adapter HEIDENHAIN X21

device standard cable block connecting cable TNC
3m max. 17 m
The connector pin layout on the adapter block differs from

that on the TNC logic unit (X21).

Non-HEIDENHAIN devices
The connector pin layout of a non-HEIDENHAIN device may differ
considerably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device.
This often depends on the unit and type of data transfer. The figure
below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block.
RS-422 Adapter X21

block TNC

RS-422/V.11 Interface
Only non-HEIDENHAIN devices are connected to the RS-422
interface.
The pin layouts on the TNC logic unit (X22) and on the
adapter block are identical.
External RS-422 Adapter HEIDENHAIN X22

device block connecting cable TNC
max. 1000 m

Ethernet interface RJ45 socket (option)
Maximum cable length:Unshielded: 100 m
Shielded: 400 m
Pin Signal Description

1 TX+ Transmit Data
2 TX– Transmit Data
3 REC+ Receive Data
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 REC– Receive Data
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
Ethernet interface BNC socket (option)

Maximum cable length: 180 m
Pin Signal Description

1 Data (RXI, TXO) Inner conductor (core)
2 GND Shielding

13.3 Technical Information

TNC features
Description Contouring control for machines with up to 9 axes plus oriented spindle
stop. The TNC 426 CB and TNC 430 CA feature analog speed control, the
TNC 426 PB and TNC 430 PB feature digital speed control and integrated
current controller.
Components n Logic unit

n Keyboard
n Color visual display unit with soft keys
Data interfaces n RS-232-C / V.24

n RS-422 / V.11
n Ethernet interface (option)
n Expanded data interface with LSV-2 protocol for remote operation of
the TNC through the data interface with the HEIDENHAIN software
TNCremo
Simultaneous axis control for contour n Straight lines: up to 5 axes

elements Export versions TNC 426 CF, TNC 426 PF, TNC 430 CE, TNC 430 PE:
4 axes
n Circles: up to 3 axes (with tilted working plane)
n Helices: 3 axes
Look-ahead n Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions (such as for 3-D

surfaces)
n Collision prevention with the SL cycle for open contours
n Geometry precalculation of radius-compensated positions for feed rate
adaptation with M120
Background programming One part program can be edited while the TNC runs another program
Graphics n Interactive Programming Graphics

n Test run graphics
n Program run graphics
File types n HEIDENHAIN conversational programming

n ISO programs
n Tool tables
n Cutting data tables
n Datum tables
n Point tables
n Pallet files
n Text files
n System files
Program memory n Hard disk with 1500 MB for NC programs

n No limit on number of files

TNC features
Tool definitions Up to 254 tools in the program or any number in tables
Programming support n Functions for approaching and departing the contour

n On-screen pocket calculator
n Structuring programs
n Comment blocks
n Direct help on output error messages (context-sensitive)
Programmable functions
Contour elements n Straight line
n Chamfer
n Circular path
n Circle center
n Circle radius
n Tangentially connecting circle
n Corner rounding
n Straight lines and circular arcs for contour approach and departure
n B spline
FK free contour programming For all contour elements not dimensioned for conventional NC
programming
Three-dimensional tool radius compensation For changing tool data without having to recalculate the program
Program jumps n Subprogram

n Program section repeat
n Program as subprogram
Fixed cycles n Drilling cycles for drilling, pecking, reaming, boring, tapping with a
floating tap holder, rigid tapping
n Cycles for milling internal and external threads
n Milling and finishing rectangular and circular pockets
n Cycles for multipass milling of flat and twisted surfaces
n Cycles for milling linear and circular slots
n Linear and circular hole patterns
n Milling pockets and islands from a list of subcontour elements
n Cylindrical surface interpolation
Coordinate transformations n Datum shift

n Mirror image
n Rotation
n Scaling factor
n Tilting the working plane

Programmable functions
3-D touch probe applications n Touch probe functions for compensating workpiece misalignment
n Touch probe functions for setting datums
n Touch probe functions for automatic workpiece measurement
n Digitizing 3-D surfaces with the measuring touch probe (optional)
n Digitizing 3-D surfaces with the triggering touch probe (optional)
n Automatic tool measurement with the TT 130
Mathematical functions n Basic arithmetic +, –, x and /

n Trigonometry sin, cos, tan, arc sin, arc cos, arc tan
n Square root and root sum of squares
n Squaring (SQ)
n Powers (^)
n Constant PI (3.14)
n Logarithms
n Exponential function
n Negation (NEG)
n Forming an integer (INT)
n Forming an absolute number (ABS)
n Truncating values before the decimal point (FRAC)
n Functions for calculating circles
n Logical comparisons (greater than, less than, equal to, not equal to)
TNC Specifications
Block processing time 4 ms/block
Control loop cycle time n TNC 426 CB, TNC 430 CA:
Contouring interpolation: 3 ms
Fine interpolation: 0.6 ms (contour)
n TNC 426 PB, TNC 430 PB:
Fine interpolation: 0.6 ms (speed)
n TNC M, TNC 430 M:
Fine interpolation: 0.6 ms (speed)
Data transfer rate Maximum 115,200 baud via V.24/V.11

Maximum 1 megabaud via Ethernet interface (optional)
Ambient temperature n Operation: 0° C to +45° C (32° to 113° F)

n Storage: –30°C to +70°C (–22° F to 158° F)
Traverse range Maximum 100 m (3973 inches)
Traversing speed Maximum 300 m/min (11 811 ipm)
Spindle speed Maximum 99 999 rpm

TNC Specifications
Input range n Minimum 0.1µm (0.00001 in.) or 0.0001°
n Maximum 99 999.999 mm (3.937 in.) or 99 999.999°
Input format and unit of TNC functions

Positions, coordinates, circle radii, chamfer -99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
lengths (5.4: places before decimal point, places after decimal point) [mm]
Tool numbers 0 to 32 767.9 (5.1)
Tool names 16 characters, enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL. Permitted
special characters: #, $, %, &, -
Delta values for tool compensation -99.9999 to +99.9999 (2.4) [mm]
Spindle speeds 0 to 99 999.999 (5.3) [rpm]
Feed rates 0 to 99 999.999 (5.3) [mm/min] or [mm/rev]
Dwell time in Cycle 9 0 to 3 600.000 (4.3) [s]
Thread pitch in various cycles -99.9999 to +99.9999 (2.4) [mm]
Angle of spindle orientation 0 to 360.0000 (3.4) [°]
Angle for polar coordinates, rotation, tilting -360.0000 to 360.0000 (3.4) [°]
the working plane
Polar coordinate angle for helical -5 400.0000 to 5 400.0000 (4.4) [°]

interpolation (CP)
Datum numbers in Cycle 7 0 to 2 999 (4.0)
Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 0.000001 to 99.999999 (2.6)
Miscellaneous functions M 0 to 999 (1.0)
Q parameter numbers 0 to 399 (1.0)
Q parameter values -99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 (5.4)
Labels (LBL) for program jumps 0 to 254 (3.0)
Number of program section repeats REP 1 to 65 534 (5.0)
Error number with Q parameter function 0 to 1 099 (4.0)

FN14
Digitizing parameters in digitizing cycles 0 to 5.0000 (1.4) [mm]
Spline parameter K -9.99999999 to +9.99999999 (1.8)
Exponent for spline parameter -255 to 255 (3.0)
Surface-normal vectors N and T with 3-D -9.99999999 to +9.99999999 (1.8)

compensation

13.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery
13.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery

A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in
RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off.
If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery, then
you must replace the batteries:
To exchange the buffer battery, first switch off the TNC!

The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained
service personnel!
TNC 426 CB/PB, TNC 430 CA/PA

Battery type:Three AA-size cells, leak-proof, IEC designation “LR6”
1 Open the logic unit: The buffer batteries are located next to the
power supply unit.
2 Open the battery compartment: With a screwdriver, open the
cover by turning it counterclockwise by 90°.
3 Exchange the batteries and take care to properly close the battery
compartment again.
TNC 426 M, TNC 430 M

Battery type:1 Lithium battery, type CR 2450N (Renata) ID No.
315 878-01
1 Open the logic unit: The buffer battery is located to the right of the
EPROMs of the NC software.
2 Exchange the battery. The new battery can only be inserted the
right way around.

Index
Symbole C F
3-D compensation ... 114 Coordinate transformation ... 319 Feed rate ... 21
Delta values ... 116 Copying program sections ... 69 Changing ... 21
Face milling ... 116 Corner rounding ... 142 For rotary axes, M116 ... 191
Normalized vector ... 115 Cutting data calculation ... 120 Feed rate factor for plunging
Peripheral milling ... 118 Cutting data table ... 120 movements: M103 ... 183
Tool forms ... 115 Cycle Feed rate in millimeters per spindle
Tool orientation ... 116 Calling ... 204 revolution: M136 ... 184
3-D view ... 402 Defining ... 202 File Management
Groups ... 203 File management
A Cycles and point tables ... 208 Advanced ... 49
Accessories ... 13 Cylinder ... 393 Overview ... 50
Adding Comments ... 73 Cylinder surface ... 297, 299 Calling ... 41, 51
Approach contour ... 133 Configuring with MOD ... 433
ASCII files ... 74 D Copying a file ... 43, 54
Automatic cutting data Data interface Copying a table ... 54
calculation ... 103, 120 Assigning ... 423 Deleting a file ... 42, 56
Automatic program start ... 414 Pin layout ... 461 Directories ... 49
Automatic tool measurement ... 102 Setting ... 422 Copying ... 55
Auxiliary axes ... 35 Data security ... 40 Creating ... 53
Axis-specific scaling ... 329 Data transfer rate ... 422 External data transfer ... 44, 59
Data transfer software ... 424 File name ... 39
B Datum setting ... 22 File protection ... 48, 58
Back boring ... 220 During program run ... 380 File type ... 39
Block scan ... 412 Without a 3-D touch probe ... 22 Overwriting files ... 61
Blocks Datum shift Renaming a file ... 46, 58
Deleting ... 67 With datum tables ... 321 Selecting a file ... 42, 52
Inserting, editing ... 68 Within the program ... 320 Standard ... 41
Bolt hole circle ... 279 Define the blank ... 64 Tagging files ... 57
Bore milling ... 224 Depart contour ... 133 File status ... 41, 51
Boring ... 216 Dialog ... 66 FK programming ... 158
Buffer battery, exchanging ... 469 Directory ... 49, 53 Circular paths ... 161
Copying ... 55 Converting FK programs ... 167
C Creating ... 53 Dialog initiation ... 160
Calculating Circles ... 363 Deleting ... 56 Graphics ... 159
Chamfer ... 141 Drilling ... 212, 218, 222 Input possibilities
Changing the spindle speed ... 21 Drilling Cycles ... 209 Auxiliary points ... 164
Circle center ... 143 Dwell time ... 337 Circle data ... 163
Circular path ... 144, 145, 146, 152, 153 Closed contours ... 164
Circular pocket E Direction and length of contour
Finishing ... 266 Ellipse ... 391 elements ... 162
Roughing ... 264 Enter the desired spindle speed, ... 107 End points ... 162
Circular slot milling ... 274 Error messages ... 79 Relative data ... 165
Circular stud finishing ... 268 Help with ... 79 Straight lines ... 160
Code number ... 421 Ethernet interface Floor finishing ... 293
Constant contouring speed: M90 ... 181 Configuring ... 428 FN 25: PRESET: Setting a new
Contour train ... 295 Connecting and disconnecting datum ... 380
Conversational format ... 66 network drives ... 61 FN 27: TABWRITE: Writing a Freely
Convert an FK program into Connection possibilities ... 427 Definable Table ... 381
HEIDENHAIN conversational Introduction ... 427 FN 28: TABREAD: Reading a Freely
format ... 167 Network printer ... 62, 430 Definable Table ... 382
External Access ... 445 FN xx: See Q parameter programming
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 I

Index F M P
FN14: ERROR: Displaying error M functions: See Miscellaneous Pallet table
messages ... 368 functions Entering coordinates ... 80, 85
FN18: SYSREAD: Read system Machine parameters Function ... 80, 84
data ... 373 For 3-D touch probes ... 449 Run ... 82, 94
FN20: WAIT FOR NC and PLC For external data transfer ... 449 Selecting and leaving ... 82, 89
synchronization ... 379 For machining and Parametric programming: See Q
FN26: TABOPEN: Opening a Freely program run ... 459 parameter programming
Definable Table ... 381 For TNC displays and Path ... 49
Full circle ... 144 TNC editor ... 453 Path contours
Machine-referenced coordinates: Cartesian coordinates
G M91, M92 ... 178 Circular arc with tangential
Graphic simulation ... 404 Measuring the machining time ... 404 connection ... 146
Graphics Milling an inside thread ... 237 Circular path around circle
Display modes ... 400 Mirror image ... 325 center CC ... 144
during programming ... 70 Miscellaneous Functions Circular path with defined radius
Magnifying a detail ... 71 entering ... 176 ... 145
Magnifying details ... 402 For contouring behavior ... 181 Overview ... 139
For coordinate data ... 178 Straight line ... 140
H For laser cutting machines ... 198 Free contour programming FK: See
Hard disk ... 39 for program run control ... 177 FK programming
Helical interpolation ... 153 For rotary axes ... 191 Polar coordinates
Helical thread drilling/milling ... 246 For spindle and coolant ... 177 Circular arc with tangential
Helix ... 153 Miscellaneous functions connection ... 153
Help files, displaying ... 442 MOD Function Circular path around
Help with error messages ... 79 MOD functions pole CC ... 152
Hole patterns Exiting ... 418 Overview ... 151
Circular ... 279 Overview ... 418 Straight line ... 152
Linear ... 281 Select ... 418 Path functions
Overview ... 278 Modes of Operation ... 6 Fundamentals ... 128
Moving the machine axes ... 18 Circles and circular arcs ... 130
I in increments ... 20 Pre-position ... 131
Indexed tools ... 105 with the electronic handwheel ... 19 Pecking ... 211, 222
Information on formats ... 468 with the machine axis direction Pin layout for data interfaces ... 461
Interactive Programming buttons ... 18 Plan view ... 401
Graphics ... 159 PLC and NC synchronization ... 379
Interrupting machining ... 409 N Pocket calculator ... 78
NC and PLC synchronization ... 379 Pocket table ... 106
K Nesting ... 346 Point tables ... 206
Keyboard ... 5 Network connection ... 61 Polar coordinates
Network printer ... 62, 430 Fundamentals ... 36
L Network settings ... 428 Programming ... 151
Laser cutting machines, miscellaneous
Positioning
functions ... 198 O With a tilted working
L-block generation ... 440 Oblong hole milling ... 272 plane ... 180, 197
Look-ahead ... 185 Open contours: M98 ... 183 Principal axes ... 35
Operating time ... 443 Probing Cycles: See User's Manual
Option number ... 420 "Touch Probe Cycles"
Oriented spindle stop ... 338
II
Index
P R S
Program Radius compensation ... 111 Status display ... 9
Editing ... 67 Outside corners, inside additional ... 10
Open new ... 64 corners ... 113 general ... 9
Structure ... 63 Reaming ... 214 Straight line ... 140, 152
Structuring ... 72 Rectangular pocket Structuring programs ... 72
Program call Rectangular pockets Subprogram ... 343
Program as subprogram ... 345 Finishing process ... 260 Superimposing handwheel
Via cycle ... 337 Roughing process ... 258 positioning: M118 ... 187
Program management. See File Rectangular stud finishing ... 262 Switch between upper and lower case
management Reference system ... 35 letters ... 75
Program name: See File Management, Retraction from the contour ... 188 Switch-off ... 17
File name Returning to the contour ... 413 Switch-on ... 16
Program run Rotary axis
Block scan ... 412 Reducing display: M94 ... 192 T
Executing ... 408 Shorter-path traverse: M126 ... 191 Tapping
Interrupting ... 409 Rotation ... 327 With a floating tap holder ... 226, 227
Optional Block Skip ... 415 Rough out: See SL cycles: Rough-out Without a floating tap
Overview ... 408 Ruled surface ... 314 holder ... 229, 230, 233
Resuming after an Run digitized data ... 311 Teach-in ... 140
interruption ... 411 Teleservice ... 444
Program section repeat ... 344 S Test run
Program sections, copying ... 69 Scaling factor ... 328 Executing ... 406
Programming tool movements ... 66 Screen layout ... 4 Overview ... 405
Projection in 3 planes ... 401 Select the unit of measure ... 64 Up to a certain block ... 407
Setting the BAUD rate ... 422 Text files
Q Setting the datum ... 38 Delete functions ... 76
Q parameters Side finishing ... 294 Editing functions ... 74
Checking ... 366 SL cycles Finding text sections ... 77
Formatted output ... 371 Contour data ... 290 Opening and exiting ... 74
Preassigned ... 386 Contour geometry cycle ... 287 thread cutting ... 232
Transferring values to Contour train ... 295 Thread drilling/milling ... 243
the PLC ... 379 Floor finishing ... 293 Thread milling, fundamentals ... 235
Unformatted output ... 370 Overlapping contours ... 287 Thread milling, outside ... 249
Q-parameter programming ... 356 Pilot drilling ... 291 Thread milling/countersinking ... 239
Additional Functions ... 367 Rough-out ... 292 Tilted axes ... 193, 194
Basic arithmetic (assign, add, Side finishing ... 294 Tilting the Working Plane ... 330
subtract, multiply, divide, Slot milling ... 270 Tilting the working plane ... 330
square root) ... 359 Reciprocating ... 272 Cycle ... 330
Calculating Circles ... 363 Software number ... 420 Guide ... 333
If/then decisions ... 364 Sphere ... 395 TNC 426, TNC 430 ... 2
Programming notes ... 356 Spline interpolation ... 173 TNC Error Messages ... 79
Trigonometric functions ... 361 Block format ... 173 TNCremo ... 424, 425
Input range ... 174 TNCremoNT ... 424, 425
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 III

Index T U
Tool change ... 108 Universal drilling ... 218, 222
Tool Compensation User parameters ... 448
Tool compensation general
Length ... 110 For 3-D touch probes and
Radius ... 111 digitizing ... 449
Three-dimensional ... 114 For external data transfer ... 449
Tool Data For machining and program
Tool data run ... 459
Calling ... 107 For TNC displays,
Delta values ... 100 TNC editor ... 453
Enter them into the program ... 100 Machine-specific ... 434
Entering into tables ... 101
Indexing ... 105 V
Tool length ... 99 Visual display unit ... 3
Tool material ... 103, 122
Tool measurement ... 102 W
Tool name ... 99 WMAT.TAB ... 121
Tool number ... 99 Workpiece material, defining ... 121
Tool radius ... 100 Workpiece positions
Tool table absolute ... 37
Editing functions ... 104 incremental ... 37
Editing, exiting ... 103 Workspace monitoring ... 406, 435
Input possibilities ... 101
Tool type, selecting ... 103
Touch probe monitoring ... 189
Traverse reference points ... 16
Trigonometric functions ... 361
Trigonometry ... 361
IV
Overview of Miscellaneous Functions
M Effect Effective at block - start end Page
M00 Stop program/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF n page 177
M01 Optional program STOP n page 416
M02 Stop program/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF/Clear status display n page 177

(depending on machine parameter)/Go to block 1
M03 Spindle ON clockwise n page 177

M05 Spindle STOP n
M06 Tool change/Stop program run (depending on machine parameter)/Spindle STOP n page 177
M08 Coolant ON n page 177

M09 Coolant OFF n
M13 Spindle ON clockwise/Coolant ON n page 177

M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise/Coolant ON n
M30 Same function as M02 n page 177
M89 M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or n page 204

Cycle call, modally effective (depending on machine parameter) n
M90 Only in lag mode: Constant contouring speed at corners n page 181
M91 Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to machine datum n page 178
M92 Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine n page 178
tool builder, such as tool change position
M94 Reduce display of rotary axis to value under 360° n page 192
M97 Machine small contour steps n page 182
M98 Machine open contours completely n page 183
M99 Blockwise cycle call n page 204
M101 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired n page 109
M102 Reset M101 n
M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F (percentage) n page 183
M104 Reactivate the datum as last defined n page 180
M105 Machining with second kv factor n page 459

M106 Machining with first kv factor n
M107 Suppress error message for replacement tools n page 108

M108 Reset M107 n
M Effect Effective at block - start end Page
M109 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge n page 185
(increase and decrease feed rate)
M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge n
(feed rate decrease only)
M111 Reset M109/M110 n
M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes n page 193
M115 Reset M114 n
M116 Feed rate for angular axes in mm/minn n page 191

M117 Reset M116 n
M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program runn n page 187
M120 Pre-calculate radius-compensated contour (LOOK AHEAD) n page 185
M126 Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes n page 191

M127 Reset M126 n
M128 Maintain the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM) n page 194
M129 Reset M128 n
M130 Moving to position in an untilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane n page 180
M134 Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes n page 196
M135 Reset M134 n
M136 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution n page 184

M137 Reset M136 n
M138 Select tilting axes n page 196
M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction n page 188
M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring n page 189
M142 Delete modal program information n page 190
M143 Delete basic rotation n page 190
M144 Compensating the machine’s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at n page 197
end of block
M145 Reset M144 n
M200 Laser cutting: Output programmed voltage directly n page 198

M201 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of distance n
M202 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of speed n
M203 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of time (ramp) n
M204 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of time (pulse) n

Heidenhain 426 430 TNC Manual 2001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heidenhain 426 430 TNC Manual 2001

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heidenhain 426 430 TNC Manual 2001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the programming modes described in the document?

What are some of the programming modes described in the document?

What are some of the machine operating modes described?

What are some of the machine operating modes described?

TNC 426

Soft keys for selecting functions in screen Straight line

Switching the soft-key rows Circle center/pole for polar coordinates

POSITIONING WITH MDI Cycles, subprograms and program section

TNC Model NC Software No.

TNC 426 CF, TNC 426 PF 280 477-xx

TNC 426 M 280 476-xx

TNC 426 ME 280 477-xx

TNC 430 CA, TNC 430 PA 280 476-xx

TNC 430 CE, TNC 430 PE 280 477-xx

TNC 430 M 280 476-xx

TNC 430 ME 280 477-xx

Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual:

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 I

Changed features of the NC software 280 476-xx

New/changed descriptions in this manual.

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 III

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 V

2 Manual Operation and Setup ..... 15

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 VII

3 Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI) ..... 29

4 Programming:Fundamentals of NC, File Management, Programming Aids,

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 IX

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XI

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XIII

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XV

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XVII

11 Test run and Program Run ..... 399

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XIX

13 Tables and Overviews ..... 447

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 XXI

HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop-oriented contouring

Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational and

1.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard

Keys on BC 120 only

Main menu dialog Function

CONTRAST Adjust contrast

H-POSITION Adjust horizontal position

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 3

V-SIZE Adjust picture height

SIDE-PIN Correct barrel-shaped distortion

TRAPEZOID Correct trapezoidal distortion

ROTATION Correct tilting

COLOR TEMP Adjust color temperature

R-GAIN Adjust strength of red color

B-GAIN Adjust strength of blue color

The BC 120 is sensitive to magnetic and electromagnetic noise, which

Press the SPLIT SCREEN key: The soft-key row

Select the desired screen layout.

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426, TNC 430 5

Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel

Screen windows Soft key

Left: positions. Right: status display.

Positioning with manual data input (MDI)

Screen windows Soft key